Home

Kaspro KA-Software Manual Rev_001

1. 55 boiler ew640 2 BUAR O button O cececee DB computer doooo00000 E emerson LOGOS EVSO00 photo E S000ph ico INSPEC2007 C lamp lib bg lib bg 27 O mainfla O mainfla 1 B motor MY flash c E eD 1 Ls Type Vector graph vz v State Find the LIB vg file under the software installation directory The vg files are classified into different categories stored in corresponding folders for easy browsing Select a Vector Graph to be imported click Import the Vector Graph will be copied to the vg folder under the current project directory It supports the simultaneous import of multiple Vector Graphs or bitmaps For shapes in the same folder you only need to select all shapes to be imported and click Import All the Vector Graphs and bitmaps imported or created for the entire project will be displayed in the Shape Library in the Project File Window so that the user can view and use the shapes conveniently Import Graphics e 5000_UNICODE_ENV A cygwin J O driver connector C Program C Program O MI Files e S000_U Files eVS000_V include rle PLEGE O printer SYSTEM EFES E alarm O arrow O balloon O button O lamp O others pipe O port O rectangle Otek Type Vector graph vg z Import A Vector Graph may include 32 states and it can be use in two modes static Vector Graph without changing states or a
2. Figure 1 shows the functions related to move the cursor There are eight functions Move up Move down Move left Move right Line head Line tail First Position and Last Position Move up move the cursor up to the previous line If the cursor is on the first line it will remain in the current position Move down move the cursor down to the next line if the cursor is on the last line of the Notebook it will remain in the current position Move left move the cursor left by one character if the cursor is on the head of a line it will move to the end of the previous line If it is on the head of the Notebook it will remain in current position Move right move the cursor right by one character If the cursor is on the end of a line it will move to the head of the next line If it is on the end of the Notebook it will remain in current position Line head move the cursor to the head of the current line If it is on the head of the current line it will stay there Line tail move the cursor to the end of the current line If it is on the end of the current line it will stay there First position move the cursor to the first position of the Notebook component If it is on the first position now it will stay there Last position move the cursor to the last position of the Notebook component If it is on the last position now it will stay there 260 Chapter 6 Components Note 1 The Last position is the last position o
3. RJ45 Pin 1 Pin assignment of 8 pin RJ 45 female connector 3 Communication module 1747 KE DF1 Port Allen Bradley PLC 1747 KE module DF1 RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 14 5 MODICON PLC Schneider af Electric i Schneider Electric Connection of MODICON Compact A E984 Momentum Quantum Series PLC with CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting 376 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC Type Modbus RTU COM COMO0O COM1 RS232 RS485 Data bits T this protocol Data Bits are set to 8 in a fixed manner Must be the same as the Stop Bits COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the 9600 19200 38400 Bits per Second COM port settings of the 57600 115200 ene l Must be the same as the l Even parity odd l Parity Even parity l COM port settings of the parity none PLC Must be the same as the PLC Station No 1 COM port settings of the PLC Note In fact the maximum setting range of the DIP switch on the Quantum series of PLCs is 1 64 PLC software setting Set the communication protocol of the COM port to Modbus RTU mode Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of Schneider Electric Reference website HT TP Awww modicon com Operable address range PLC Address nae Operab
4. Save and compile it and then perform offline simulation The operation effect is shown in the figure below 186 Chapter 6 Components Nenu Task Bar TIP A 6 20 2 Multi page Trend Curve Make the following modifications on the basis of the single page trend curve shown in the previous example In the Trend Graph tab select multiple pages in the Type drop down list box Select 15 in the No of Pages drop down list box Select the Save Time check box Set the Hold Scroll and Time register addresses respectively to LB100 LW100 and LW110 as shown in the figure below Print Trig Line Trend Graphics Channel Save Historic Data Type Multiple pag Atr Startfrom Left Sam Type Time Sa 1 X 1s Time Sam Type Continue MM Save Time Sam 34 FageNum 7 Channel 4 Plot Control Address HMI PLC Addr Type Address CodeTypeWordNo Trig Add HMI O LB D BIN 1 M Pause HMIC 0 iB 100 NN 2 M Roll HMIC 0 iw 10 BIN 3 Iw Time HMC 0 i BIN 187 Chapter 6 Components The settings for the track lines remain unchanged as shown in the figure below Trend G raph Component Attribute Print Print Trig Line Position Basic Attribute Trend Graphics Save Historic Data 16 bit signed 500 5 16 bit signed 5 16 bit signed 5 16 bit signed 5 Add two scale components and five vertical lines One scale component is horizontal and the other is vertical and
5. Minimum Computer Hardware Requirement Recommended Configuration CPU INTEL Pentium II or better Memory 128 MB or higher 512 MB is recommended Hard disk 2 5 GB or more at least 100MB free disk space CD ROM One 4X CD ROM optical drive Monitor 800 600 resolution 16 bit color or better Mouse Yes Keypad Yes RS 232 port At least one port available for serial communications between PC and HMI USB port USB A type port 1 1 or 2 0 Operating system Windows 2000 with SP4 Windows XP with SP2 VISTA Installation procedure After Inserting the KA SOFTWARE setup disk into the optical drive or downloading the KA Software from our website recommended the setup program will automatically run or you may manually run the Setup exe file under the root directory of the CD Or click Install open after downloading 2 Follow the instructions of the InstallShield Wizard click the Next button and enter the user s information as shown in the following figure Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for KASPRO_ENU_ 1 4 The InstallShield Wizard will install KASPRO_ENU_V1 4 on your computer To continue click Next Cancel Chapter 1 Installation of KA SOFTWARE In some cases you may encounter the following screen KASPRO_ENU_V1 4 InstallShield Wizard Setup Status The InstallShield Wizard is installing KASPRO_ENU_V1 4 Windows Security gt Don t install this driver software Yo
6. 354 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Operable address range of CJ series of PLCs 0 65535 DDD Internal relay 0 65535 DDD Holding relay 0 959 DD Auxiliary relay 0 4095 DDD Timer node 0 511 DDD Workspace register 0 32767 DDD Data register 14 2 Mitsubishi PLC MITE LEF 3h e Be ree Mitsubishi Electric Connection of MITSUBISHI FX Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting MITSUBISHI Select corresponding PLC type PLC Type MITSUBISHI FX2n l l FX2n according to different PLCs Must be the same as the COM Data Bits 7ors port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM port settings of the PLC Second 0 115200 port settings of the PLC parity none port settings of the PLC PLC Station Must be the same as the COM a ee Note MITSUBISHI FX2n is applicable only to FX2n series of PLCs and MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 is applicable to such models as FXOn FX1N FX2 MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 FX2n COM is Stop Bits 1 or 2 355 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs applicable only to the circumstance where the connection is made through the extended communication BD It supports PLC station No only when the connection is made through the communication module It is not required to set the PLC station No in other circumstances PL
7. 1 x 0 0 s 0 e 2047 f 0 Positive infinity S 1 e 2047 f 0 Negative infinity s 0 or 1 e 2047 f 0 Invalid number The above format is in accord with IEEE standard 754 and the arithmetic model is specified by the IEEE standard for Binary Floating Arithmetic Number 6 11 PY Number Display Component PLC Parts A Number Display component displays the current reading of a designated PLC register data No Vector Graph or bitmap can be associated with this component 1234 gt Adding a Number Display component 1 Click the Number Display component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the component attribute dialog box appears 153 Chapter 6 Components Basic Attribute Numeric Data Font Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address Wirite Address HMI HMIO PLC HMI HMIO Addr Type OW Adder o Addr Type Lv Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 1 Use Addr Tac Worda Description Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address The starting address PLC word register to be displayed by a numeric display component Data in the register may be interpreted as BIN or BCD format refer to Multi State Display component The No of words is restricted to 1 16 bits or 2 32 bits Address Type The address type must be properly set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Address The word register address corresponding to the nu
8. Click Simulate the simulation window of the empty project we have created appears as shown in the following figure 18 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project The project does not have any components and cannot execute any operations To exit the simulation program right click in the simulation window area and click close or press the Spacebar 2 2 Adding a Switch Component gt Part 2 Adding a switch component to the project 1 2 In the Project Structure Window select the HMI icon and right click click Edit Configuration in the shortcut menu as shown in the following figure hel s HELLII IE IT r Has Multi copy A Init Stark Window Import Recipe Edit i Attribution EE The program switches to the window editing mode as shown in the following figure HMIO whe O File Edit E Yiew Tools T Library D Window Help H Sue AO RBS 200082 2t Ds MA Hoo Abi aa wt 2 3a ur 5s 2DDLe te le E a d S E BDO aE CEEE aD 4 gba 5 Err dp P EL 8 5 Ti A FNAIRIRI EZERT EERNEEF i Project files window EO text_o1 re a a oe 9 HMI HMI i w vector Graph PLO Bit Setting Indicator lamp Component Graph element window Connector Switch Direct Window 11213 a Project construct window aa rA Es text_01 Word Setting Mutiple State HMI Hmo Display PLC on Dip f PLCO 0 m Multiple State Scroll Bar Switch 2 Moving Animation
9. Firstly assign a name to the variable Variables are divided into two types Reading variables and Writing variables They are distinguished from each other by read write attributes Reading variable means the macro code 292 Chapter 9 Macro Code will obtain the value of the variable from a designated address while Writing variable means writing an operating result from the execution of macrocode into a designated address Therefore read write variables are different variables for the same address Therefore it is recommended that Rand _W be used to distinguish them when naming a variable In this example LWO and LW1 are reading variables and LW2 is a writing variable Therefore we name them as follows LWO_R LW1_R LW2_W Please note that the variable name shall comply with the requirements of C language for variables Particular attention shall be paid to the following points 1 Variable name is case sensitive 2 Variable name cannot be a number or start with a number or contain special characters like the blank and backslash 3 Variable name cannot be any reserved keyword of the C language In the above example set the properties of the LWO_R as follows Macro Code Vanable Varnable Heal Data Type signed sha PLC Mo Address Type Lyf Address Word Length 1 Format DODO Awe Read Write Code Type EIN OK Cancel In the window for Data Type select signed short for R W R for Address Type L
10. Variable Limit Variable Alarm HMI HMIO PLC 0 HMI Addr Type LW Addr 3 Addr Type Code Type BIN i JUL Code Type WordNum 2 Use Ad WordNum Direction Up Down Left and Right indicating the direction of the bar movement Variable Alarm If this check box is selected the upper and lower alarm limits will be obtained from the PLC register described later in this section and the values for such limits are adjustable If this check box is not selected the upper and lower alarm limits depend on the values set in the Upper Alarm Limit and Lower Alarm Limit text boxes in the figure If the value of the Input Address is between the upper and lower limits the bar graph will not generate an alarm otherwise it will generate an alarm The color will vary with the settings of the Alarm Color Thus the user can use different colors for normal data and data which has exceeded alarm limits Variable Alarm Checked Unchecked Read Address Bar graph data Bar graph data Read Address 1 Lower alarm limit ae Read Address 2 Upper alarm limit ane Maximum Value Minimum Value Set the corresponding maximum value and minimum value for the bar graph Upper Alarm Limit Lower Alarm Limit If the Variable Alarm check box is not selected these two text boxes are valid Under this condition the panel use the two panel registers instead of two PLC registers to store the alarm limits Color Set bar color for normal value and bar color for value
11. You may also right click in the View or toolbar to view the toolbars as shown in the following picture i T um to page toolb G System toolbar D Drawing toolbar L Lum o page toolbar AT AMIO whe 5 x B Menu bar we C Basic toolbar F Position toolbar E Lib toolbar J Fill Style toolbar M Graph Element Window S Bile Edt E View Y Tools T Library O WindowW Help t Ai E ER 4BBLO 49 l Ja wf A SHRHe MMA BAZKXG BER 12 Se Hw NZS Z Graph element window Connector WHI PLC PLO Parts S Contiguration window P Compile information window Function Parts Message winodow pale sR OOnvoSAK O M m mg SE 0 Franed We we gy H Line widih toolbar Ane BOR AORO AOAO 5 Q 10 p ss al r E Project files window L Line style toolbar z T Tag position toolbar new O Project file window Project construct window Ee text_01 N Project construnct indowFrane4 d Lebrary aphics Labrary Macrocode onnecting ompilation Done Error 0 Toolst T r Component Labrary Window Graphics ToolbarfD4 Turn To Page Toolbar P4 Position Adjust Toolbar A Line Width Toolbartw y Line Style Toolbar System ToolbartT Stabe Toolbar a Database ToolbariLi Code Edit Toolbar B3 Filled Effect ToolbartE Project Structure Window Project File List Window Ei Compile Information Windowsi Component List Window 24 M
12. 6 29 1 Switch Window Function Key Component Attribute Function Key Enable Addr Tag ae Position a i Change lt 0 FrameD Keyboard Func Se C Message Board i Close window Popup window title bar Minimize iin fig go If the Function Key component is used to manipulate the window select the Switch Window option there are some specific window operation options in the list on the right Among them are Change Basic Window Goto Previous Change Common Window Change Fast Selection Window Popup Window Close Window Move Task Bar and Minimize Window Change Basic Window If this option is selected when the function key is pressed the current basic window including all of its sub windows will be terminated and it will display the basic window designated by the window number selected from the list on the right The basic window to be switched to must be an existing one so it can be selected in the list If the window you are looking for is not in this list go and create the window and then come back to this point Goto Previous Window This function closes the current Basic window and recalls the last active basic window It is only valid for basic windows For example if basic window 21 is the Basic window displayed just before window 32 and window 32 had a function key defined as Return to Previous then when the function key is pressed the screen will be clear and window 21 will be displayed Change Common W
13. Line Width The width of a line including 8 options Data Type Sets the data type with only two options of signed integer and unsigned integer 211 Chapter 6 Components Data type signed int 7 ETR Max and Min Value in Y Direction Set the corresponding maximum and minimum values of each track line along the Y direction 4 Click OKto complete the setting of the Oscilloscope component Scale 6 26 Scale Component Function Parts The Scale is used with Trend Graph Oscilloscope or XY Plot components It can also be applied on other occasions Often it is used with Meter component gt Adding a Scale 1 Click the Scale component icon and drag it to the window and the Scale Component Attribute dialog box appears Scale Position Style Arc Equal Division Line Length 10 Start Angle 0 End Angle 120 Style Set the style of the scale vertical horizontal arc or round As the following figure shows 212 Chapter 6 Components eI SIE E m ele f wildy f ss My sa 7 2 n A 5 e T Divisions Select the number of divisions on the scale Mark Length Select the length of scale mark Starting Angle Ending Angle Starting angle and ending angel of the arc 2 Go to the Position tab and adjust the size and position of the scale component Position and size of it can also be set by using the mouse to drag the component 3 Click OK to complete the setting i E Scroll Bar 6 2
14. New Graphics Creates a Vector Graph or a bitmap Import Graph Library Imports a Vector Graph or a bitmap Add Macro Adds a Macro Import Recipe Data File Import a Recipe data file Edit Initial Window Click this button to switch the window to the startup screen edit window where you can edit the initial display window which is processed upon the power on startup of the HMI panel as shown in the following figure Graph element window Connector HMI P l FLC Farts f Bit Setting Indicator lamp KA ut h f I L j Component Switch Direct Window The default initial window is the logo of Kaspro KA Software Line style toolbar As shown in the following figure the contents of the items in the menu correspond to each other in turn Line a a ATOW Style 6 Dashed Line Arrow Style 5 Dotted Line Arrow Style 4 Dashed Line dot Arrow Style 3 Dashed line dot dot Arrow Style 2 Arrow Style 1 Position adjustment toolbar 42 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Left by 1 ee le AT o h S o non HEE ell A Rotate by 90 Right by 1 Flip Vertically Up by 1 Flip Horizentally Down by 1 Align Vertical Center Align Left Align Hori Center Align Right Same Vertical Space Align Top Same Horizental Space Align Bottom Ungroup Align Hori Midline Group Align Vertical Midline Set to Bottom Same Width Set to Top Same Height Same Si
15. PLC Bit Word Address Operable Range Description Type Refer to operation Dword 20 l Word type instructions of Kinco Refer to operation word 10 l l l Word type instructions of Kinco Refer to operation word l l l Word type instructions of Kinco Note This is the address of the controller When using the touch screen pay attention to the rules of addressing For details refer to the description below Address type of the touch screen Depends on the number of bits of the servo and the value can only be 20 10 or 8 Address of the touch screen master address and sub address For example on page 117 in the user manual for Kinco servo driver the address is 2509 sub address is 06 and the number of bits is 20 The addressing diagram of the touch screen is shown as follows Detailed wiring diagram Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Kinco touch screen Controller PLC RS 232 interface RS232 COM port 9 pin D SUB male connector 2 TAD 3 RXD 5 GND 419 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for KA Manager Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for KA Manager The KA Manager management and configuration tool is shown in the following figure This chapter introduces the usage of this tool Start gt All Programs gt KASPRO gt KASPRO_ENU_ V1 4 gt KA Manager 15 1 Introduction to KA Manager KA Manager is the management and configuration tool for the KA SOFTWARE software The KA Manager tool consists of three operation proce
16. Sam Type Single page Atr Startfrom Left Sam Type Time Sam Type Continue Se as 10 PageNum 1 Channel 1 HMI PLC Addr Type Address CodeTypeWordNo Trig Add HMIC 0 LB 0 LIRAIT MNL Type Single page or multiple pages If the user selects the single page display mode it will only display the data change of the sampling values in the current page It does not allow the extension of the trend graph If the user selects multiple page display it allows the extension of the trend graph Data is displayed in the same way but when the trend graph rolls forward the previous sampling data will not be lost Historical data will be saved to the memory for future reference Please note that a maximum of 31 pages of historical data are available which is determined by the No of pages parameter Attribute Start from left or start from right In other words it determines whether the graph is displayed from the left to right or from the right to left when displaying the sampling data Sampling Time Time interval between two sampling points in seconds No of Sampling Points Number of sampling points displayed for one curve No of Pages When the Type is set to Multiple Pages this box is available Channel Number of tracks to be displayed corresponding to the number of word registers of the PLC data One word register corresponds to one track Pause The bit register that controls the start or stop of the trend
17. Save count 200 Stat ac Decoy Ever End addr 3800 Savemode Daily File Addr Format DDDDDD Save Buffer Default Max count limit F Event Length 16 Words The system will reserve an area starting from RW100 for saving the event entry data Suppose that we want to save Event Entry Management information and 200 event entries as the following table shows Rcp Card Addr Data RW100 Event list ene RW130 Content of 1st event entry RW150 Content of 2nd event entry RW170 Content of 3rd event entry 2777 174207 RW4090 Content of 199th event entry RW4110 Content a event The size of the reserved space is 200x20 30 4030 words For users this area cannot be written any write operation will cause unpredictable results The Initial Address can be designated by the user at his will There are two notes on that address 1 The desired memory area should not have any address conflict with the other registers in the project 2 The end of the memory are should not exceed RW60000 spaces over RW60000 is reserved by the system 269 Chapter 7 System Parameters 7 5 Print Settings Serial Port 0 Setting Seral Port 1 Seting Serial Port 2 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Printer SPRT SP DN16PH r Frnt attribute of the Event shows Print
18. Select Open Project in the File menu or click the icon to open an existing project HMIO whe EditfE Viewt ToolsfT Library Newt Wh Ctrl M Open O Ctrl 0 Savers Cbrl 5 Save S Ctrl Alk 5 Save Alla Closefic 1 Filbesck_ Ol bext_O1 wpj 2 EB aalaawpj 3 dd wpj QuitQi 2 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software e amp ex Ear Date modified Type File name itest Files of type KA Software Project File wpij Select a project file wpj file to be opened click Open or double click the project file to open it Close Project Select Close Project in the File menu the current project will be closed If it has not been saved before the program will ask the user to save it File EqitfE View ToolsiT Library i Mewin Chrl h Chrl 0 Cbrl 5 Closefc 1 Filbesxct_ Ol bext_O1 wpj 2 Et aataa wpi 3 dd wpj Quit After clicking Close Project 28 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software EqitfE Viewty ToolsiT Library Do Hewat Ml Ctrl M Open Cbrl O Savers Chrl 5 Save S Chrl Alk 5 I T Save lll 4 1 Esibextitext O1laa wipj 2 E bexthbesck 01 bexk wpj Etibext O01 aa apj all the current windows will be closed as shown below Fie E Edt E View V Screen P Draw PLCParts P Took T Option O Window W Help H OGa saRGO 9 aa eRe g if dE B amo H TB hee GBH ol I l
19. Write Address HMI HMI PLC oO Addr Type Addr o Code Type BIN Format DDODDD WordNo 1 B 3 After setting the various properties of the part close the dialog box you can see the part appears in the window You can drag the icon to adjust the size and position of the part For precise adjustment open the part Component Attribute dialog box and input the value of size and position in the Position tab The procedure of adding a function part is similar with that of the PLC part 5 2 About Component ID ID is a number automatically allocated to a component It is used to differentiate component on the screen The designer cannot manually designate or change the component ID The ID has two parts a combination of two or three letters indicates the full name or function of that component and a number used as a symbol to distinguish the component from other like components All the letter combinations and their meanings are listed below BL Indicator lamp WL Word Lamp Multi State Display SB Bit setting component SWD Word setting SW Switch MSW Multi state switch FK Function key MV Moving Parts ANI Animation NI Numeric Input ND Numeric Display 99 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE Tl Text Input TD Text Display BR Bar graph SC Scale IDW Indirect Window DW Direct Window AD Alarm Display TR Trend Curve RCP Recipe data transmission ED Event Display TM Timer
20. paragraphs give an introduction of these types of files User Data File The configuration project files including all the data of the configuration windows and images are packaged into a single user data file after being compiled The extension of this file type is pkg Only after the pkg file has been downloaded can the panel run the configuration project designed by the user Recipe File This option is only available when there is a recipe file imported into the project and affiliated to an HMI panel The recipe file is stored in one SRAM chip on the mainboard of the panel There is also a backup battery used to keep the data intact when the power is off LOGO File Logo is the first picture displayed during the power on stage when the embedded system has not been booted This picture is different from other pictures displayed in the configuration windows By editing the initial window the user can create his own logo file whose expansion is logo When the user wants to change the current logo he must edit the initial window in the project and compile the project then select the Logo File check box and download the file to the panel Once the logo file has been downloaded there is no need to download every time if the user doesn t want to change the logo The logo will be displayed every time the panel is powered on By default the checkbox for logo file downloading is unselected How to make your own logo Create a new project or
21. set the communication parameters of the OMRON PLC settings of COMO as follows Communication mode RS232 Bits per second 9600 data bits 7 parity check even parity stop bits 2 as shown below Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting ng Seral Port 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting nla u m n nn n nm n iy ft T Ea PLC Communication Time Out 1 Protocol Time Out 1 ms 3 Protocol Time Out 2 ms 3 Max interval of block pack WORDS Max interval of block pack BITS Max block package size WORDS it takes effect when HMI as slave PLC Communication Type PLC Communication Time Out s Protocol Time Out 1 ms Protocol Time Out Aims Max interval of block pack WORDS Max interval of block pack BITS Max block package size WORDS Max block package size BITS Right click on HMIO and select the Edit Init Window menu item to enter configuration window O as shown below 436 Chapter 17 Networking of Castor Series Touch Screens 7 amp Delete a Exchange Serial 0 and Serial 1 Replace HMI Type a Edit Init Window L 3 Import Recipe lR Edit BJ Attribute P Editing configuration Place a bit setting component set the PLC No to 0 and select S7 200 address for address type ing Component Attribute Basic Attribute Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position
22. to indicate a division operation Place a numeric display component corresponding to LW2 Select for Data Type Double for both integer place and decimal place are 4 Place a function key execute the macro and select macro_0 c in the drop down list box and 13 bkd m enter in the Tag tab as shown below 294 Chapter 9 Macro Code Function Key Enable Addr Tag Graphics Fosition Switch Window Change 0 FrameO macro_O c Keyboard Func Enter a C Map Keyboa Disable 0 TouchCalibrate Import Project To HMI C Message Board i Print Color c Pen E Magnify Multiple 1 0 Print Page 1 T ee el ee a The configuration window is shown as follows MID MI FEO MOU PERE f tF Fe PE Perform offline simulation and enter 5 and 2 in LWO and Lw1 respectively and press to obtain the result as follows Nenu wk Bar According to our estimation the result shall be 2 5 instead of 2 What is the problem If the user is familiar with the C language he will be aware of the reason quickly Because the data type for LWO RandLW1_ Ris short according to the default type conversion principle of the C language the division result will be rounded off to an integer How do we solve this problem It is simple just convert an input value into the type of double 295 Chapter 9 Macro Code LW2_W double LWO_R LW1_R After modifying the macro conduct th
23. 432 Chapter 16 Use of Setup Next to enter the next page and click Back to return to the previous page Calibrate Time Check whether the year month day hour minute and second is the current time If the time is not consistent with the current time calibrate the time manually IP Address Setup Modify the IP address and port number PORT of a target screen It is necessary to reset the screen after modification Buzzer Disabled Enable disable the buzzer After setting the option it is necessary to reset the screen Adjust Contrast Contrast Up Down and Brightness Brightness Up Down to achieve the best visual effect Adjust contrast and brightness according to different models of HMls Castor Models Adjust contrast and brightness Galaxy 80 Galaxy 104 Adjust brightness Galaxy 56 No contrast or brightness adjustment function Calibrate touch screen Set DIP switch 1 to OFF and DIP switch 2 to ON Follow the sign until you hear a click sound and the sign disappears Then set DIP switch 1 and 2 to OFF and press Reset 433 Chapter 17 Networking of Castor Series Touch Screens Chapter 17 Networking of CASTOR Series Touch Screens 17 1 Networking 17 1 1 Networking of One Touch Screen with Two PLCs of Any Brands Communication mode of these two PLCs can be 232 485 or 422 It is shown in the figure below OMRON PLO One Castor touch screen with COM1 connected with a Siemens
24. 5 Go to the Position tab adjust the position and size of the Multi State Setting component if necessary 6 Click OK button to complete the setting of the word setting component uu Multiple 6 5 4 PPY Multiple State Display Component PLC Parts A Multiple State Display component changes its appearance according to the value of a related PLC word address If the value of the word register is 0 the graphic corresponding to state 0 will be displayed If the value equals to 1 the graphic corresponding to state 1 will be displayed and so on The corresponding label will also be displayed if the option Use Tag is enabled PLC ig PLC PLC register register register value is 0 value is 1 value is 2 Chapter 6 Components gt Adding a Multiple State Display component 1 Click the Multi State Display component icon and drag it to the edit window the Basic Attribute tab of the Component Attribute dialog box appears Multi State Display Component Attribute Basic Attribute Multi State Display Tag Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMIO PLC HMI HMIO PLC Addr Type LW Add 0 Addr Type LWW Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 1 Use Addr Tae WordNo Description Priority A Reserved function not used for the time being gt Input Address PLC word register address that controls the state shape and label information of the Multi State Display component Address T
25. 9150 In the case of Pinyin The value of LW9150 is the serial number of the Chinese input method used character displayed in the current Chinese window 320 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System _ with Chinese characters 9152 9167 In the case of aa input method used to displayed the currently entered aie characters 9170 Used scroll in The value indicates the starting line of the input area notepad component 9130 Contents of online switching text base the value indicates text base index 9140 Display brightness Used by GEMINI and GALAXY series to display Se brightness level level 11 3 Nonvolatile Local Word LW10000 10256 TC Address 10000 RTC second BIN code value range 0 59 R W 10001 RTC minute BIN code value range 0 59 R W 10002 RTC hour BIN code value range 0 23 R W 10003 RTC date BIN code value range 0 31 R W 10005 RTC year BIN code value range 0 9999 R W 10006 RTC day BIN code value range 0 6 RW Note on RTC A user can display system time using corresponding component with its value writable However the user has to make sure its value must be within the value range For example the second cannot be written as 78 BIN If it is written as 78 the RTC will continue the sequence as 78 79 80 which may result in unpredictable errors 321 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System Mapping of other system parameters Note changes made to t
26. As shown in the above figure we use LWO to change the window Assume that the current window is Window 0 If LWO changes to 4 the current screen will change to Window 4 and then the value 4 will be written back to register LW1 Notes on Change Window function The Change Window operation carried out by the PLC Control is similar to the Change Window operation carried out by Function Key component The only difference is that it is triggered by the PLC register instead of the touch operation If the value of the Input Address 255 Chapter 6 Components register changes to a new valid window number the current window will be closed and the window designated by the Input Address will be displayed Then that number will be written back to the register located at Input Address 1 This operation will be triggered only when the value of the Input Address changes Only one screen change can be made each time the value is changed Report Printout This operation is used to control the printout of a designated window by use of a Word register If the content written into this Word address is a valid window number the content of the window will be printed out However during the print the window will not be changed to the printed window Please refer to the descriptions of Report Printout in Chapter 10 Write Data to PLC Current Base Window No This function makes the panel write the Window number of the curren
27. Basic Attribute Bit State Switch Tag Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address e Write Address HMI HMI PLC 0 HMI HMI1 AddrType LB Addr O Addr Type LB Addr a WordNa 1 Use Addr Tag WordNo 1 Use Addr Tac Description An internal node can also be selected as input origin or output target The descriptions of the internal nodes are as follows Bree ease The register is in the local memory 101 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE a RE e Index address of the recipe memory in X Y format PRR T A h 0 F absolute address of the recipe memory 0 10256 Address of the Local memory 0 261000 Index address of the recipe memory 0 261000 Absolute address of the recipe memory RB and RW point to the same area for example RB5 0 RB5 F and RW5 map into the same word of the recipe memory RB5 0 is Bit0 of RW5 However LB and LW map into different areas and their addresses in the memory are different LB9000 LB9999 in LB and LW9000 LW10256 in LW are reserved for system functions which have special usage so the user cannot use them like common nodes Therefore the user should use their special functions according to related instructions For details please refer to Chapter 11 If an index address accesses the recipe memory the index address itself serves as the base address the offset address is stored in the register LW9000 the physical address is the sum of the base address and the offset
28. D indicates decimal notation If it is necessary to operate the double word variable select 2 in the corresponding component address properties dialog box The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note The Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy series touch screens can communicate with the controller through the Modbus ASCII protocol so all controllers supporting the Modbus ASCII protocol and serial communication can be connected with such touch screens They support 01 05 and 16 commands of the Modbus ASCII protocol For detailed functional commands refer to manuals provided by Modicon For related hardware and software settings refer to the technical manuals provided by related controller manufacturers 1 MODBUS port RS 232 Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy MODBUS ASCII touch screen controller COMO0 COM1 RS232 COM port 2 MODBUS port RS 422 485 Kaspro MODBUS ASCII 403 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs CASTOR Gemini Galaxy controller touch screen RS422 485 COM port COMO0 COM1 14 13 VIGOR PLC Connection of VIGOR VB Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Human machine Interfaces KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC Se VIGOR we i Must be the same a
29. Figure 2 When the user touches the event information on the event display area window 4 pops up The user can close the window or toggle the state of LB10 Note that the event information which has been acknowledged is shown in different colors which are designated in the Event Display component a Current LETC Q Temprature 7 Nenu Task Bar Figure 3 When the Current Temperature register is set to 99 above the limit of 80 the LW30 event is triggered and the corresponding event information is displayed on the window Touch the information will pop up window 5 on the screen Note that the color of event information 0 has been changed to white which means the LB10 register has returned to its normal state Note 205 Chapter 6 Components a Do not select the print function if the panel doesn t connect with a printer On Trigger Return to Normal If the print function is selected but no printer is connected once the event is triggered the touch screen will display Print error which will flicker on the screen b Pop up windows will only be displayed when the corresponding event information is acknowledged by the operator To close the pop up windows place a function key component with the function of close window on it For details about function key components see section 6 7 Alarm Bar 6 24 Alarm Bar Component Function Parts The Alarm Bar component displays triggered alarm messages in the alarm ba
30. Graphics Position Lock Add other function keys in the same way by adjusting their positions to line them up 161 BBWS RZS Sill Chapter 6 Components Add a Text Display component according to the above description of the register LW9060 LW0975 if the font alignment mode for the Text Display component is set to Align Right the data starts from the highest word that is LW9075 Since the Text Input component covers 5 words the input address of the Text Display component is LW9071 LW9071 to LW9075 are used for saving the content the user has just input Go to the Font tab and set the alignment mode as Align Right 11213 4 5 617 8 9 ch a m FFK RAAR A AERO RK ARK IEK Pri it Normal aR eee a EE E E ae E E Text Display Component Attribution Input Address t _ Output Address GY HMI Hmo PLC Hm HMI y eee ae Add Type LW Addr S071 Addr Type LWW Font Size 24 Align Right hi Code Type BIN Fomat DDDDD Code Type BIN Word o 5 Use Addr Tag WordNo 3 Add a direct window component on window 0 The input address is LB9068 see chapter 11 for details Go to the Direct Window tab to designate window 7 for this component Go to the Position tab set the size of the DW component the same as that of window 4 250x125 Ci ie ee el oes a siete oS ke ua a j l tananana Direct Window Compo
31. Kaspro o SIEMENS PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy S7 200 series CPU touch screen PPI COM port COMO COM1 485 485 385 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Connection of SIEMENS 7300 Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommende l Optional Setting Precaution d Setting SIEMENS S7 300 HMI SIEMENS Select corresponding adapter l l PLC Type S7 300 type according to different SIEMENS S7 300 PC a HMI adapter communication adapters adapter COM COM0 COM1 RS232 RS485 Data bits eee this protocol Data Bits 7or8 are set to 8 in a fixed Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 1 or2 COM port settings of the Must be the same as the 9600 19200 38400 l Bits per Second 9600 19200 COM port settings of the 57600 115200 ake l Must be the same as the Even parity odd l Parity Odd parity COM port o of the parity none Human machine It is not required to set 0 255 station No this protocol l Must adopt PLC Station No 2 0 255 l recommended settings Multiple Applicable only to human machine Disabled Disabled Master Slave multiple human machine interconnection interconnection Human machine Applicable only to interconnection 38400 38400 115200 multiple human machine rate interconnection 386 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs PLC timeout 3 0 1 5 5 0 Adopt default settings constant Recommended
32. PLC Control gt Change Base Window When the value of the LB9052 is OFF and the return value function is not disabled to switch from Base Window 10 to Base Window 12 with the PLC Control gt Change Base Window function read address is D20 this switchover can be implemented only when the value of D20 is 12 After the system switches to Base Window 12 the PLC will automatically return the number 12 to the word address D21 If the return value function is disabled the system will not return the number 12 to D21 RAW F PLC Clear this bit will make all commands for writing into the PLC invalid When this bit is set ON all writing operations can be performed It serves as a logic switch for connecting and disconnecting the panel with PLC 9056 Disconnect Touch Clear this bit will enable the touch function When this bit is set ON the touch function is disabled and it would not respond to any touch operation It serves as a logic switch for the touch function 9060 Keypad control bit When a user enables the numeric input or text input the pop up of the function the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy all set this bit to ON keypad is controlledjand the direct window including a keypad will appear After by the component in successful entry or pressing ESC this bit will be set to the left part of the OFF The user can use this bit to control the keypad After successful entry or cancellation the keypad window will close automatically Fo
33. RWI LW96e0 Subtraction Overlay LW SuB LW96e86 ADD Overlay LHA ADD 4x100 4x104 Henu Task Bar This gives us a rough idea on the design purpose of the project The following section will detail the preparation process of the project Firstly create a new project and select MODBUS RTU for the PLC Type Create a Text Input component to display and modify the each group of recipe name Set the 284 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Word No to 4 Basic Attribute Enable Address Font Graphics Position Friority Momal Change byte order Read Address Write Address HMI HMI HMI HMIO PLC ddr Type 4X Addr Type LW Addr Code Type BIN Code Type BIN WordNo 4 Ilse Addr Tag WordNo Description TII Basic Attribute Numeric Data Enable Address Font Graphics Position Priority Nonmnal Read Address oO Write Address HMI HMIO PLC HMI HMI Addr Type RWI Addr 1 Addr Type Liv Code Type BIN Format DDDDDD Code Type BIN Use Addr Tag WordNa Create a Text Input component and a Numeric Input component to display and modify the recipe data on the PLC nt Attn bute Basic Attribute Enable Address Font Graphics Position Priority Noannal Change byte order Read Address Write Address HMI HMIOG HMI HMIG PLC Addr Type 4x Addr Type LWW Addr Code Type BIN Co
34. Sets the filling color Background Spacing Point Sets the background spacing point Transparent Color Implements transparent color effect of an added bitmap Gray Scale Switches the bitmap between color and gray 44 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Compile I Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Bytes Download Download Device Ethernet ba PC Serial Ho Cor IP Address 192 168 Fort 21845 Edit O ption Screen Grid Space a 20 aw In the palette of color related tools we provide 40 optional colors as shown in the following figure rm SE oa Ltt be ro co TT TTTTTTTT anne LO OA k a a i Hl e Be unFiled EER Eee ee epee eee BOBO ogoscomo In addition besides the 40 colors listed above you may make a customized setting of the color Select Custom and the following dialog box will appear Red Green Blue Cyan Magenta Yellow Hue Saturation ate New In this dialog box you may customize any shape color you want More color schemes are provided 45 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software in the color properties list Filled Color Ioj x basic colors basic colors hue saturation and luminance mixer hue saturation and luminance basic hue hue saturation and luminance roller red green and blue cube red green and blue mixer gray scale mixer cyan magenta and yellow cube cyan magenta
35. Switch to window 5 and set the Safe Level to Normal that is 1 in the Window Attribute window as shown below Window Name Frame5 o 5 Safe Level Special Attribute Print page a eyboard Position Use Background Color x o Filled Colo Wl Seckoround Width 4380 Transparence Oz Bottom Window _ 1 None 3 None Frame Pop Window Type i Tracking Monopoly Width 0 Di ELi z W Clipping Coherence 326 Chapter 12 Security Level Create a Function key in window 0 and its properties are designed as follows Function Key Enable Addr Tag Graphics Position Snitch Widow Change SLEEPS Sct Keyboard Func Enter amp Map Keyboard Disable a TouchCalibrate im part Export lt i Print Color f Black and white Multicolor Magnify Multiple 1 0 Print Page Import Project To HMI Current paper Horizontal Replace Paper Vertical Save it to the disk compile and then run in offline simulation mode as shown in the figure below 327 Chapter 12 Security Level Window Nenu Task Bor Press the Function key but the system fails to switch to window 5 The reason is that the current security level is 0 while that of window 5 is 1 so the user cannot access a window with higher security level from lower one To access window 5 the user has to enter the password for the security level 1 The reg
36. The data in this example is applicable to Castor 56 57 and 75 model projects In the case of projects for the Castor 104 enlarge the size to 640x480 Firstly add a Vector Graph BALL VG and draw a bouncing ball with a round shape If you have a more vivid picture just import it Place a moving part in the upper left corner of the screen set the address to LWO and select move along X and Y axes with the maximum value of 320 and the minimum value of 0 select the Vector Graph BALL VG Place two value setting components and select to set them when the window is open set LW3 and LW4 to 5 Place four state setting components used to increase decrease the value of LW3 and LW4 The planned register space is as follows LWO State of the moving shape component always 1 LW1 Displacement of the moving shape along X axis LW2 Displacement of the moving shape along Y axis LW3 Moving speed along X axis LW4 Moving speed along Y axis 300 Chapter 9 Macro Code Creating a macro Define the following variables as shown in the figure below Parameters Data type Param name PLC Station Reg 4ddre Address Mo of word OptMode signed short hul Oo Livy 1 1 Read signed short hul w 0 Livy 1 1 write signed short lwz Y D L y 2 1 Read signed short ye 0 Livy 2 1 write bit direction xr o0 LE 0 i Read bik direction x we O LE O i Write bit direction wr o0 LE 1 ii Fead bit direction ww O LB 1 1 write signed short speed x 0 Liv
37. operation 444 Chapter 17 Networking of Castor Series Touch Screens aT KADownload Select Section Data File L Recipe File O LOGO File Download File Path c program files kaspro_enu_yv1 4 project marual testing manual testing pkg USB port i F Download COM NULL o Exi Communication Type 17 2 Mutual Download Between Different Touch Screens Downloading between different touch screens must be conducted via a PC First upload from a touch screen to the PC and then download from the PC to another touch screen For upload methods refer to related descriptions in Chapter 15 A Caution Only the CASTOR series supports the networking function 445 Appendix System Messages Appendix System Messages Castor Gemini Galaxy System Messages Table Messages Description PLC no response cc pp d PLC no response Meaning of the three groups of digits following the message cc HMI No pp PLC station No d Serial port No PLC response error PLC response error The PLC responds to an unexpected message which may be caused by a read or write command Check whether the PLC is correctly configured Socket Connect Error Network connection error Check whether the IP address port number an
38. 0 before the number For example write 8 as 08 2 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note Allen Bradley SLC500 series PLCs includes SLC5 01 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 SLC5 04 and SLC5 05 series of CPUs Where SLC5 01 and SLC5 02 series do not provide RS 232 interface and cannot communication with the touch screen directly through the DF1 protocol Instead they have to be configured with communication module 1747 KE and connected with the touch screen through the DF1 interface on the module SLC5 03 SLC5 04 and SLC5 05 can be connected with the touch screen through the DF1 interface on the CPUs In addition all types of CPUs can be connected with the Kaspro touch screen through the DH485 interface on the CPUs For related software and hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by ROCKWELL 1 CPU SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 05 CPU DF1 Port Allen Bradley PLC SLC500 series CPU RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 2 CPU SLC5 01 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 05 CPU DH485 Port Kaspro Allen Bradley PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy SLC500 series CPU touch screen DH485 interface COMO0 COM1 RJ 45 female connector 375 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs
39. 115200 COM port settings of the PLC Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs l l Even parity odd Must be the same as the Parity Even parity l l parity none COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the PLC Station No 0 255 COM port settings of the PLC PLC software setting Set the communication protocol of the COM port to Hostlink Refer to related PLC programming software user manual of OMRON Reference website HT TP oeiweb omron com oei TechManuals PLC htm Operable address range PLC Operable aaa Address Description Range Type 0 65535 DDD BB I O and internal relay 0 65535 DDD BB Holding relay 0 65535 DDD BB Link relay 0 255 DDD Timer counter register Note D indicates decimal notation B indicates bit code and the value range is 0 15 0 9999 R DDD ow The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note OMRON CQM series of PLCs covers CQM1 and CPM1H series Where CQM1 CPU11 and CQM1H CPU11 do not provide standard serial ports and have to be configured with OMRON CPM1 CIFO1 RS232 communication adapters or OMRON CPM1 CIF 11 RS422 communication adapters to establish the link with the touch screen through the Host Link Other CPUs of CQM series provide RS 232 interface and it can be connect
40. 25x25 the size of the whole keyboard is 250x125 For displaying the content of this input add a line 250 pixels wide and 25 pixels high So the complete keyboard is 250 pixels wide and 125 pixels high In this example we use window 7 as the keyboard window Use the window attribute dialog box to change the size of the window to 250x125 Window Attribute Window Name Frame o Safe Level Lowest Special Attribute Print page E Position Use Background Color x 0 m Width 250 Transparence Os Bottom Window 1 None 2 None ki 3 None Frame Fop Window Type Widi W Tracking Monopoly l 0 a fi ale Wl r iiaeia if Clipping Coherence Add function keys on window 7 and designate the ASCII code for the key In the following figure we put a function key and configure it for inputting a for details about function key refer to section 6 7 160 Chapter 6 Components Function Key Enable Addr Tag Graphics Position Switch Window Change 0 Framel Keyboard Func PA Map Keyboard Disable Import Project To HMI Color f Black and hite Multicolor Magnify Multiple 1 0 Frnt Page f Curent paper Horizontal Replace Paper Vertical Go to the Tag tab set the tag for the key as a Go to Graphics tab and select a graphic for the key Go to the Position tab set the size of the key to 25x25 Function Key Component Attribute Function Key Enable Addr Tag
41. A4lE 6 Code Edit Toolbar E ClrHeal D Filed Effect Toolbar E Ctrl Alt H Project Structure Window Chrl Alt C Project File List Window F Ctrl Alt F Compile Information Windowih Ckrl Alt m1 Component List Windows Crl Alt E The View menu provides control over the display of various toolbars and windows To make the expected toolbars and windows visible in the user interface check the corresponding item on the View menu Standard toolbar As shown in the figure the contents of the standard toolbar correspond to the contents in the menu in turn New 27 det alk st aAA About Open N Display Components Sace Attributes Name Save All Print rint Preview Cut Multi Redo Copy Copy Undo Paste Delete New Project Create a project Open Project Open an existing project Save Save the current project Save All Active Files Save all the currently opened active files Cut Cut 39 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Copy Copy Paste Paste Multiple Paste Multiple copy Delete Delete a component Cancel Cancel the latest operation Restore Restore the latest cancelled operation Print PrKaspro Print PrKaspro Print Print Properties Display the properties of an object Show Component Name Show the name of a component About KA SOFTWARE version description Multi Copy This function is used to make multiple copies of selected parts which can save
42. B Text Input 6 12 Text Input Component PLC Parts A Text Input component will display the current value of the PLC register data as decoded by the standard ASCII character table If the Trigger Address is active turned ON when the graphic area is touched text input will be available through a keypad Entered data is put into consecutive PLC registers starting with the Input Address The ASCII code stored in the lower byte is displayed on the left and the one stored in the higher byte is displayed on the right BA AAAAAAA Touch the shape a ERCA ACE A ee E i o 5 Enter data from keypad ylelle gt Adding a Text Input Component 1 Click the Text Input component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the Component attribute dialog box appears 155 Chapter 6 Components Text Input Component Attribute Basic Attribute Enable Address Font Graphics Position Priority Normal Change byte order Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC M HI HMIO PLC Addr Type RWI Addr 0 Addr Type LW Code Type BIN Format DDDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 5 a Description Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address The PLC word address registers to be displayed and modified by the text input component a maximum of 16 words with each word containing two ASCII characters Address Type The address type must be properly set refer to PLC ma
43. BEANE Graph element window 4 A Project files window Connector BO test1 J of HMI oS a Vector Graph Serial Ethe Port Field Bus Project construct window HMI PLC PLC Parts Function Parts Project Database Message window HMI count 0 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project 3 Choose New Project in the File menu the following dialog box appears Name the project you want to create You may also click gt gt to select a path for storing the new project files In this example the project name is test_01 Click Create Project Name test_0 Content E AProgram Files KASPARO ENU Y1 44 projectstest 01 gt OF Cancel Browse for Folder Select Folder gt Public 4 jE Computer e osc b g RECOVERY D b gk DVD RW Drive E bo FreeAgent Xtreme F bo a Removable Disk G gt g Norton Backup Drive dO manual pics d tablet pc 4 Select the proper communication connection mode for the project The CASTOR touch panel supports serial port and Ethernet connection while the GEMINI series support only the serial port for now some GALAXY models support Ethernet also Click Communication Connection in the Component Library window there are two icons represent serial port and Ethernet mode respectively Click the icon of the proper communication mode to select hold and drag it to the Project Structure Window A wire appears in the Project Structure Window Chapter 2 Ma
44. Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position SettingModef Set at Window Open z Set Value 200 Create an Indicator lamp component with the Address Type set to LB and the Address to 0 to display the state of bit register LBO Bit Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bit Lamp Tag Graphies Position Priority Normal nput Address D gt p Output Address Hal HMO PLC Hil HMid PLO D Addr Type LB Add Addr Type Addr 0 Code Type BIN Format OC DDD Code Type BIN Format OOOOD wordo 1 C Use Addr Tag wordo C Use Addr Tag Description BLO Bit lisplay Component Attnbition Basic Attribution Pit Lamp Taz Graphics Position Function Normal 89 Chapter 4 Windows 4 Create a number display component with the Address Type set to LW and the Address to 1 to display the state of LW1 Data Display Component Attribution Basic Attribution Wumeric Data Font Priority Mormal Input Address Output Address Htl HMIO 0 HMI HMI 0 Add Type Lw Addr Addn Type Lw Add Code Type BIN Format DOODO Code Type BIN Format DDDDD WordNo 1 D Use Addr Tag wWword ao D Use Addr Tag Description NDO 5 The finished project window is shown as follows 90 Chapter 4 Windows 6 Save compile and perform an online simulation of the project LBO is set to ON and LW1 is set to 200 References for this example Sec
45. CPU Port touch screen RJ 12 port PLC RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB male connector Connection of KEYENCE KV 16DT Series PLC with CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen 410 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting KEYENCE PLC Type KV 16DT Must be the same as the COM Data Bits 7or8 port settings of the controller l Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 l port settings of the controller l 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Bits per Second 9600 l 57600 115200 port settings of the controller l l Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity l l parity none port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM PLC Station No port settings of the controller Controller software setting Refer to Keyence KV 16DT user manual Reference website hitp Awww keyence com global home page Operable address range Operable ve Bit Word PLC Address Type Description Range ee Counter contact 0 249 Woa comae 020 00 Caunermemoy Woa meanen oze ooo Tine daiamemoy Woa mepes oze ooo Tne daiamemoy a4 Temporary data memory Note D indicates decimal notation The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the PLC Some register addresses are reserved by the system and cannot be used For details refer to Keyence K
46. Component Function Parts Ready Mouse x 166 y 236 Width 120 Height 80 Number 19 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project S 3 Inthe PLC Components frame in the graph element window on the left click th hold drag and drop it to the configuration screen editing area After dropping the switch the General dialog box for the Bit Control Components appears Set the input output address of the bit control component as shown in the following figure Bit Msplay Component Attribution Pasic Attribution Bit Lamp Taz Graphics Position Priority Input Address Output Address HMI HIO PLC HMI PLC Addr Type LB Add JU Addr Type Addr Code Type Format ODDDD Code Type Format DODDD Word a Worda E Description BLU 4 Change to the Switch tab Set the Switch Type Select Toggle Switch from the list as shown in the following figure Bit setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bit State Setting Taz Graphics Position Type C 5 Change to the Tag tab select Use Tag enter the text which will correspond to state 0 and state 1 in Content and select the label color You can modify the alignment mode 20 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project font size and color of the labels Basic Attribution Bit State Setting Graphics Position iW Use Tag Language English Tag List State Wo Content Align Fort Size Font Color Left 16 6 Swi
47. Extend Attribute tab HMI Attribute Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting lf Screensaver 10 Win Saverwin O Fram Pub Win Att Display below the basic wir W Use org win if screen saver ends Pop Win Atr Display on the top layer 7 W Upload Open backlight if alarming Init Window 0 Frame0 Init Public Window 4 Common Vi aBB88E Fast selWin 9 Poct Selec y 888888 Use Buzzer FileList Win U Framell TextLiblang 4 Deflang 1 Cursor Color Screen saver Indicates the time period after which the touch screen will enter the screen saver state if no touch operation is conducted during the time period The time here is counted in minutes Saver win Set the window to goto when screensaver mode is active 266 Chapter 7 System Parameters Back light energy save If checked will turn off backlight If there is no touchscreen activity in the specified time period The time period is specified in minutes Open Backlight if Alarming If this box is checked and an alarm condition begins while the backlight is turned off because of the Energy Saving feature the backlight will be turned on Initial Window No The number of the first window to be displayed by the system when the user has powered on the system and a touch panel application program begins The default initial window is window Q A Note The
48. For example if LW9000 50 the index address RWI 100 will access the data of the addresses of RW 150 100 50 For details refer to Chapter 8 Recipe Data 5 5 Vector graph Shapes and images are organized in libraries in KA Software interface There are two kinds of image Vector Graph and Bitmap The library of Vector Graphs is named as vg file and Bitmap library is named as bg file The user can create vector graphs with the drawing tools in KA Software drawing toolbar Vector graphs are suitable for simple shapes like buttons lamps pipes and more Each vg or bg file has up to 32 states and 32 different appearances so the user Can use one single graph to represent a multi state variable or part vg and bg files are stored in the Shape Library in the Project file window as shown in the following figure Project files window D aa 0 HMI 1 Yector Graph lamp 17 vg NUM_KEYOO1 g NUM_DISP_BAROO1 vg gt NUB_CTRL_BAROO1 vg G 1 g We ARROW BLUE1 24 bg We ARROW BLUE1 23 bg e ARROW BLUE1 20 bg e ARROW BLUE1 19 bq e ARROW BLUE1 16 bg e ARROW BLUE1 15 bg Bitmap 1 bq some shape library files are installed into the KA Software folder with the program files the user 102 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE can import these pre made shapes into their own projects Click the Cal Import Shape Library icon on the toolbar and the following dialog box appears Import Graphics
49. IP PORT Modify the IP address and port number of the touch screen Only CASTOR series supports this function Enter an IP address like 192 168 0 255 It is usually not required to modify the port number Click Update and the Setting IP PORT Successful dialog box appears Click OK and the IP address of the target panel changes to 192 168 0 255 Communication Set Communication Type Serial pot IF MULL PORTINULL Get HMI IP PORT information Set Click Get and the IP address of the target screen is displayed as 192 168 0 255 This means the IP address has been successfully modified 429 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for KA Manager Communication Set Communication Type Serial pot IP NULL Port NULL Get Version Get HMI IP YPORT information Uncompile Operate i PORT 21845 Refresh IP PORT Ip 192 168 0 255 nr 21845 Return Section Refresh Section Return User Application Status Write Ferre Return Set Application Status Write Aiootts Note To obtain P update IP address the user can select the communication mode of serial port or USB only Jumping Selection Area Jump to User Program Status The target panel jumps to run the configuration program Jump to Setup Program Status The target panel changes to the SETUP interface Update Operation Area To update the kernel or file system of the embedded OS the user can only select a communication mode of serial port or network port GEMINI GAL
50. Ine value 1 uepre E Basic Attribute Multi State Setting Taa Graphics Position SettingMode Sub value Dec value 1 a 288 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Overlap the component whose Setting Mode is Sub Value on the Multiple State component created earlier whose type is also subtraction and whose address is LW9000 Overlap the component whose Setting Mode is Add Value on the Multiple State component created earlier whose type is also addition and whose address is LW9000 In this way when we browse recipe data the value of LWO changes to indicate the group number of the current data Place a keypad on the window and make some text decoration and the project is completed Recipe Card Group aie Recipe Data RHI 6 LHJH Subtraction Overlay LH SUB 4100 48104 eee LW9e866 ADD saa Overlay LHO ADD Save it to disk compile it and run the project in the offline simulation mode Recipe Card Group Recipe Data RHI LH9 A0 Subtraztoi Overlay LHO SUB 44168 4104 LUGe e ADD Lo im Overlay LHO ADC Henu Task Bar Enter the above mentioned ten groups of recipes into the recipe memory Then we turn to the group 8 change the recipe name to KKKKKKKK change the data to 1234 and click Download as shown in the figure below 289 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Recipe Card Group a a Data RHI RHI 4 1234 fer pt W660 Subtraction Overlay LW8 S
51. KA Software Software After selecting the image and clicking Open the logo image is imported into the editing window and you can adjust the size and position When the adjustment is done save it and close the window to return to the project window Connect the HMI panel and PC compile the project and click the download icon the dialog box we have discussed above appears KADownload m Select Hml HMI a mer L HMM Station HMI Information m Select Section Data File L Recipe File Communication Type USE port IF MULL COP MULL Download File Path cispragram hles kasproa_enu_v1 4 project gqalaxy 56 demo galasy 56 demo galaxy56 demo pkg PORT NULL Download MULL Exit Select LOGO File checkbox and click Download If the user only wants to download the logo and does not want to download the user data file unselect the User Data File checkbox After the download is finished click OK Reset the panel it will show the logo which has just been downloaded during the power on stage of the start up process If no logo file has been downloaded the panel will display LOGO Error instead Chapter 4 Windows Chapter 4 Configuration Windows lamp 19 ve etatel C eT 4 1 Window Type A Window is the basic elem
52. LANAA Perform simulated operation and click START The dominos will fall down one by one from left to right and then will stand up one by one from right to left The speed is quick without intervals In the Timer tab select for Response Mode Delay for Execution Cycle 10 as shown below Trigger Mode Exe Cycle 100ms 10 Response Mode DEES Response State On 7 Repeat Times 1 Zero means repeat all along 305 Chapter 9 Macro Code Compile the codes and run the macros again We can see that the dominos will be falling down or standin up after a delay of 1 second We can see from the above example that the timer triggered macros can be used to conduct sequential operations to implement sequence and time control and to flexibly achieve desirable results 306 Chapter 10 Print Chapter 10 Print The print function is often used in the Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy In this document there are two types of print operations One is the print through the Windows system and the other is the print through the touch screen This chapter describes only the print with the touch screen To use the print function with the touch screen it is necessary to enable the printer in the Print Settings tab in the HMI Attribute window After that the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy will display a dedicated print window therefore if the print function is selected a maximum of five pop up windows can be displayed at the same time Yo
53. No COM port settings of the controller Controller software setting Refer to ABB 07KR51 user manuals 414 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Operable Range rom Description Operable address range 00 00 68 15 Input node 00 00 68 15 D D Internal auxiliary 0 000 00 099 15 U 233 00 255 1 DDDH node D D 000 00 125 15 DDDH Link relay node Output node DH DH 00 00 68 15 Input register Output register 000 00 099 15 U 230 00 255 15 DDDH Internal register DH DH H Indirect current word KW 001 00 031 15 D l register Internal double 000 00 007 15 word register Indirect double 000 01 007 15 D l word register Note D indicates decimal notation H indicates hexadecimal notation and the value range is 0 F 00 00 68 15 10 8 pin round male connector Detailed wiring diagram CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen PLC RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB male connector ABB 07KR51 series CPU RS 232 interface 8 pin round male connector 415 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 14 18 Kaspro Master and Kaspro Slave Master Slave Protocol Connection KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Setting PLC Type Kaspro Master Kaspro Slave Data Bits COM port settings of the controller Must be the same as the Stop Bits COM port settings of the controller Must be the same as the Bits per 96
54. OK Communication Set Communication Type Communication Set E Network E 355 O Serial Fort PORT 21845 3 USB Fort Serial NO COM b Download via serial port Open the communication setting dialog box Select the Serial Port option select the serial port number of your PC in the Serial Port No drop down list click OK Communication Set Communication Type r Communication Set O Network mn IF zga Serial Port a PORT 21645 Serial NO COM Ea COM O USB Port c Download via USB port The default download mode is USB If you use the USB download mode it is not necessary to set this option again 421 m Communication Set Ss Download Operat N Communication Type USE port g3 Upload Operate KS System Operate Get Version m Communication Type r Communication Set Network Cancel Serial Port USB Port Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for KA Manager IP I 7 PORT NULL Serial NO NULL IP 208 e 28 255 255 C PORT 21845 SerialNO COM1 Download selecting section The same as the Download in the KA Software Refer to the downloading described in Chapter 3 Download User Data Files Download compiled configuration project data files pkg to the touch panel Click Download User Data File Communication Set ye Download Operat Upload Operate J System Operate 5 6 Get Version m Uncompile
55. Operate Communication Type 3 erial port IP NULL PORT NULL SerialNo EOM Download Section LOGO Show Set Download User Data Show LOGO Look in di test 7 Name i HME di image da tar di temp File cae Files of type Date modified Type Open as read only g Select a compiled configuration project file pkg and click Open 422 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for KA Manager If your configuration project consists of multiple touch panels as shown below s Siemens 7 200 HMD Pr Siemens 7 200 Select Section Data File Ll Recipe File O LOGO File Download File Path c program tiles kaspro_enu_v1 4 projectstest test pkg Communication Type Serial port NUL PORT NULL COM COM BPS 1 15200 Downloading a recipe Click Download Recipe select a compiled recipe file rcp file click Open to download the file 423 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for KA Manager F ACES B Download Operat a a Js Upload Operate m Communication Set Communication Type Net P gi o mienia le Ri UM HMI lannan i mw System Operate oe SerialNO NULL Get Version r Download Section Uncompile Operate Download User Data c Download Recipe Download LOGO Downloading a LOGO Click Download Logo select a compiled configuration project in the tar folder and then select the HMI LOGO file in the HMI folder and
56. S7 200 PLC and COMO connected with an OMRON PLC Caution 1 Since COM1 is connected with a Siemens S7 200 PLC COM1 must be set with the communication parameters of the Siemens S7 200 PLC Since COMO is connected with an OMRON PLC COMO must be set with the communication parameters of the OMRON PLC Parameters on the right are default parameters and they will be created after the touch screen is connected with the PLC Only an advanced user can modify these parameters otherwise it may cause communication errors 2 The settings of these communication parameters depend on the internal communication parameters of the PLC so they may vary in different situations 434 Chapter 17 Networking of Castor Series Touch Screens Set the communication parameters of the Siemens S7 200 PLC as follows Communication mode RS485 2 Bits per second 9600 data bits 8 parity check even parity stop bits 1 as shown below Task Bar tend ts Serial Port 0 Setting Protocol Time Out 1 ms Protocol Time Out 2 ms Max interval of black pack WORDS Max interval of black pack BITS Max block package size WORDS Max block package size BITS PLO Communication Type PLO Communication Time Outs Protocol Time Out Tms Protocol Time Out Aims Max interval of block pack WORDS Max interval of block pack BITS Max block package size WORDS Max block package size BITS 435 Chapter 17 Networking of Castor Series Touch Screens
57. a project starts running or an application window is opened to conduct initialization For example when Frame0O starts up LBO is set to ON and LW is set to 200 87 1 Create a bit setting part with the Address Type set to LB Address to 0 and the Type to Set to ON at window open Bit setting Component Basic Attribution Bit State Setting Tag Priority Normal Input Address HMI HMIO Addr Type Code Type BIN wodo Attribution PLC T dd Format DODOD D Uze Addr Tag WordNo Graphics Position Dutput Address HMI HIO PLC 0 Addr Type E Adar 0 Code Type BIN Format DDDDD D Use Addr Tag Chapter 4 Windows Description SBO bit setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Hit State Setting Tag Graphics Fosition Type 2 Create a multi state setting component with the Address Type set to LW Address to 1 Type to Set to ON at window open and Set Value to 200 Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position Priority Output Address HMI Input Address HMI PLC 0 SIRLE HMIO Addr 1 Format DDDDD Addr Format DDDDD Addr Type Addr Type Li Code Type BIN Code Type BIN WordNo L WordNo 1 SswDO Description 88 Chapter 4 Windows Word Setting Component Attribution
58. and yellow mixer red axis green ads blue axis cyan ads magenta axis yellow axis Users can customize their own colors when needed Selecting components Methods for selecting components 1 Directly select Click a component to be selected directly 2 Select all components Choose Select All Components in the Edit menu and all components in the current screen will be selected When the direct select tool is activated Clicking a component with the Ctrl key held will make a copy of the component A Note To select multiple components or to enter the multiple selection mode drag the mouse and select at least one component then press and hold the Shift key additional components can be selected Modifying component size You can click a component to change its size in the following method Click to select a component select any one of the eight green points blocks of the component and drag the point with your mouse as shown in the following figure 46 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software MIO E E E E it E m a Part Fill and Frame To change the color of the part outline or the fill color select a component and click the arrow after the Line Color icon to change the frame color To change the fill color click the arrow after the black box as shown in the following figure HBREEHEEE HEREHEHREE B EORSOREBD NOOUBBUBLHO OM UBHABOUOO Custom Color Text Cl
59. bitmap to display the graphic of the Multi State Display component 5 Go to the Position tab adjust the position and size of the Multi State Display component if necessary 6 Click the OK button to complete the setting of the Multi State Display component Note on Data Format Types BIN binary format 15 14131211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 O 1 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 tf 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 132 Chapter 6 Components BCD binary coded decimal format 1514131211109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 3 2 1 0 10 10 10 10 thousand hundred ten one For example l 6 0 4 3 2 0 10010100 BIN data 1 2 0 2 0 2 1 2 0 2 1 2 0 2 0 2 decimal data 128 16 4 148 1 0 1001 0100 BCD data 9 49 4 10 decimal data 94 1001 binary 9 decimal 0100 binary 4 decimal i Multiple State Switch Multiple State Switch Component PLC Parts The Multiple State Switch is a combination of Multiple State Display component and Multiple State Setting component It displays different states a maximum of 32 states depending on the value of the PLC word address It also defines a touch area that when activated writes a specified data to the PLC word register The input address can be the same as the output address or different from it a pan gt Adding a Multiple State Switch 1 Click the Multiple State Switch icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute
60. column being displayed by changing a system reserved register LW9130 The usage of Text Library is discussed in detail in this section Enter Text content to the Library 1 Click the icon on the Tool Bar or select Project Database gt Text Library and the Text Object Library appears 247 Chapter 6 Components 4 Then press Add and the following text input dialog box appears Enter Name and State Number and click OK State Mum In this case the text is added to the Text Library Press the symbol after the Name and the following figure shows the states set by State Numbers Language tall Tr atal 248 Chapter 6 Components 4 Then enter text for each state as shown in the following figure Language C 7 Delete Delete Al Language Import E port 5 If you use two states enter the corresponding characters in State 0 and State 1 After adding the text click OK 6 Finally you can use the previously added text in places where the Use Text Library can be used such as shown in the following diagram Basic Attribute Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position J Use Tag Language Engish USA V Use Text Library i Tag List Text Libra Y If have not added any text to the text library the Use Text Library is not activated and in grey all the time It is enabled only when you have added text 249 Chapter 6 Components 2 Language Sett
61. da Sa ep OEO EEO EO EO EO E HRA a WMH Ds gi fia fie i Bia Zo R ox op gr eee PSegme v 7 NZNZIl ihkgaleX a a n a My Graph element window Connector 0 _vector Graph HII NUM_KEYOO1 g NUM_DISP_BAROOL PLE NUB_CTRL_B4RO01 A statel state2 we ARROW BLUE1 24 b P A e ARROW BLUE1 23 b de ARROW BLUE1 20 b Y Bit Setting Indicator lamp r i lt m i gt Component T Switch Direct Window 11213 A 4 516 TLLA rA k ai PLCO 0 Word Setting Mutiple State Mieml ass Function Parts Message winodow Mouse x 31 y 90 Width 65 Height 62 UpperCase Number A Note 1 After creating and editing a vg shape click save before close the editing window or you will lose all the changes you ve just made 2 No text can be added to a Vector Graph 107 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE 5 6 Bitmap Graphics Like the vector graphic a bitmap graphic can also have up to 32 states and represent different states of a multi state component with a single graphic The most significant difference between a bitmap graphic and a vector graphic is that the user can import external images of various formats omp jpg and gif into the project and converted them to bg files The basic operations of a bg file are quite similar to those of a vg file with a few differences AN Note Such operations as drawing a line and drawing are forbidden in a bitmap Only external shapes can be adde
62. each is divided into 20 equal scales Place them together to form a network and place the trend graph component on the top Please note that the size of these three components 2 scale components and 1 trend graph must be the same and they must be overlapped with each other as shown in the figure below Settings for four timer components remain unchanged Add two multi state setting word setting components to control the increase and decrease of 188 Chapter 6 Components LW100 so as to control the page up or page down operation For the multi state setting component controlling the value increase set output address to LW100 set Setting Mode to addition Added Number to 5 and the upper limit to a considerable large value For the multi state setting component controlling the value decrease set output address to LW100 set Setting Mode to subtraction Subtracted Number to 5 and the lower limit Bottom to 0 Add a bit state toggle switch to control LB100 so as to control the trend graph whether to pause reading data The settings are as follows Multi State Switch Component Attribute Basic Attribute Multi State Switch Tag Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMIO PLC HMI HMIO Addr Type LW Addr U Addr Type LW Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 1 Use Addr Tag WordNo 1 Te Multi State Settinc Component Attribute Basic Attribute M
63. ee ere 9040 Hide display Fast Hide the Fast Selection Window if it is set to ON and display Bae ee Fey Fast Selection Window if it is set to OFF R W 9041 Hide display taskbar Hide the taskbar if it is set to ON and display the taskbar if it ae ere 9042 Hide display task Hide the task buttons if it is set to ON and display the task 9043 Hide display all Hide the Fast Selection Window taskbar and task buttons if Fast Selection it is set to ON and display all these contents when it is set Window taskbar to OFF R W 9044 Save When it is set to ON the system will write communications communication parameters saved in the LW10000 area back to the i to thelE PROM on the panel mainboard The parameters will be available in the next startup only when they have been written back to the E PROM Restore factory When the bit is set to ON the system will save the default settings global parameters in the downloaded data files to the LW10000 system parameter area Upon successful execution the system will automatically clear the bit 315 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System 9051 Enable disable Set this bit ON will disable the touch function when the touch function when backlight is off R W backlight is disabled 9052 Disable the return To disable the value return function of the PLC set this bit value function of to ON but it is applicable only to the return value control in PLC Control gt
64. enhances production efficiency The following example shows how to conveniently invoke multiple recipe data Suppose we have ten groups of recipe data in total each group consists of five words among which recipe name occupies four words and recipe data occupies one word We plan our recipes from RWO as follows 283 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Rcp Grps Reg Addr Name of Rcp 4 words Rcp Data 1 word Group 0 RWO RW4 AAAAAAAA 0 Group 1 RW5 RW9 BBBBBBBB 1111 Group 2 RW10 rw14 CCCCCCCC 2222 Group 3 RW15 RW19 DDDDDDDD 3333 Group 4 RW20 RW24 EEEEEEEE 4444 Group 5 RW25 RW29 FFFFFFFF 5555 Group 6 RW30 RW34 GGGGGGGG 6666 Group 7 RW35 RW39 HHHHHHHH 7777 Group 8 RW40 RW44 IH 8888 Group 9 RW45 RW49 JJJJJJJ 9999 For this example let us assume that each group of recipes in the above figure can conveniently conduct data exchange with PLC equipment register 4x100 through project design Le s take a look at a completed project shown in the figure below to gain an overall concept In the project RWIO and RWI4 show the recipe data of group 0 Click Download to download the recipe data to 4x100 Click Upload to upload the 4x100 data to the recipe memory Click the Up direction key on the right to query previous recipe data so that the user can modify and transfer recipe data Click the Down direction key on the right to query next recipe data Recipe Card Group g Recipe Data
65. for indirect online simulation of a project Direct Online Simulation Used for direct online simulation of a project Code editing toolbar Variable Edit Add Bookmark Window Next Bookmark Delete Bookmark Privous Bookmark Add Bookmark Creates a new bookmark Next Bookmark Shows the next bookmark Previous Bookmark Shows the previous bookmark Delete Bookmark Deletes a bookmark Variable Edit Window Opens or closes the variable edit window os Used to select various filling effect shapes The filling patterns above can be used for shapes like rectangle ellipse and sector The background of a window can also be filled with these patterns To fill the current window double click the window to show the properties window 50 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Select Use Background Color as shown in the following figure Window Attribution Lowe Sate Level Special Attribute W Use Background Color E nnnnnsnnsnnununnnnnnnnnnn ununnnsnnsnnnnunnnnnnnnnna Position i Background T Os Transparence Width 320 Eokttom windo 1 cL 5 a o o E Monopoly Coherence Tracking Clipping Frame Color a pa gt D oa O amp z y 0b C Cc z O C v v 14 cy gt _ v T 14 OQO ab v C ab C O Cc 14 Ac O O O gt O S
66. g Select All Component Select Componetia 32 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Align It is used to implement the Justification or Alignment of multiple parts of components or groups of components With the Alignment tools users can Align Right Top Bottom Vertical Center and i of yt alt Horizontal Center Their corresponding icons are alt 4 in this example we will only conduct the Left operation The effect after the Left operation is as follows Edit E View ToolsfT LibraryiD Wine UndotfZ Ctri z fo Curb Ctrl JA Copyich Ctrl C Mudge Make Same Size ol Right Layer aut Top i Groupi Ctrl 6 4l Bottom He Vertical Midline amp Horizontal Midline Align Horizontal Center S Ctri I Align Vertical Center T Ctrl g Select All Component Select Componett 4 33 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Edit E view Tools T Library D wine Undo Ctrltz ga Cub Ctrl A Copic bre Nudge d 2 Left Make Same Size t 3l Right Layer t t Top i Groupi Ctra wtb Bottom HF vertical Midline Horizontal Midline Align Horizontal Center S Ctrl I Align Vertical Center T Ctrl g Select All Component Select Componett 4 After the Left operation the two parts line up to the left side Size To make multi
67. graph in other words the sampling data stops when the Hold bit is turned ON and the sampling continues and trend graph will be dynamically displayed when the Hold bit is turned OFF again Roll This address has to be used with the scrolling bar component that is the user can view the trend graph by directly moving the scroll bar Set the scrolling address the same as the address of the scrolling bar component to be associated For details refer to Scroll Bar Time When the Save Time check box is selected the Time box in the lower part of the 182 Chapter 6 Components window will be activated It includes 12 words used to save the time of the latest sampling point The 12 words contain the second minute hour day month year of the start point and the second minute hour day month year of the end point in the current page Each word represents a time point Go to the Channel tab and set related parameters of each track Position Basic Attribute Trend Graphics Save Historic Data Color Designate the color of each track Line Width The width of a line including 8 options Data Type Set the data type with only two options of signed integer and unsigned integer Data type signed int 7 signed int Max and Min Value in Y Direction Y zero and Y span Set the corresponding maximum and minimum values of each track line along the Y direction Click OK and adjust the position and si
68. icon According to the method you select the dialog box looks a bit different as the following figures show PE kA Download Select HMI Select Section Heal Station HMI Information D ata File EMIT es i Fi I LOGO File Download File Path c program files kaspro_enu_v1 44project galasy 56 demogalaxy56 demotgalaxy56 demo pkg Communication Type USB por IF PORT Select Section Data File Select HMI HI Station Hei Information L Recipe File O LOGO File Download File Path c program files kaspro_enu_v1 44project galaxy 56 demosgalasy 56 demo qalaxy56 demo pkg Communication Type S erial port IF PORT COM COMA BPS 115200 Select HMI Select Section HMI Station HMI Information Data File Htio m L Recipe File O LOGO File 4 i Download File Path c program files kaspro_eng_ w 4Aprojectimanual tesingimanual testing pkg Communication Type Network IP 192 168 0253 PORT 21845 76 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Except for the downloading method related parameters displayed in gray boxes there are some options the users can set and should pay attention to Select Section The files to be downloaded to the panel are of three types User Data File Recipe File and Logo File The user can select any one of these files to be downloaded which makes the downloading more flexible and losing valuable time performing unnecessary downloads The following
69. in the figure below i Display Component Attribute Basic Attribute Event Display Component Position Priority Nonnal Read Address Write Address HMI HMIO PLC O HMI HMIO Addr Type LW Addr Addr Type LW Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 1 0 Use Addr Tag WordNe 1 Description Event Dis olay Com ponent Attribute Basic Attribute Event Display Component Position Col Space Format Row Space 3 Sequence No Event Trig Time Afimance aema ea Acknowledge Time L Retum to Normal Time 7 L Ettended Time Format D H M BE Acknowledge Color EA Short Time Format H M L Standard Time Format H M S C Ettended Date Format 7 M D I Select Area Color O Event Trig Date M D OW BackTo Normal Color A Vector Graph is placed under the event display component to serve as the background Add a bit state toggle switch to control the ON OFF state of the LB10 a static text with the content LB10 and a bit lamp for displaying the status of LB10 Add a static text component to display the content of Current temperature and a numeric input component for displaying and change the value of LW30 Add two Word Setting components for change the value of LW10 which is the input address of the event display component One of the two word setting component adds 1 to LW10 when pressed and the other subtract 1 from LW10 current value when pressed The user can use the two buttons for view the e
70. is placed on the first line of the display window 178 Chapter 6 Components Address Type Select the address type corresponding to the meter that is the monitored address type The address type varies with PLC type Alternatively you can also use the internal address type of the HMI panel For internal address types of HMI refer to Section 5 4 Please note that some internal addresses of the HMI are used by the system Do not use these addresses For details refer to Chapter 11 Address The word address corresponding to the alarm display component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words The default value is 1 for input address Not editable Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the Alarm Display component Go to the Alarm Display tab as shown in the figure below Alarm Di p a Basic Attribute Alarm Display Position Row Space Column Space 1 Row Spacing Column Spacing The spacing between different rows or columns Click OK and adjust the position and size of the Alarm Display component Example of an Alarm Display A Vector Graph SP_O is used for the background Rectangle The Vector Graph SP_1 indicates a sunken display area Two word setting components SWDO SWD1 are used to increase and decrease the starting lines of the displayed alarm message control
71. parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity None l l parity none port settings of the PLC l Adopt the recommended PLC Station No 1 0 255 settings without the need of 371 Data Bits Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Note In communication parameter settings of Micrologix PLC set DF1 to the full duplex mode and set it to be free of hardware handshake signals PLC software setting Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of ROCKWELL Reference website HT TP www AB com Operable address range Operable P PLC Address Type Description Range 00 006000700 tera ouat ode B00 0D Floating data register double word Data register N7 10 11 12 13 14 15 0 254 Note 1 D indicates decimal notation and the DD after the bracket indicate the value range of 0 15 C5PV 0 254 DDD Actual value register of counter When the address is less than 10 add a 0 before the number For example write 8 as 08 2 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note Allen Bradley Micrologix series PLCs include three series of Micrologix1000 Micrologix1200 and Microligix1500 All of them can be connected with the Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen through the serial port on their respective C
72. position specified by the Digits below decimal point For example if the Digits below decimal point 2 a reading value 14561 is displayed as 145 61 Proportion Conversion Engineering Data Conversion The reading value is converted to its engineering unit before display Scaling is performed as follows Conversion value Engineering Min Reading value Input Min Engineering Max Engineering Min Input Max Input Min The conversion value will be displayed according to the setting of digits above decimal point and digits below decimal point For example if conversion value is 123 456 and the digits below decimal point 2 digits above decimal point 3 then the conversion value is displayed as 123 45 the last digit is truncated 150 Chapter 6 Components 2 Hex The number is displayed in hex O F format scaling and decimal point are disabled Min val 0 Max val 429496729 Variable MaxMin Value HMI HMIO 7 Addr Type z Width 4 ee Min Value 0 3 Binary The number is displayed in binary O 1 format scaling and decimal point are disabled Number Input Com Basic Attribute Numeric Data Enable Address Font Graphics Position Min val O Max val l Variable MaxcMin Value HMI HMIO al Addr Type LY CodeType BIN Width 4 In case of Hex and binary formats the maximum and minimum input values are regarded as unsigned binary data 4 P
73. programming software user manuals Reference website HT TP www fatek com e Operable address range 381 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Address Range eee eee EO see ee Soe CF a eee OM 0 9999 DDD Internal auxiliary node 0 9999 DDD Sequence control node 0 9999 DDD Timer node C 0 9999 DDD Counter node HR 0 9999 DDD Data register 0 9999 Data register TMR 0 9999 DDD Timer buffer Note D indicate decimal notation The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range e Detailed wiring diagram Note FACON FB series of PLCs cover two series of MA and MC and such models as FBE 20 28 40MA FBE 20 28 40MC and FBN 19 26 36MCT Where MA series standard CPUs provide one HCMOS serial port and MC series provide three serial ports 1 HCMOS amp 1 RS 232 amp 1 RS 485 MA series of CPUs have to be connected with the touch screen only after converting HCMOS into RS 232 RS 485 through the commutation interface module FB DTBR or FB DTBR E 1 CPU Kaspro FACON FB PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy MC series CPU RS 232 touch screen interface COMO COM1 15 pin D SUB female connector 382 2 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Communication module FB DTBR DTBR E Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy
74. respective CPUs For detailed hardware description refer to the technical manuals provided by Delta 1 CPU Kaspro Delta PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy DVP series CPU touch screen RS 232 interface COMO0 COM1 8 pin DIN round female connector 4RXD 5 TXD 3 8 GND Mini Din 8 Pin Port 14 11 MODBUS RTU Controller Connection of MODBUS RTU Controller with CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended i l Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC Type Modbus RTU COM COMO COM1 RS232 RS485 ee be the same as the Data Bits 7ors COM port settings of the 399 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 COM port settings of the controller 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the Bits per Second COM port settings of the 57600 115200 controller Must be the same as the Even parity odd l Parity None l COM port settings of the parity none controller Must be the same as the PLC Station No 1 0 31 COM port settings of the controller Controller software setting It is necessary to set the communication protocol of the communication port of the controller to Modbus RTU mode Please refer to the specifications provided by Schneider Electric related to MODBUS protocol and user manuals provided by related controller manufacturers Reference website Http Wwww modicon com Http AWwww modbus org Ope
75. same as the actual PLC station number set with the PLC programming software otherwise it may cause a communication failure A Note If the selected PLC protocol is a Master protocol that is the HMI serves as a slave station the station No cannot be set Station NO IF Addr 192 168 0 2 PLC Communication Type Pot Num 502 PLC Communication Time Out s Protocol Time Out 1 ms Protocol Time Out Aims Max interval of block pack WORDS Fi Max interval of block pack BITS 2 64 Max block package size WWORDS Max block package size BITS 32 274 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Chapter 8 Recipe Data The Recipe Data Transmission component can activate the data transmission of a consecutive register It supports downloading data from the memory of the recipe card to the PLC as well as uploading data from the PLC to the memory of the recipe card The size of the transmission data can be set For CASTOR HMls a 256K Byte memory card can be selected to store recipe data For GEMINI GALAXY HMls the capacity of the recipe memory is 128K byte 8 1 ira Creating a Recipe Data Transmission Component PLC Parts 1 Press the Recipe Data Transmission component icon ecip Ista and the following window appears Enter related contents in the Basic Attribute tab Recipe Com E i ent Attri te Basic Attribute Recipe Data Tag Graphics Position Write Address HMI HMIQ PLO Addr Type LW 0 Addr Type Addr Code
76. select box use vector graphic and select the vector graph for the part in the list below All vg files imported into the project can be found in the list In this example select the vg you have just created Word E Ee E Attnbution Basic Attribution Multi State Display Tag Graphics Position W Use Vector Graphics Use Bitmap Import Graphics Graphics State 6 Close this dialog box and the component will be displayed in the screen in the mode of a Vector Graph All loaded vg files will be listed in the Project File Window under the directory of Shape 106 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE Library aa HMI 4 Yector Graph _deng vg _lamp 17 _NUM_KEYOO1 g NUM_DISP_BAROO1 g NUB_CTRL_BAROO1 vg _ G 1 g e ARROW BLUE1 24 bg 2e ARROW BLUE1 23 bq ARROW BLUE1 20 bg e ARROW BLUE1 19 bg e ARROW BLUE1 16 bg ARROW BLUE1 15 bg To modify any Vector Graph or bitmap find the shape to be modified in the Project file window double click to enter the edit window of the shape and you may modify the shape in this window The above line shows the various states of the vg or bg file and the area below the states window is the appearance editing area for the state being selected VG T vg amp File Edit E view y Tools T Library D Window W Help H Beside saater acgiehle gNI vxOoOnvyocsa O H Ee Mp lz 31 T ut o A 2 5 p a
77. sign above 69 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Found Mew Hardware Wizard Please choose your search and installation options Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boxes below to limit or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driwer found will be installed Search removable media floppy CO ROM Include this location in the search C Program FilessKASPRO_ENU 1 4 driver i Browse ait Don t search will choose the driver to install Chooge this option to select the device driver from a list Windows does nok guarantee that the diver you choose will be the best match for pour hardware Found New Hardware Wizard Please select the best match for pour hardware from the list below ee K4_SOFT USB Description Wersion Manufacturer Location SOFT USE 100 0 S windows intoem45 ink This driver is not digitally signed Tell me why driwer signing is important lt Back J _New gt _ Found Mew Hardware Wizard Please wait while the wizard installs the software Hardware Installation The software you are installing for this hardware KA SOFT USB has not passed windows Logo testing to verify its compatibility with Windows oP Lell me why this testing is important Continuing your installation of this software may impair or destabilize the corect operation of your system either immediatel
78. structure HMI and Graphic Library HMI The HMI folder contains a whe file which corresponds to the HMI icon in the Project Window For the first HMI panel HMIO the file is HMIO whe for HMI1 the filename is HMI1 whe If there are three HMI panels in the project there are three whe files HMIO whe HMI1 whe and HMI2 whe Double clicking the whe file will expand it showing the macrocode file and recipe file which are attached to that HMI panel Project Files window aa a HMI O HMIO whe 4 Vector Graph NUM_KEVOOL vq NUM_DISP_BAROOL vg NUB_CTRL_BAROOL vg EG te Click the symbol or to the left of the icon to expand or collapse the directory tree To edit the file in the folders double click it Brine The configuration recipe file RCP can only be imported and deleted but cannot be edited To edit such a file use other binary editing software 59 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Shape Library The Shape Library folder contains all the vector graph and bitmap files imported to the current project Vector graph files are shown as vg files and bitmap files are shown as bg files For the description of Vector Graph and bitmap please refer to Sections 5 5 and 5 6 in Chapter 5 3 4 Project Window and Project construct window The Project Window is used to show the structure of the entire project HMI panels PLCs and connection wires are shown in this
79. the Bits per second to 38400 Where K10S1 K10S provide 6 pin mini DIN round interface 6 Pin Mini DIN Interface 391 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 2 CPU K80S K200S K300S K1000S Cnet RS232 Kaspro LG Master K PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Master K series touch screen CPU RS 232 interface COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector Note When the Cnet communication mode of K80S K200S K300S K1000S is used set the PLC type to LG MASTER K Cnet The setting of communication parameters must be consistent with that of the touch screen 30 CPU LG Master K200S CPU K3P 07BS RS422 Kaspro _ LG Master K PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Master K200 series CPU touch screen RS 422 interface 5 pin terminal block COMO COM1 Note Only K200S CPU K3P 07BS provides built in RS 422 485 port Set the PLC type to LG MASTER K Cnet and pay attention to the setting of communication parameters 392 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 4 Communication module G7L CUEB G6L CUEB G4L CUEA G3L CUEA Master K Cnet RS232 LG Master K PLC Master K Cnet module RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 5 Communication module G7L CUEC G6L CUEC G4L CUEA G3L CUEA Master K Cnet RS422 Kaspro LG Master K PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Master K200 series CPU touch screen RS 422 interface COMO C
80. the component attribute dialog box appears Bar oh Co ipo nent Attribute Basic Attribute Bar Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC HMI HMIO Add Type LW Addr 0 Addr Type LW Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 1 C Use Addr Tag WordNo Description Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address The initial address of the word address corresponding to the bar graph Address Type The address type must be properly set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Address The initial address of the word registers corresponding to the text display component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Resiricted to 1 or 3 Set to 1 when the variable alarm is disabled Set to 3 when the variable alarm is selected For 3 words condition the Bar Graph component will receive three continuous data words one for data and two for upper and lower alarm limits Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the bar graph component 2 Goto the Bar Graphics tab Set the parameter as shown in the figure below 166 Chapter 6 Components Bar Grap i Cor 1p onent Attribute Basic Attribute Bar Graphics Position Direction T Normal BB Lower BB oper Frame Background Min 0 Max 1 Lower 0 Upper
81. the graphic anent Attnbu Basic Attribute Bit State Lamp Tag z Fosition W Use Tag Language English USA Use Tex Font Size Select the font size for the entered label text including such options as 8 16 24 32 48 64 72 and 96 as shown in the following figure 121 Chapter 6 Components Basic Attribute Bit State Lamp Tag Graphics Position Iv Use Tag Language English USA D Use Ted L Tag List Of On Color Select the color of the label contents The available colors are shown in the following figure Besides the colors listed here the user can use the Custom Color option to customize a desirable color Bit State Lamp Component Attnbute Use Tag Language English USA FO Use Text Library Tag List Left 16 Right 48 Custom Color 4 Go to the Graphics tab Select Vector Graph or bitmap to display the bit address in the ON and OFF states Bit State Lamp Component Attnbute EV_CTRL_BAROO1 vg Use Bitman 122 Chapter 6 Components 5 Go to the Position tab adjust the position and size of the lamp if necessary 6 Click the OK key to complete the setting of the Bit Lamp component ggs Bit State Setting 6 2 Bit State Setting Component PLC Parts The Bit State Setting component defines a touch area which sets a specified bit to a certain status ON or OFF when it is touched or activated by other conditions gt Adding a Bit State Setting com
82. the importing dialog box Select Bitmap for the Import Type You can import bg files used in other projects they are stored in the vg folder under the directory of the project folder 2 The bg files and vg files of the same project are stored in the vg folder under the project folder directory The bg file is converted from other images the original images are stored in the image folder under the project folder directory Please do not delete the images in that folder or the corresponding bg files will not be used any more AN Note The original image is stored in the image folder when being imported so the image must have a unique file name to avoid a conflict If such a conflict occurs when editing a new bg file the newer image will not be added to the image folder so the two bg files including the previous and the new one will be linked to the same original image and they may look the same 111 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE The size and color quality of images in the bitmap library determine the size of the target file and also affect the configuration execution speed Please pay attention to the following points when a bitmap library is created The maximum size for original image being imported is the physical resolution of the panel Any image exceeds this size cannot be imported In this case the image should be cropped to the proper size before being imported It
83. to be displayed on the Event Display component must first be registered in the Event Entry list A PLC bit or word register controls each message If the PLC bit or word device activates either by ON OFF switch or value limit exceeded the corresponding message is displayed on the Event Display component This component is only used for event entry To display an event message the Event Display component is required gt Procedure to add modify event entry message 1 Click the 2 icon and the event message object library pops up or enter the event message entry page in the Library menu in the menu bar Hh Meo Address InfolHMl PLC Content Delete il 195 Chapter 6 Components 2 Click the Add button to add message or click the Modify button to modify the existing message Triggered HMI Address H FA PLC Mo Data Type Addr Type LE Agdress 10 Format DOODO DO DO Code Type Bird I Wee Addr T ag Attribute E went T rigging Cond Fo Walue Aange biin alue 0 Ba as M alue Oo Forint I On Trigger I Return to Hormal Open T est Library Open Address T ag Library Triggered HEI 4 ddress Hil PLE Ho Data Type Addr Type Lt Address Format ODODOO Code Type Bird Lise Addr T ag Attribute E went T rigging Cond T_ Walue Range Min alue a Pl as w alue Oo Frimnt Of Trigger J Return bo Mormal HMI HHHO PLCE No gt gddr T ppe LE Address CT
84. to make the outer frame of the bitmap fit the outline of the edit box otherwise a blank area will appear in the bitmap Suppose the user import a 100x50 original image to a edit box of the size 100x100 the user should stretch the image after importing to make it fill the edit box When using the bitmap graphic in configuration window you can stretch the outline of the component or enter the size in the Position tab of the component attribute dialog box With these two methods you can retrim the bitmap to its correct ratio 5 7 Creating a Label A label refers to a text displayed on the surface of switches lamps or other components gt Adding a label 1 Select Label tab in the Component Attribute Dialog box of the part selected 2 Check the option Use Label 112 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE 3 As shown in the following figure fill the content to be displayed on the label in Content Basic Attribute Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position i Use Tag Language English USA E Tag List o 4 Set such display properties as alignment mode font size and color 5 Click OK to finish the setting State No The State No is only valid for components with multiple states The text of each state can be displayed independently The user can set the text content font size color and the alignment for corresponding states separately Content Enter the text to be displayed on the surface of
85. value PLC packet 0 10 range 0 10 Note The part number of SIEMENS S7 300 HMI adapter is 6 S7972 O0CA10 0XA0 and that of SIEMENS 57 300 PC adapter is 6 S7972 0CA23 0XA0 When a PC adapter is used the baud rate bits per second can be set to 19200 or 38400 only depending on the setting of the DIP switch on the adapter For details refer to the product catalogue of SIEMENS PLC software setting It is required to create data block DB10 For creation procedures please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of SIEMENS Reference website Http Awww aut sea siemens com s 300 Operable address range PLC PC adapter PLC HMI adapter PLC PLC 1 0 40087 D000 Note 1 D indicates decimal notation O indicates octal notation and the value range is 0 7 Please note that VB10 is DB10 and the start bit of the VB10 address must be an even number 2 If itis necessary to operate the double word variable select 2 in the corresponding component address properties dialog box 3 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note SIEMENS S 300 series PLCs cover such models as CPU312 CPU313 CPU314 CPU315 CPU316 and CPU318 All of them can be connected with the Kaspro touch screen through the HMI adapter or PC adapter provided by SIEMEN
86. value when the numeric Cc Dy Ce Q numeric input part input is activated it is set to O when the numeric input is not activated R 9005 lower limit of the lt indicates the minimum input value when the numeric numeric input part input is activated it is set to O when the numeric input is not activated R Message board Message board function select current operation tool on operation mode the message board 0 Brush 1 Eraser 2 Block Cleanout R Brush definition Message board function select the width for the brush 0 1 pixel 1 2 pixels 2 3 pixels R Brush color 0 255 Message board function the user can select any color corresponding tojamong 256 colors by entering a number R 256 color standard color palette Interference When the lower byte of this LW register is not zero the 319 9004 9006 9007 9008 9020 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System value will be sent as an INT byte in MEMORY_LINK protocol value range Ox20 OxFE after successful sending the byte will be cleared to 0 9034 9035 System time in the Double word Displays the time in the unit of 0 1 second Co sien 9040 9041 Security level Double word Refer to related part in Chapter 12 ee eee 9042 Security level Display the security level of the current Base Window pe Refer to related part in Chapter 12 Security Level R 9043 Forced switchover of Forced switchover from a higher level for
87. window is not displayed The display and control of components of the bottom window are the same as that of the general window The bottom window is something like transparent for the panel users The users operate the components on the bottom window while they think they are touching the components on the general window above the bottom window Relationship between screen and window A screen can include a common window a base window and a fast selection window while each common window or base window can include multiple pop up windows Their relationship is shown as follows 81 Chapter 4 Windows Screen When the window switchover command is executed the panel screen will clear all the current windows including the pop up windows attached to the current basic window and switch over to the window to be displayed However the common window will always be displayed on the screen A pop up window invoked by a direct or indirect window will not change the original contents of the base window and it is only attached to the base window In the window property setting dialog box each window can be configured with a maximum of three bottom windows When a base window is invoked the window number ranges from 0 to 3 65535 the touch panel will show all parts in the window In the meantime if the window has a bottom window and all parts in the bottom window will be displayed also All the toucha
88. with return value To implement data transmission between the PLC address and the LW RW To execute related macro instructions Execute macro 7 E when the conditions are satisfied Universal PLC control data transmission gt The process for creating a PLC Control component 1 Click the PLC Control Library icon E the PLC Control Object List appears 293 Chapter 6 Components Hl Ma Address Info HMI PLC Stati PLC Address Control event Delete Delete All Modify Click Add to create a new PLC Control entry Click Modify if you want to modify the PLC control entry and by clicking Delete you can delete the selected entry Correctly fill in the contents in the PLC Control component dialog box PLC Control So W ol ever Triggered HMI Hal HMIO PLC No 0 Addr Type Uw Address 0 Code Type BIN Format DOODO word Len 2 Use Address Tag Control Type Change Window Report Printout E write Data to PLC Curent Base Window General PLE Control Backlight Close Backlight Clozel rite Back Screen Hard Copy Esecute Macro Program a Backlight Open Backlight Open rite Back General PLC Control E stend Open Address Tag Library OF Cancel Macro ID Execute Method WW Address Type Designate the address type of the register to conduct these PLC control operations Address Designate the address of the r
89. 0 00 255 0f DDDH Bittype Note D indicates decimal notation H indicates hexadecimal notation the value range is 0 F This is the address of the controller When using the touch screen pay attention to the rules for use For details refer to the description below BIT for example DB2_BIT write DB2_BIT 0 F for the equipment address of the touch screen 417 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs WORD for example DB2 write DB2 11 for the equipment address of the touch screen Detailed wiring diagram Kaspro Baumuller controller CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch RS 485 port screen 9 pin D SUB male connector PLC RS 232 485 port 9 pin D SUB female connector 14 20 Kinco ECOSTEP CONTROLLER Connection of Kinco ECOSTEP CONTROLLER with CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Precaution Setting PLC PLC Type ECOSTEP a 232 Must be the same as the A Data Bits port settings of the controller l Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 l port settings of the controller l Must be the same as the COM Bits per Second 9600 9600 19200 l port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM Parity None port settings of the controller Controller software setting Refer to the operation manuals provided by Kinco Operable address range 418 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs
90. 00 19200 38400 COM port settings of the Second 57600 115200 controller Must be the same as the l l Even parity odd l Parity Even parity COM port settings of the parity none controller Must be the same as the PLC Station l 1 COM port settings of the O controller Operable address range PLC Address eet Bit Word Operable Range Description Type a e888 wo werd fw a09 0000 Detailed wiring diagram CASTOR Gemini Galaxy CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch touch screen screen PLC RS 232 interface PLC RS 232 interface 416 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 9 pin D SUB male connector 9 pin D SUB male connector 4 TxXD 2 RED 5 GND 14 19 Baumuller Controller Connection of Baumuller Controller with CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC PLC Type BAUMULLER a 4 a 4 Must be the same as the cone Data Bits port settings of the controller l Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 port settings of the controller l Must be the same as the COM Bits per Second 9600 9600 19200 l port settings of the controller l l l Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity Even parity port settings of the controller Controller software setting Refer to user manuals provided by BAUMULLER Operable address range PLC Bit Word Address Operable Range Description Type bit DB BIT
91. 1 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 14 12 MODBUS ASCII Controller Connection of MODBUS ASCII Controller with CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended i Optional Setting Precaution Setting Must be the same as the 7ors COM port settings of the Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 COM port settings of the controller Data Bits Must be the same as the l 9600 19200 3840 Bits per Second 9600 COM port settings of the 0 57600 115200 controller l Must be the same as the l Even parity odd l Parity Even parity l COM port settings of the parity none controller Must be the same as the PLC Station No 1 0 31 COM port settings of the controller Controller software setting It is necessary to set the communication protocol of the communication port of the controller to Modbus ASCII mode Please refer to the specifications provided by Schneider Electric related to MODBUS protocol and user manuals provided by related controller manufacturers Reference website Http AWwww modicon com Http Awww modbus org Operable address range PLC Address a Operable Range Description Type System internal external Ox 1 9999 DDDD output node 402 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs System internal external 1x 1 9999 DDDD input node 3x 1 9999 DDDD Analog input data register 1 9999 DDDD Data register Note
92. 14O FACON PEC oinei e 381 Ar EMEN S FEC rua a N a a a Pe ete 384 14 8 LGPL eae a a S ds calidad 389 14 9 MAT SUSAMA PEG ween ore el cee E R E doce 394 TETO DELTAPEC a ictal ra E E dee Mereus anced aaa 397 1 MOD BUS RTU CONTROLLER srdeati h A hid aceetealde NN 399 TAZ MODBUS ASCI GONTROLLER spoin a a 402 113 VIGOR PLO cerea E a E EE 404 VARTA EMERSON PREC ienie e a eteadieas at cndneeecaseiaosdt 406 IOKE NG oad Seer aa a a eat taal Meaba ities 409 1416 QEMAX PC sie cctacscheetnet catesacechonltoseeedseanecth seated E a anenskstlaeaet 412 Me Wel PAB OKRO T PLC csc tases eater cee lee stat EA 414 14 18 KA MASTER AND KA SLAVE MASTER SLAVE PROTOCOL CONNECTION cccccsssccceesseeees 416 T4219 BAUMULLER CONTROLLER sco ecss otis alii sata sbi alts dade angie cnthadamabisutee Meatieceenweatuactacaas 417 14 20 COSTER CONTROLLER cicgecnciaseh hac totie ndecteaias hess seta tha dieses ecndhnca ude etuesesecnaeeenesbaliees 418 CHAPTER 15 OPERATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR KA MANAGER 0 sccssssscsssscsssscenees 420 15 1 INTRODUCTION TO KA IMANAGER iste tals cess a eae nee eens 420 15 2 DOWNLOAD PROCESSING sida tereeac rashes ce a a a te caaliaiaiil aie adams 421 15 3 UPLOAD PROCESSING scarfs onset a AN Seances auton tate 426 15 SYSTEM RO CES SING zroad a a neste Pace aeeeeteeiaatass 428 CHAPTER 16 USING THE SETUP FUNCTION uuu csctcsscccsceccssrccsssccsssessssecsssssssssssscsees 432 CHAPTER 17 NETWORKING THE CASTOR SERIES soess
93. 2 Chapter 17 Networking of Castor Series Touch Screens touch screen to the PC and then download from the PC to another touch screen 17 1 4 Networking of Multiple Touch Screens with Multiple PLCs JEL Siemens 57 200 HALT OMRON PLC A Caution Data reading and modification operations can be performed between different touch screens Configurations can be edited between different touch screens When editing PLC components select corresponding touch screen number and PLC number as shown in the figure below 443 Chapter 17 Networking of Castor Series Touch Screens Basic Attribute Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address HMI HMI0 Addr Type E dr l jdr Addr 0 00 Code Type BIN J I Format OODDD DD WordNo 7 2 Compile the component select the Offline Simulation mode select the corresponding touch screen number and click Simulate to perform the offline simulation Hl Simulation AMI Station O Hdl Information Simulation Seral Port Hll Fort PC Port HHMI Port PC Fort Hhal Fort PC Part COMO COMI COM1 COM gt COM2 COMI Show Information Simulation Type Offline Simulation File Fathi pkg c program tles kaspro_enu_v1 44projecthmanual testing manual testing pkg Communication Type MULL IP NULL PORT NULL COM NULL BPS NULL Select the corresponding touch screen number and click Download to perform download
94. 211 Chapter 7 System Parameters automatically collect the PLC data with consecutive addresses and will signal a read command to read such multi addressed data which greatly enhances communication efficiency and shortens response time The parameters Max block package size WORDS and Max block package size BITS determine the maximum number of word and bit registers that can be read consecutively The values are usually automatically set when the user selects a PLC so it is not necessary for the user to set them If the addresses of such PLC data are not consecutive the touch panel will read such data by separate commands so a lot of read commands are required for reading such data Therefore we allow a user to modify the interval by modifying the parameters of Max interval of block pack WORDS and Max interval of block pack BITS When the interval between two addresses Is longer than the set value they will be read as two packages otherwise they will be read as a package In this way it reduces communication packages and enhances communication speed An example As shown in the figure below to read data from D20 to D29 when the PLC package is set to 0 the system has to use 3 read commands to read such data When the Max interval of block pack WORDS is set to 1 the system can read such data with only one command In general the time used for reading additional two addresses D23 D25 is far less than the time used for reading
95. 37 Chapter 6 Components Periodic Toggle The value of the designated bit register flips its status ON OFF when the timing time arrives c Set Data Type to Word When setting the Data Type to Word the choices for Set Mode change to the following options Set Mode With Data Type set to Word Periodical JOG Periodical JOG Periodical Bounce Step up Step down and Set Constant value as shown in the figure below Timer Component Attribute Timer Timer Function Position fe Creat f Execute Macro Set Status C Data Set Mode Periodical JOG circle b S M Periodical JOG circle HMI HMIO HMIO Periodical JOG one way HMI Periodical Bounce tumover upon limit PLC No U PLC No Step up circle ace en PLE No Step Down circle Addr Type Addr Type Addr Type Set const value Pao Akke OU Periodical JOG onewa Address CodeType Code Type ir T Code Type Data Type Dii Data Len Detailed description of different functions is as shown in the table below Description Automatically the incremental value is added to the current value of the Periodical designated PLC word register in every interval The interval is defined in JOG Execution Cycle When the value reaches the upper limit it starts at 0 again Automatically the Subtracted Value is subtracted to the current value of the designated PLC word register in every interval The interval is defined in Periodical JOG Exec
96. 422 communication adapters to establish the link with the touch screen through the Host Link The CPU of CPM2A PLC provides RS 232 interface and it can be connected with the touch screen directly it can also be configured with CPM1 CIF01 RS232 communication adapters or OMRON CPM1 CIF11 RS422 communication adapters to establish a link For hardware descriptions refer to manuals provided by OMRON 1 CPU OMRON PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy CPM2A CPU RS 232 touch screen interface COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector 2 Communication module CPM1 CIF01 OMRON PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy CPM1 CIF0O1 adapter touch screen RS232 interface COMO0 COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector 346 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Note Set the mode setting switch of the CPM1 CIF0O1 adapters to the Host Link communication mode 3 Communication module CPM1 CIF11 OMRON PLC CPM1 CIF11 adapter RS422 interface 5 pin terminal block CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO COM1 Connection of OMRON CQM Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommen Optional Setting Precaution ded Setting PLC PLC Type OMRON OMRON a RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the Data Bits 7ors COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 or 2 COM port settings of the PLC 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the Bits per Second 9600 57600
97. 5 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for KA Manager Communication Set D Download Operate Communication Type Network so Upload Operate IF 255 255 255 255 PORT 21845 System Operate cS j Serial HO MULL Get Version Download Section LOGO Show Set Uncompile Operate Download User Data Download Recipe UnShow LOGO Download LOGO Click BACK and NEXT to switch between Download Operate Upload Operate and System Operate 15 3 Upload Operate Upload processing is used to transfer data files from the touch screen to a PC Communication parameters must be properly set before uploading Communication parameter settings the same as those described in download processing Upload section in this area the user can select the file type of upload data Upload user data upload the data stored in the panel to the PC the uploaded file will be saved as pkg file the same as the user data file for downloading Click Upload user data button a dialog box appears and prompt the user to enter the HMI description which can help the user distinguish different panels Select Data File must be selected the user can select logo file and recipe file also click OK Select a file save path enter a file name and click Save The user data file is saved as a pkg file The Upload Password dialog box appears Enter the password this password can be set in the HMI attribute dialog box see chapter 7 and click OK to begin the uploading
98. 6 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Priority Nonnal HMI HMIO PLC Addr Type LW Addr Code Type BIN WordNo Description amp ponent Attribute Basic Attribute Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position SettngMode Sub value 3 Dec value 5 Bom ooo The button for querying the next recipe is also a Multiple State Setting component Each time you press this button the system will add 5 to the value of LW9000 because each group of recipe data consists of five words Press this button once and the RWIO can display the data of the next recipe The upper limit for this parameter is 45 10 groups of recipes TO mbp bonent Attribute Basic Atribute Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Pasition SettingMode Add value i Inc value 5 Upper Lit 287 Chapter 8 Recipe Data How do we know which is the current Recipe group What controls the value displayed by LW0 We can make two more Multi State Setting components with the address of LWO both One is for subtraction and the other is for addition without the need of any shapes as shown in the figures below Graphics Fosition White Address HMI HMI HMI HMIO Addr Type LV Addr Type LW Code Type BIN Code Type BIN WordNo Use Addr Tag WordNo 1 Toe i OmMmponenm Attribute Basic Attribute Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position SettingMode Add value
99. 7 Scroll Bar Component PLC Parts The Scroll Bar is used to control the scrolling of a selected graph usually a Trend Graph or Oscillograph in multiple page mode It includes either a word or a double word register to define the scrolling scope of the scroll bar gt Adding a scroll bar 1 Click the Scroll Bar icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the Component attributes dialog box appears 213 Chapter 6 Components Basic Attribute Scroll Bar Position Prionty Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMIO 0 HMI HMO PLE O Addr Type LW 0 Addr Type Addr 0 Code Type BIN Code Type BIN Poat DODOD WordNo se Addr Tag WordNo 3 E Output Address The first word or double word register is used to save the current position value the second word or double word is used to save the position value of the starting point that is the starting point in the left or upper most part of the scroll bar depending on the scroll direction of the scroll bar the last word or double word is used to save the position value for the end of the scroll bar that is the ending point in the right or lower most part of the scroll bar When you change the value of the first word or double word the scroll bar will move towards the direction set by you from left to right from right to left from top to bottom from bottom to top The step of each motion is 1 and the range of motion is determined by the following two word
100. AXY series use serial port and the CASTOR series uses the serial port or the network port Before updating operation switch the DIP switch 1 on the back of the target screen to ON and DIP switch 2 to OFF After connecting and switching the DIP switch click Write Kernel or Write Roots to conduct the update The user can update any one part of the two and doesn t need to update the two parts together all the time Note After the updating OS kernel and root file system operation is conducted the target screen restores to the factory default settings Be cautious when performing this operation This function 430 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for KA Manager is only available for advanced users A Caution Make sure the power supply of the panel is stays on during the OS kernel root file system updating Unpredictable errors may occur if power goes off during downloading The updating operation is necessary only when the embedded OS is permanently damaged and it is strongly recommended that the user conduct this operation with the help of our technician 431 Chapter 16 Use of Setup Chapter 16 Use of Setup The DIP switches on the back of the panel are shown in the following figure N O 2 10FF 20OFF Normal working mode 10N 2O FF Firmware update and basic parameter setting mode 10FF 20ON Touch screen calibrate mode available after updating kernel and file syst
101. After compiling the project and establishing a physical connection between PLC and PC click the button the following dialog box appears HMI Simulation HMI Station HMI Information HIO HII Lill Simulation Serial Port HMI COMO HMI COM Show Information Simulation Type HULL pkg File Fath FULL Communication Type IF COM Select the touch panel to simulate select the COM ID of the computer to be connected to the PLC and click Simulate to start direct online simulation Note Use the programming cable of the PLC to connect the PLC and PC for the simulation 3 8 2 Indirect Online Simulation In the indirect online simulation mode the simulator exchanges data with the PLC via the HMI panel connected to a PC The simulation screen acts as the actual panel clicking on the screen is the same as touching the real panel With the indirect online simulator lots of valuable development time is saved The user must have to have the proper panel to perform the simulation Connect the panel to PC with USB cable or GEMINI GALAXY downloading cable or Ethernet cable depending on the model being used Connect the PLC to the HMI panel with the required communication cable For more information about the communication cables refer to chapter 14 After compiling the project and connecting the PLC HMI panel and PC properly click the le button the following dialog box appears 65 Ch
102. C software setting Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of MITSUBISHI Reference website HT TP Awww mitsubishi automation com Operable address range Counter buffer double Data register Special data register Note D indicates decimal notation O indicates octal notation and the value range is 0 7 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note MITSUBISHI FX series PLCs include such models as FX0O FXOs FXOn FX1s FX1n FX2nc FX2n All of them can be connected with the Kaspro touch screen either through the programming COM port in the CPU or through the communication interface board 232BD or 485BD When BD module is used select such PLC types as MITSUBISHI FXOn FX2 FX2n COM and pay attention to the settings of the communication format register D8120 Set the b9 and b8 of BFM O0 to 0 For detailed hardware description refer to the technical manuals provided by MITSUBISHI 356 1 2 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs CPU Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 Communication module RS232BD Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 MITSUBISHI PLC FX series CPU RS 422 interface 8 pin DIN round female connector Pin assignment of 8 pin DIN round f
103. C200H LK201 3G2A6 LK201 communication module RS232 OMRON PLC LK201 adapter RS 232 interface 25 pin D SUB female connector Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO COM1 Note Please pay attention to the setting of four DIP switches on the module For indications of these DIP switches refer to the technical manual of communication modules of OMRON The wiring method of the CPUs of the C series PLCs developed at an earlier stage like C20H C28H C40H CPU is the same as that shown in the above figure 3 Communication module C200H LK202 3G2A6 LK202 communication module RS422 OMRON PLC LK202 adapter RS 422 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 353 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 4 Communication module C200HW COM02 03 04 05 06 communication module RS 232 OMRON PLC Kaspro C200HW COM CASTOR Gemini Galaxy communication module touch screen RS 232 interface COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector 5 Communication module C200HW COM03 06 communication module RS 422 OMRON PLC Kaspro C200HW COM CASTOR Gemini Galaxy communication module touch screen RS 422 interface COMO0 COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector Note C200HW COM communication module supports only the C200H ALPHA series of CPUs Pay attention to the settings of DIP switches For hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by OMRON
104. Click a in the Window Toolbar to create a new window las imaman lei Bez Ea wm MS wm YNGNZ SME MEZE 4 4 Opening a Window After a window is created make a selection in the dropdown menu in the Window Toolbar all existing windows can be selected from the list You may also click the icon to display the previous window Click the icon to display the next window If you use a mouse with a wheel you can directly roll the wheel to change the window number 86 Chapter 4 Windows 4 5 Deleting a Window Project construct window ES aa HMI OO HMI 2 HMO O Frarmed OF 1 Framet gt 2 Frame I 3 Frame3 I 4 Frarme4 gt 5 Frame5 I 6 Frame O 7 Frame gt amp Frarmed i PLC fi PLC1 0 fi PLCO O As shown in the above figure in the Project construct window select a window to be deleted and press the Delete key in your keypad In this case an alert box appears Select Yes to delete the window all the components in the window will also be deleted Be careful when using this function Ein The deletion of base windows Frames 0 1 2 and 3 are forbidden Once they are deleted the project should not be downloaded into panel or the panel will not operate normally 4 6 Examples for Windows Several basic examples will be given below to explain some basic operations about window Example 1 We often need to write a special value into some registers as soon as
105. DD BB Auxiliary relay 0 65535 DDD BB Link relay Note D indicates decimal notation B indicates bit code and the value range is 0 15 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Geminii Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note OMRON C200H series PLCs include C200H C200HS and ALPHA series Where ALPHA series consist of such models as C200HX HG HE C200H series PLCs can be connected with the touch screen through the HOSTLink protocol with the RS 232 interface on the CPU They can also be configured with various compatible HOSTLink communication modules provided by OMRON to connect with the touch screen Please pay attention to software and hardware settings For hardware description refer to manuals provided by OMRON 1 CPU C200H HS ALPHA series PLC OMRON PLC Kaspro Shes C200H CPU RS 232 CASTOR Gemini Galaxy interface touch screen 9 pin D SUB female COMO0 COM1 connector Note The wiring method of SRM1 series PLCs is the same as that shown in the above figure In the CPUs of the C200H series PLCs there are Dual in line Package DIP switches for parameter setting Please pay attention to parameter settings For detailed hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by OMRON 352 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 2 Communication module
106. Go to the Event Display Component tab Basic Attribute Event Display Component Position Col Space Formar Row Space gt Sequence No L Event Trig Time L Acknowledge Time L Retum to Normal Time L Ettended Time Format D H M Short Time Fonmat H M C Standard Time Format H M S l Ettended Date Format y M D MM Select Area Color O Event Trig Date M D Afinance Click E Acknowledge Color WW BackTo Normal Color 199 Chapter 6 Components Row Spacing Column Spacing The spacing between different rows or columns Acknowledge Mode Click or Double click Color Acknowledge The color after the event message is acknowledged Return to normal The color off the event message after it returns to the normal state Select Box The color of the dashed line that indicates which message the user has selected Format Display format of event messages All added contents for example sequence No trigger time and so on will be displayed before the message Sequence No The number of the event Event numbering starts at 0 Event Trigger time The time that the message was triggered Acknowledge time The time that the message was acknowledged Return to normal time The time at which the conditions causing the event returned to a non triggering state Extended time format Display the time in the format of DD HH MM Simplified time format Display the time in the format of HH MM Trigger date Disp
107. Import Recipe S Attribution Place a Function key in Window 0 and select pop up Frame4 Function Key Component Attribution Video Window Function Key Trigger Addr Tag Graphics Position Switch Window 4 Freamed Excute Marco Keyboard Func Enter d 3 Col ne Black and hit or Black and hite F 0 Message Board a aiaa Text f Tool en Magnify Multiple 10 gt 7 Indicator Trend Graphics 7 All Bitmap Pen Width All VectorGraph Clear Next Vertical Background Pen Color Colo Print Page f Curent Horizontal In Frame4 place a Video component with the Input Address type set to LW the address to 0 change the size of the window to 700 in width and 474 in height in the Position tab Video Frequency Component Attribution Basic Attribution Position Pricrity Input Address gt Output Address HMI HMO PLC HMI PLC Add Type La Add Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN Foma ODODO Code Type Format DODDD Word Use Add Tag WordNo Use Addr Tag Description WDO 242 9 Chapter 6 Components Video Frequency Component Attribution Basic Attribution Position tet E Upper Width Place a Word Setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 0 the Setting Mode to Add Value the Inc Value to 1 the Upper Limit to 2 since there are onl
108. K Download Device Ethernet PC Serial No COM1 IP Address 192 168 0 Pot 21845 OW 5g ee Edit Option Screen Grid Space Delete Delete All Modify This port can be connected to a HUB or a SWITCH via a standard Ethernet cable RJ45 straight through cable to access the LAN Local Area Network or can be directly connected to the Ethernet port of the PC via an interconnection cable RJ45 cross over cable The network interface of the PC is directly connected to the touch screen via a cross over cable Then it is connected to the touch screen through the HUB via a straight through cable 3 If a user has enabled the firewall an alert box will appear to ask which port the user wants to access Select Enable and download can be made If all ports are disabled disable the firewall 4 The touch screen is directly connected to the network interface of the PC and the IP address of the PC should be changed to an address different from that of the touch screen If the IP address of the touch screen is 192 168 0 253 then the IP address of the PC should be changed to 192 168 0 X The first three numbers should be the same and the last number should be different for each IP address on the network 2 Downloading through a Serial port To use serial port as the downloading method select Serial Port in the list as the following figure shows 74 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Comp
109. KA Software for Gemini Galaxy and Castor Series Contents om tad KASPRO GROUP COPYRIGHT NOTICE This manual is a publication of Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc and is provided for use by its customers only The contents of the manual are copyrighted by Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc reproduction in whole or in part for use other than in support of Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc equipment is prohibited without the specific written permission of Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc KA Software for Gemini Galaxy and Castor Series Contents NRODDU OTO N eiacsissi dads aac hse sss fascias satin fat wich etc uascdaca ie tseices ctsetecuad Ea 5 CHAPTER 1 INSTALLATION OF KA SOFTWARE uuu ccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccsccccccsscscccccccesssees 7 AA INS TALEING iKARS OI VV ARR EE ecco cscs a a ciel evksascncencoucsemibatewtecesuee ai chiwndeabeaiuis 7 AGZINT ERFACE DIAGRAM E os Ss EE N aaa sas Mae E oh el NS tea So hs Se Aol ae 9 CHAPTER 2 MAKING A SIMPLE PROJECT eeeeeeeeooooosossossssssssesscsccecossooossosssssssssssssesessesssosossssso 13 DEAS EATING CeIn ee Od Cite steer nhieu ta tt tant etre oa eal eterna aticuatat leans es 13 2 2 GREATING A SWITCH COMPONENT eenei sadness taasa subs odbc A a a ees 19 CHAPTER 3 DESCRIPTION OF THE KA SOFTWARE SOFTWARE cccccccccsscssccssceees 24 3L VKA SOFTWARE NTERFAC E uasai tot ster a rsh ais tie tad eae teat eh eee a a tes 24 3 2 COMPONENT LIBRARY WINDO
110. K_14 become the keypad for numeric input Nenu Task Bar 233 Chapter 6 Components 6 29 10 Printer function Function Key Enable Addr Tag Graphics Position i Switch Window Change 0 FrameD E wecute Marci C Keyboard Func ASC a i Map Keyboard Disable gt apping Ke TouchCalibrate O Import Expor Import Project To HMI C Message Board f Black and White C Multicolor Tet Magnify Multiple 10 Indicator Trend Graphi pao M peii z i Curent paper j All VectorGraph Replace Paper f Verica Background Refer to Chapter 10 Print 6 30 Timer Component Function Parts The Timer component is a timing device and will execute the corresponding function when the start timing time arrives It can implement such functions as Executing Macro code Setting Parameters and Transferring Data Various Functions of Timer 1 Click the Timer component icon and drag it to the window and the Timer Component Attribute dialog box appears Click the Timer tab 234 Chapter 6 Components Timer Timer Function Fosition Basic Attribute Trigger Address Trigger Mode noe HMI Exe Cycle 100ms 30 100ms PLC No Response Mode Immediate d Address Type Response State CHT Address Repeat Times 0 Format DDDDD Zero means repeat all along Basic Attribute Trigger Mode Include such options as All time Initial Frame Triggered at Window Initialization Close frame Trig
111. MIO 0 HMI HMIO PLC 0 Addr Type 0X gt dr O Addr Type Addr LB 0 Code Type BIN Code Type BIN WordNa 1 Use Addr Tag WordNa 1 fw Use Addr Tag Description An Address tag entered in the Address Tag Library cannot be changed in other places To change it the user must open the Address Tag Library and do the desired operation A Note The data type of the component using address tag MUST BE CONSISTENT WITH the 232 Chapter 6 Components data type of the tag For example when selecting a tag for a Bit component such as Bit Lamp or Bit Switch only the tags of Bit type can be seen in the Addr Type list When selecting a tag for a Word component such as Word Setting component or Multiple State Display only the Word tags can be seen in that list PLC Control s 6 36 MWA PLC Control Component Project Database PLC Control is a list storing the PLC register events Registers in the list are linked to specific functions These functions are controlled by the value of corresponding registers Functions supported by the PLC Control library are listed in the following table Once the Register Control pair is logged in the list it will automatically run like a background program Change window To change the current window Backlight control To Turn on off the backlight To print the content of the designated Report print window Backlight control return value Backlight control
112. N Z ih Chapter 5 PEER statel gt amp 100 m y Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE lt state state 3 Click to select a state the state being selected is outlined by a green frame By default the latest added state is set to be selected after being added Draw lines rectangles and other shapes with the tools in the drawing toolbar to edit the appearance for the selected state After finishing drawing for all states click save and close the drawing window VG 1 vg E File Edit E View Tools T Library D Window HelptH be J 4 i SERRE Bit Setting Indicator lamp Component a Direct Window Word Setting Mutiple State Mimle Function Parts 0S Bin Saan i lt i LOF NANAI statel N i Mw FE o state2 ee Oa Ss a O E m date E ORORO ae 100 aie coe z EF A we gt Project Files window x _ vector Graph NUM_KEYOO1 vg NUM_DISP_BaAROO1 NUB_CTRL_BAROOL gt j e SRROW BLUE1 24 b e ARROW BLUE1 23 b e ARROW BLUE1 20 b Y uit gt ai PLC1 0 div PLCO 0 Mouse x 31 y 90 105 Width 65 Height 62 UpperCase Number Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE 4 Return to the configuration window select a component and open the Component Attribute dialog box of it as shown in the following figure wL E 5 Switch to the Shape tab in the dialog box check the
113. Name Frames Special Attribute Position x O Bottom Window 1 None 2 None r 3 None Frame Pop Window Type i W Tracking Monopoly fa 0 rame f r a W Clipping J Coherence Please not the security level setting is valid only for base windows and not available for other windows A project has three security levels namely high 2 medium 1 and low 0 When creating a new window the default security level is low In the HMI Attributes window the user can set the password for each security level When a user is in a high security level he can access windows with lower security levels however if the user is in a low security level he cannot access windows with higher security levels It helps to enhance security For example important Function keys can be configured in a window with a high security level therefore a user cannot access these Function keys and can only access them after entering the high security level password The following is an example using security levels First select File gt New Project to create a new project Then add an HMI to the Project double click the HMI to open the HMI Attribute window click on the HMI Extend Attribute tab and then set the password for three security levels Here we set the password for level 1 security to 1111 as shown below 324 Chapter 12 Security Level Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Histori
114. No such file or gi am inuce uclibe ger acro_ 0 0 No such file or directory Sor directonranninux uclibe gec no input files ram inux uclibe gee no input files ctoryanninux uclibe gec no input files For programs used to modify macro instructions refer to Chapter 9 449
115. OM1 5 pin terminal block Note When the Cnet module is used the PLC type must be set to LG MASTER K Cnet Pay attention to the setting of communication parameters It is necessary to use the Cnet Frame Editor software provided by LG to set the parameters Set the mode switch on the communication module to position 3 393 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 14 9 Matsushita PLC Matsushita Electric Connection of NAIS FP Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC Type Matsushita FP ee different types COMO0 COM1 RS232 RS485 according to different ports Must be the same as the Data Bits 7ors COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 or 2 l COM port settings of the PLC l 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the Bits per Second 9600 l 57600 115200 COM port settings of the PLC l l Even parity odd Must be the same as the Parity Odd parity l l parity none COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the PLC Station No 1 0 255 COM port settings of the PLC Note The PLC station No for FP series is usually 1 by default However due to special control of FP3 its PLC station No must be 0 Pay attention to the communication settings of the PLC during connection PLC software setting Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of NAIS
116. OS Oscilloscope SCR Scroll bar BG Bitmap graph VG Vector graph XY XY Plot MT Meter AB Alarm Bar NP Note Pad 5 3 Additional Note Description lf necessary each component can have note attached This note only plays the function of a descriptive remark for the current program and can serve as future reference which facilitates in the understanding of printed results This note does not have any substantial influence upon the program Basic Attribute Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position Priority Noanmal Read Address Write Address HMI HMI T D HMI HMI1 Addr Type Ox T Addr Type LB Addr 0 Code Type Code Type BIN Format DOODDD Word o Use Addr Tac Word ha Description 100 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE 5 4 Input Output Address of PLC Components related to PLC registers during runtime must be designated with proper PLC I O address to ensure the program runs correctly The correct address type and range are different for different PLCs As shown in the following figure PLCO is a MODBUS device while PLC1 is a SIEMENS product so their addresses are different The program will automatically list the correct address type and range according to the PLC type Basic Attribute Et State Switch Tag Graphics Position Priggt Moannal HMI HM PL HMI HMI Akk Type LE Aki Type LB Code Type BIN Code Type BIN WordNo 1 Use Addr Tag WerdNe 1 Description
117. P switches 1 and 2 in the rear of the touch panel are set to OFF To configure the DIP switches remove the lid on the back of panel 71 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Once the driver has been installed successfully no more settings are needed The user can use the Kaspro USB device after connecting and powering on the panel To download through USB cable select USB for Download Device as shown in the following figure Tools T Option fia Window Help H El Compile Ctrl F Eo Compile AIR ka clear Build Result E Ctrl E Ca Download D Ctrl D f Offfine Simulation E FS fi Indirect Online Simulation I Shift F5 Le Direct Online Simulation N Ctrl F5 System Manager iG HMI Version Manager VW Upload Manager BE DownLoad Managert H Upload Init Window L Download Init Windows Upload Project P iH Uncompile Manager Q Compile MW Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Bytes Download Download Device USB r PC Serial Ho COR IP Address Port 1845 Edit Option Screen Grid Space a 2 bea aa Cancel Compress Large Bitmap In the numeric input box the user can specify the limit of the Original file size of the bitmap which is imported into the project The file size is counted by bytes When the bitmap file exceeds that limit the complier will compress the bitmap for downloading Compression will save the storage space on the pan
118. PLC components do not select the touch screen number and the PLC number as shown in the figure below Priority Normal Read Address HMI HMIO PLC 0 Addr Type 1B Add 0 0 Code Type BIN WordNo e Compile the component select the Offline Simulation mode select the corresponding touch 441 Chapter 17 Networking of Castor Series Touch Screens screen number and click Simulate to perform the offline simulation as shown in the figure below HMI Simulation HMI Station HMI Information Simulate Exit Simulation Seral Port HMI Fort PL Part HMI Port FC Port HMI Fort PC Part COMO COM COM1 COM COM COM Show Information Simulation Type Offline Simulation File Fathi pkg c program files kaspro_enu_v1 44prqjecthmanual testings mantual testing pkg Communication Type MULL IP NULL PORT NULL COM NULL BPS NULL Select corresponding touch screen number and click Download to perform the download operation Select Section Data File A O LOGO File HMI Information m i b Download File Path c program fles kasproa_enu_yv1 44project manual testing manual testing pkg Communication Type USB port IP NULL PORT NULL Emona COM NULL BPS MULL Exit Downloading between different touch screens must be conducted via a PC Firstly upload from a 44
119. PLCs Detailed wiring diagram 1 CPU MITSUBISHI PLC FX series CPU RS 422 interface Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 8 pin DIN round female connector Pin assignment of 8 pin DIN round female connector 2 Communication module RS232BD MITSUBISHI PLC Kaspro FX series RS232BD CASTOR Gemini Galaxy module touch screen RS 232 interface COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 3 Communication module RS485BD MITSUBISHI PLC FX series RS485BD module RS 422 interface 5 pin terminal block Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 Connection of MITSUBISHI Q Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA MT5 ANS communication cable MITSUBISHI PLC Castor Gemini Galaxy A3N A1SH series CPU RS232 RS422 ports COM0 COM1 25 pin D SUB female connector KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting Select corresponding MITSUBISHI PLC Type MITSUBISHI Melsec Q PLC type according to Melsec Q different PLCs COM COMO0O COM1 RS232 RS485 bree be the same as Data Bits 7ors the COM port settings 361 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Must be the same as Stop Bits 1 the COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as Bits per 9600 19200 38400 9600 the COM port settings Second 57600 115200 of
120. PUs and by the DF 1 serial communication protocol They can also be connected with the touch screen through the AIC communication module provided by Allen Bradley For related software and hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by ROCKWELL 3 2 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 1 CPUMicrologix1000 1200 1500 Allen Bradley PLC Micrologix series CPU RS 232 interface 8 pin DIN round female Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 connector Mini Din 8 Pin Port Pin assignment of 8 pin DIN round female connector 2 Communication module AlC part No 1761 NET AIC RS232 Allen Bradley PLC Kaspro Micrologix series AlC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO COM1 communication module RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector Allen Bradley PLC Micrologix series AlC Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 communication module RS 232 interface 8 pin DIN round female connector 373 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Connection of Allen Bradley SLC500 Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting Select different protocols for PLC Type AB DF 1 AB DF1 AB DH485 l different M CM COMO0O COM1 RS232 RS485 Data bits T this protocol are Data Bits Torg set to 8 in a fix
121. Priority Normal Read Address 7 Write Address HMI HMO PLE Addr Type IB Add 00 J Addr Type M B Addr Code Type BIN Code Type BIN addr Tag WordNo Place a bit setting component set the PLC No to 1 and select OMRON address for address type 437 Chapter 17 Networking of Castor Series Touch Screens _ Brt State Setting Component Attribute Basic Attribute State Setting Tag Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMIO 0 HMI HMO PE 1 WordNo 1 gt Addr Tac WordNoa E Description To set other components select corresponding PLC numbers 17 1 2 Networking of One Touch Screen with Multiple PLCs A Caution 1 When a touch screen is connected with multiple PLCs the communication mode can only be RS 485 instead of RS 232 The same COM port must be connected with same PLCs or the PLCs supporting the same protocol As shown in the figure below COM1 is connected with 2 Siemens S7 200 PLCs and COMO is connected with 3 MODBUS RTU PLCs or 3 PLCs supporting the MODBUS RTU protocol for example LG MODBUS RTU EMERSON MODBUS RTU Schneider MODBUS RTU However during configuration these three PLCs must select MODBUS RTU In actual connection the user can use PLCs supporting the MODBUS RTU protocol Setting of communication parameters The same COM port shall have the same settings no matter how many PLCs it is connected to Double click ea
122. R MD ise seca ss aise A cerca hele AA 99 5 0 ADDITIONAL NOTE DESCRIPTION sucstictemeindersiisiasacvantsccos s a a aa 100 54 INPUT OUTPUTADDRESS OF PEC ve crecclccces tac sevens a e aa a a eiaitudesunebas 101 INEC OR GRAPE eR Teme metre eT nr RnR a AIOE On TOR ere ST Pe ae 102 CON 2 1A cae eee eee Dee nT nee ats ReaD EM fOr Oe eS a Otay AEC ORE Pe ene One Stee ame Pe re 108 BTS RETIN A oct tg Ss ce sete Mele De coe salen gga ce eth cin hl tah a cll Satan 112 5 6 TASKBAR AND TASK BUTTONS roire ed er haere ntact as aoa aed tee ale a a e Nemes 113 CRAPTER G GOMPONEIN US rusensi E T 118 OREAMP a ea ea ne ae E ee ee Ne nee ene ee ec 119 6 2 Bil SETTING COMPONENT aicen a a A aa a a aa a a a 123 OFON a A E E E A 125 6A MUT SAE OE N O coi seo th ciate ha ia heh a he obese lk a a a 128 6 5 MULTISTATE DIS PEAY corset tes tate et acca ie iis iterate etd uted aati ia dec nca ta eta 130 OUTS TAT SVT Coico ala a adn aal old aneadel dal ataage EAD 133 SS PRA Renee NER nae NE Re ne te Cm ena rT eRe Ot Rm POET EOE ee OR eC eee 135 6 0 MOVING COMPONENT merenna O a a T adda dont tecteteagebe 139 COARI A TONE a eee a ete eat A A 143 O TONUMERIC INPUT erden a a a ree PET A pre earner ene Ene ty EYE Are 147 BP TANI RRC DIS PUY ee coated sche Ga ce ti as lp Ses aS ale ei a ey eA ile Sa a 153 AZ ET INU xcs Rated its Saas sd tele ax ole da lees Goan ie Era get al Seales MA A an Balaton 155 OAS TEXT DISPLAY erent ne a WE eR AP er CRS OEE RN ete EEO Ce ne 164 0 ABAR ORAPH ce
123. Reference website Http www aromat com Operable address range PLC Address Operable my Description Range 0 9999F 9999F External input node 394 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 0 9999F DDD H Internal auxiliary node 0 9999 Link control node 0 9999 Timer node Actual value register of EV 0 9999 timer counter 0 9999 Data register Note D indicates decimal notation H indicates hexadecimal notation and the value range is 0 F The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the Set value register of 0 9999 timer counter CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note NAIS FP series PLCs cover FPO FP1 FP2 FR2SH FP10SH and FP3 series All of them can be connected with the Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy series touch screens through the programming interface or communication port on their respective CPUs For detailed hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by Matsushita Electric 1 CPU RS232 Kaspro NAIS FP PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy FPO FP2 FP2SH FPM CPU touch screen programming interface Tool Port COMO0 COM1 5 pin DIN round female connector 395 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 5 Pin Mini DIN Connector Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy NAIS FP PLC touch screen FPO CPU RS232 COM
124. S Presently CASTOR series of touch screens do 387 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs not support CP340 and CP341 communication modules of SIEMENS When the PLC communicates with S7 300 it is necessary to create the data block DB10 CASTOR series exchange data with the S7 300 through the DB10 When using an adapter pay attention to the setting of the DIP switch and it is necessary to define the data format as byte when creating the DB10 For detailed settings refer to the technical manuals of SIEMENS 1 HMI adapter 6ES7972 0CA10 0XA0 Kaspro SIEMENS PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy S7 300 series HMI touch screen adapter COMO0 COM1 RS 232 interface 2 PC adapter 6ES7972 0CA23 0XA0 Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 SIEMENS PLC S7 300 series PC adapter RS 232 interface 388 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 3 MPI adapter KA MT5 S7 300 Kaspro SIEMENS PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Kaspro compatible PMI touch screen adapter COM0 COM1 KA MT5 S7 300 RS 232 interface 2 RX TA 5 GND 14 8 LG PLC LG Industrial Systems LG Industrial Systems Connection of LG Master K Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended i i l Optional Setting Precaution Setting LG MASTER K300S CPU Select different PLC type LG MASTER K PLC Type Ca LG MASTER K Cnet LG according to diffe
125. STOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Reference website Http Awww siemens com s 200 Operable address range PLC Address Operable cae Description r Range 040957 4095 7 DDDO External input node atr 0 4095 7 eae External output node Internal auxiliary 0 4095 7 DDDO node 0 5120 DDDD Data register Note D indicates decimal notation O indicates octal notation and the value range is 0 7 Note that the start bit of the VW address must be an even number If it is necessary to operate the double word variable select 2 in the corresponding component address properties dialog box The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note SIEMENS S7 200 series PLCs cover such models as CPU212 CPU214 CPU215 CPU216 CPU221 CPU222 CPU224 and CPU226 All of them can be connected with the Kaspro touch screen through the programming communication port PPI port on the CPUs Where CPU226 has two communication ports either one can be used to connect the touch screen but the communication parameters for them have to be set separately While connecting PLC directly with the touch screen through the CPU pay attention to the setting of communication parameters in the software For detailed settings refer to the technical manuals provided by SIEMENS 1 CPU
126. Sector round Pointer up round Pointer down The following figure shows three types of dials scale component must be used with meter A Note In general a point has to work with the scale component The scale can be used to strengthen the operation effect of the pointer Refer to the description of scale later in this document 3 Click OK and adjust the position and size of the meter component Indirect 6 16 4 Indirect Window Component PLC Parts The Indirect Window component pops up a registered window over the current screen Refer to section 4 3 for the creation of a new window Usually the size of windows invoked by an indirect window component is made smaller than full screen size or equal to the full screen size The Indirect Window component calls up a window that is specified by a word register specified by the Input Address There is no absolute limitation to the maximum registered Indirect Windows components in the KA SOFTWARE However at run time only 16 windows at the most can be displayed simultaneously To close an indirect window change the value of the Input Address register to 0 170 Chapter 6 Components Multi state setting Input Address is D100 set D100 20 Set D100 21 Reading Address of indirect window D100 set D100 0 Press the button to pop up window 20 Henu Task Bar 171 Chapter 6 Components Press the button to pop up window 21 Nenu T
127. Switch Tag Graphics Fosition Control Mode State Num 2 Functions of Multi State Switch Setting mode Description When the Multi State Switch is pressed the value in the designated output address register is increased by one If the result equals to one map value in the mapping list the corresponding state will be displayed When the Multi State Switch is pressed the value in the designated output address register is decreased by one If the result equals to one map value in the mapping list the corresponding state will be displayed Data mapping Every state of the multi state display component is linked to a unique value of 134 Chapter 6 Components the designated PLC word register When the register value equals to one of the Map Values in the mapping list the Multiple State Display component will display the corresponding state Since the Multiple State Switch component can write and read the register when the switch is set to a new state the corresponding map value will be written to the designated word register The mapping detail is listed in the Data Mapping list The user can view and edit the mapping relationship between state numbers and register values Go to the Tag tab Fill in text to denote states Go to the Graphics tab Click the Vector Graph or bitmap to display the register states and represent the touch area 5 Go to the Position tab and adjust the position and size of the Multiple State Swi
128. Timer Timer Function Fosition s Basic Attribute Trigger Address Trigger Mode Byreq addess E HMI Exe Cycle 100ms 1 100ms PLC No Response Mode Immediate hi Address Type Response State On Address Times 1 Format DODDD Zero means repeat all along Then we make six macro templates which are to be triggered by the above mentioned six timer components in sequence LB100 triggered timer corresponds to macro_0 c LB101 triggered timer corresponds to macro_1 c and so on The code of macro_0 C are to change the state of the first domino The code is as follows int MacroEntry LB1_ W 1 LB1_R LB101_ W 1 return O The variable is defined as follows Parameters Data type Param name PLC Station Reg ddre Address Mo of ward OptMode bik LB1O1 vy 0 LE 101 1 Write bik LEI Ww 0 LE 1 1 write bik LEIR 0 LE 1 1 Read When macro_0 is triggered it will change the state of LB1 and set LB101 to 1 which will then triggers macro_1 The macro_1 will change LB2 and set LB102 to 1 macro_2 macro4 will be set in a similar way 304 Chapter 9 Macro Code Macro_5 is different It s code is as follows int MacroEntry LB6 W LB6_R LB100 W 1 return 0 That is macro_5 will trigger macro_0 Make a bit setting component and set LB100 to ON Change the label to START to trigger the first timer The edited configuration window is shown below
129. Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 20 Use Addr Tag WordNlo ee Priority Reserved function not used for the time being gt Input Address PLC word register address corresponding to the designated X axis track data the word address corresponding to Y axis is input address 1 If there are more than one channel the corresponding address of the second channel is X axis input address 2X number of sampling points Y axis input address 2X number of sampling points 1 and so on Address Type The address type must be properly set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Address The address of the word register corresponding to the XY plot Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Depend on the number of channels number of sampling points and current address type of XY plot It is calculated by system not settable by the user Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the XY Graph component 136 Chapter 6 Components 2 Go to the XY Graphics tab and set related parameters XY Graph Com ale nent Attribute Basic Attribute Y Graphics Channel Save Historic Data Print Print Trig Line Position Sam Time x 1s a Type Single page Atr Horizontal Sam Type Time DrawType Standan Save soi 10 PageNum 1 Channel 1 Control Address HMI PLC Addr T
130. Type BIN Code Type BIN _ Format DODDD WordNa ide WordNo 1 iz Description Write Address Refers to the initial address of a consecutive PLC register The word addresses designated by the Data Length on Recipe Data tab that come after this address can be used to transmit data Address Type Select the address type of the register corresponding to the oscilloscope that is the monitored register s address type The address type varies with PLC type Alternatively you can also use the internal register of the HMI For internal registers of HMI refer to Section 5 4 Please note that some internal registers of the HMI are reserved by the system Do not use these registers For details refer to Chapter 11 Addr Address corresponding to the first element of the Recipe Data Transmission 275 Chapter 8 Recipe Data component Code Type BCD or Binary WordNo Depends on the number of data to be transferred later Use Address Tag Whether to use the established address tag for details refer to Section 6 35 Description Reference name assigned to the Recipe Data Transmission component do not display Click the Recipe Data tab and set the function and data length Recipe Com po ent Attribute Basic Attribute Recipe Data Tag Graphics Position Function Upload from PLC to Recipe ea Data Length 1 Word Function Download Transferring data from the recipe memory of the touch screen to the PLC Upload Trans
131. Use Addr Tag T rigger Function TL Execute Macrocode Iv Pop up ww indor 0 Framed Confirm Pop C Trig Pop Ww rhe D ata oO D Oo Format OOODOOD Line On Please Inspec T ext Color Fort 16 ial I Ose T est Library pe S Oon g D Use Sound Trigger Function T Execute Macracode I Pop up window O Framed tf Confirm Pop Trig Pop Iw rrite Data oO HMHI HIO PLC Wo 0 4S ddr Type LB 4 ddress 1 T_ Use Addr Tag Format O DO O O O T ext Line On Please Inspect F T ext Color Font 16 ec T Use Test Library Soung Uze Sound Open T ext Library Open Address Tag Library 1 Address 196 Chapter 6 Components Data Type Select the node register corresponding to the event as bit or word address Address Type Select the address type of the register corresponding to the event Address type vairies with PLCs Address Designate the PLC bit or word register address to trigger the event Code Format BIN or BCD 2 Attribute Event Trigging Bits When Data Type is set to Bit the attribute can be set as follows ON Displays message when bit is ON OFF Displays message when bit is OFF Condition Words When Data Type is set to Word the condition can be set as follows Use lt to trigger when value in word register is less than preset value Use gt to trigger when value in word register is greater than preset value Print On T
132. V 16DT 411 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs user manual Please note that this protocol does not support batch transfer of bits or words Detailed wiring diagram Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen PLC RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB male connector KV CPU Port RJ 12 port 14 16 OEMAX PLC eh OEMAX Connection of OEMAX Series PLC with CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC Type OEMAX l Must be the same as the COM Data Bits 7ors l port settings of the controller l Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 l port settings of the controller l 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Bits per Second 19200 l 57600 115200 port settings of the controller l Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity None l l parity none port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM PLC Station No 1 port settings of the controller 412 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Controller software setting Refer to OEMAX PLC user manuals Reference website http Awww oemax com Operable address range PLC Address Operable ae Bit Word Description Type Range m R ooir Doon mpuoapu rode m f u oorr ooon creaa Bit TC 0 255 DDD Timing register Bit 0 0 15 F Special register O wee Rove oer ooo aso we T
133. W and for Address 0 Click OK and the variable is registered in the Macrocode Variable Window Parameters macro_0 c Data type Param name PLC No PLC Address type Address No of Word OptMode signed shart LWO_R LW 0 1 Read Note While compiling macrocodes all referenced external data must be registered in the Macrocode Variable Window in advance Use the same method to set LW1_R and set the address to LW1 The properties of LW2_W are set as follows 293 Chapter 9 Macro Code Macro Code Variant Vanable Late Hl Data Type double PLC No 0 Address Type Liw Address 2 Word Length 4 Format DDODE Code Type BIN Cancel A Caution Select for Data Type double and the Word Length changes to 4 automatically that is the variable occupies LW2 LW5 After setting the variable window is shown as follows Parameters macro_ c Data type Param name PLC No PLO Address type Address Mo of Word OptMode signed short LWO_R LW 0 1 Read signed short LW1_R LW 1 1 Read double LWi2_W LW 2 4 Write After defining the variable compile the codes as follows int MacroEntry LWO divided by LW1 is LW2 LW2 W LWO R LW1_R return O Save it to disk and the compilation of the macro is completed The system returns to configuration editing window Edit the following parameters Place two numeric input components corresponding to LWO and LW1 respectively Place a static text and enter
134. W Addr 0 Addr Type LWW Addr Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 1 p Description Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address Specify the PLC word register of the first trend curve the second trend curve corresponds to register at read address 1 and the third curve corresponds to register at read address 2 etc Address Type Select the address type corresponding to the meter that is the monitored address type The address type varies with PLC type Alternatively you can also use the internal address type of the HMI panel For internal address types of HMI refer to Section 5 4 Please note that some internal addresses of the HMI are used by the system Do not use these addresses For details refer to Chapter 11 Address The initial address of the word register corresponding to the trend curve component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Depend on the number of sampling channels If the number of channels is N 1 lt N lt 16 the No of words is N Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the Trend Curve 181 Chapter 6 Components component 2 Goto the Trend Graphics tab to set related parameters Trend Grag h Com J anent Attribute Print Print Trig Line Fosition Basic Attribute Trend Graphics Channel Save Historic Data
135. W itary iss th ee here ti tie rs eed eaten eo et enim 54 Ou OME F IVY IND OW este E a cotta accesses ek Soe NAE AA E cud Boston zcisun A ET E 59 3 4 PROJECT STRUCTURE WINDOW ois ici oe At Wosnrneced eat uschotnauacdetseses asia diaaulei tt onamiasdadlad anaa aiiai 60 3 5 COMPILATION INFORMATION WINDOW uu ceccececccccccccccccccccssssssscscceccecccececccececcceeauceusesstsssessecececececess 62 370 COMPONENT LIST WINDOW sisters ee Aa tte ace cee era ee eile aa ate aaah che 62 3 7 OPPUINE SIMULATION assesses see ak eile acl th ole ec eat ho es adhd a a tata 63 3 G ONUNE SIMULA NON ener ene eT YO go ET Re 64 SAUBI OAD sss E E cpa l ce eMac Slab N OA T 66 CHAPTER 4 WINDOWS l tomentosa ds Eilinciende edie caskeaheaiensecteeeel sbsbianeeets 80 APTN OVC YPE a eat ee taht Acree haar aM cae eee aah r eat Ate ast nelly oe 80 AD NVINDOW PROPER HES sessile acc el cite ae eee alee ale ce a less alee aes de iat 83 A S CREATINGA VV IND OW ese cteecs eis es Gc ee ad de is Rt ace Se be a cleats aR Bata 86 AA OPENING A WINDOW cesses arieccte comets a r 86 ADELE TINGA WINDOW adie E a a a 87 AO EXAMPLES FOR VWVINDOW S a a a oae E E etaeasens 87 4 7 WINDOW RELATED COMPONENTS ccscsssssseeeeececcecccecccccccccccccaessstssessseeeececcececececeeceanauaaaaessseeess 96 CHAPTER 5 BASIC DESIGN OF KA SOFTWARE 0000000sssssssssscssccsoscssossssssssssssssesesecsessssssssssss 98 5 ADESIGNING COMPONENT S exci itinerant De eh val eaten oo 98 DZ BOUT GOMPONENE
136. Window 0 li rt uY prmon Window l WIInNGOW Henu Task Bar Components 11 Press function keys in a fast selection window to switch from window 0 to window 4 press Return to return to window 0 Then press Return in window 0 to return to window 4 Basic Window 4 Cammon Window 1 Nenu Task Bur 12 Press Pop up Window in window 0 to pop up window 7 as shown in the figure below The user can move minimize or close the pop up window 229 Chapter 6 Components Basic Window 0 Basic Window 8 formiran Window 1 Basic Hindow 4 Popup Windos X Fast Select Window 5 Nenu Task Bar 13 Press Fast Selection Window 5 in the Fast Selection window to switch to Fast Selection window 5 as shown in the figure below Basic Window 0 ommon window 1 Common Window 1 Popup Fast Select 1 Window 7 W ndow Nenu Task Bar 14 Press Common Window 1 or Common Window 6 to switch between Common windows 230 Chapter 6 Components Basi Window 0 Connon Window 6 formon Yvindow 1 Connon Window 1 Nenu Task Bar Basic Window O ammon Ywindow 6 Connon Window 1 Window 2 Nenu Task Bar 231 Chapter 6 Components 6 29 2 Keyboard Function Function Key Component Attribute Function Key Enable Addr Tag Graphics Position C Switch Window Change 0 FrameO gt f Keyboard Func a O Map Keyboard Disable f Import Eepe Import Project To HMI C Message Boar
137. Word Lowest Word 0 Word OO A A When entering the character ABC ABC 157 Chapter 6 Components Highest word Word Word 2 Word Word 1 Word Lowest Word 0 Word 20 H 20 H 20 H am a zo ar zo aa e Ta ee fa 2 When the Font Align parameter is set to Right When entering the character A Highest word Word Word 2 Word Word 1 Word Lowest Word 0 Word e a a S a E E When entering the character AB AB Highest word Word Word 2 Word Word 1 Word Lowest Word 0 Word a T S a S When entering the character ABC ABC Highest word Word Word 2 Word Word 1 Word Lowest Word 0 Word a a a a S Some users would like to display the contents on the keypad when entering data To implement a this function a text input component can be placed in the keypad to read the corresponding data between LW9060 and LW9075 lt An example of the usage for LW9060 LW9075 is shown as follows 1 Create a new project and add a Text Input component on window 0 Set the parameters as shown in the figures below notice that the Input component has 5 words for storage so the user can input up to 10 characters 158 Chapter 6 Components AARAAAAA i Text Input Compo ent Attribute Basic Attribute Enable Address Fort Graphics Position Priority Normal Change byte order Read Address Write Address HMI HMIO PLC 0 HMI HMIO Addr Type Add 0 Add
138. a DDDDD Code Type BIN Word o 3 im Description Priority Reserved function not used for the time being gt Input Address The initial address of the word registers that controls the state shape and label information of the moving component in the PLC The first register is at the lowest address 139 Chapter 6 Components Address Type The address type must be properly set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Address The initial address of the word registers corresponding to the moving component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 3 for input address It is automatically set by system disabled for edit Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the moving component 2 Goto the Moving Component tab and set moving type number of states and maximum and minimum values along XY axes Moving Com 20 nent Attribute Basic Attribute Moving Component Tag Graphics Position Moving Type El Max Value 1 Min Value Scale Upper Limit Scale Lower Limit State Num 1 Type and Function Table Up to 32 different states can be assigned to the components in KA SOFTWARE interface When the component has only one state the value of the register specified by the Read Address Input Address in the Basic Attribute tab must be held at 0 otherwise th
139. able Addr Tag Graphics Position Switch Window Change 0 FrameO C Keyboard Func Enter Map Keyboard Disable Maoping Key TouchCalibrate Import Export Import Project To HMI Color f Black and White t Tool Pen h r Multicolor Pen Color E Color Magnify Multiple 1 0 Pen Width pa 5per f Horizontal LLL ee lear aper Vertical Gogg gg gji pog E ES E IBOBBUBA O BOBOR L Custom Color T gt mia fmia fa fa m m Di a 3 Pen Width Select the width of the pen with the value range of 1 8 the number 1 indicates the thinnest pen and the number 8 indicates the thickest pen as shown below C Tool Pen od Bon p cpw 1 E crane E C Clear Eo 4 Clear Screen Clear all contents in the Note Pad Example of using Note Pad 1 2 Create a new project We take window 0 as the Note Pad window for an example You can also select other windows as the Note Pad window Just drag the Note Pad component to window 0 Set the properties of the Note Pad component attribute dialog box as shown in the figure below 220 Chapter 6 Components Message Board Position Frame Width I FameCoor W Filled Background SSS S _ Seas Frame Width With the value range of 1 16 sele
140. accordance with your PLC connection set the COM Type to be RS232 RS485 4W or RS485 2W and set other properties like Baud Rate Word Length Parity and Stop Bits If you are not an advanced user do not change the default settings in the right column 11 Select File gt Save on the menu to save the project 12 Select Tools gt Compile or press the Compile icon on the toolbar After the compilation is completed a message box Compilation completed appears in the Compilation Information Window as shown in the following figure Message winodow Compilation Done Error Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project 13 Select Tools gt Offline Simulation or press the Offline Simulation icon on the toolbar as shown in the following figure ToolstT LibrarviD Window HelptH Cd Compile c Chrl F7 Ca DownloadiL Crrl D I offline SimulationtF F5 Ta Indirect Online Simulation hift F5 io Direct Online Simulation Ny Ctrl F5 OQptions AC Olt F Zaj KASimulator HMI Simulation HMI Information Simulation Serial Port HMI Port PC Port HMI Port PC Port HMI Port PC Part COMO COM COM1 COM COM2 COM Show Information Simulation Type Offline Simulation File Path pka c program files kaspro_enu_v1 4 project test_01 test_01 pkg Communication Type NULL IP NULL PORT NULL COM NULL BPS NULL
141. ad ale B GREG e BEAD AAP beh Seren p Files recently opened the program automatically remember the most recently opened 3 files name and path the user can quickly open them in the File Menu Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software New N Ctrl N Open Q Ctrl 0 Close C Save S Ctrl s Save As L Project Password P 1 manual testing 2 galaxy56 demo 3 manual testing Quit Q Exit Select Exit in the File menu to exit the KA SOFTWARE configuration software 3 1 2 Edit Undo Use this function to undo the latest operation the screen will return to the state before this operation Click the icon or select Undo in the Edit menu will activate this function Redo Use this function to redo the operation which has just been undone by the Undo operation Click or select Redo in the Edit menu The Undo Redo support the following operations 1 Drag a component from a component library window 2 Draw a static component 3 Move an object 4 Adjust the size of an object 5 All operations on the position toolbar 6 Line width line style and arrows 7 Fill style of an object 8 Frame color of an object 9 Fill color of an object 10 Set to Top layer set to Bottom layer 11 Group and ungroup of multiple parts 30 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software 12 Cut copy paste and delete of objects 13 Multiple copies To add any component to the screen or
142. again Roll This address has to cooperate with the scrolling bar that is the user can view the XY graph by directly moving the scroll bar Set the scrolling address the same as the address of the scrolling bar component to be associated For details refer to Section 6 27 Scroll Bar Time When the Save Time check box is selected the Time box in the lower part of the window will be available It includes 12 words used to save the time of the latest sampling 137 Chapter 6 Components point The 12 words contain the second minute hour day month year of the start point and the second minute hour day month year of the end point in the current page Each word represents a time point Go to the Channel tab and set related parameters of each track Basic Attribute XY Graphics Channel Save Historic Data Print Print Trig Line Position hol be Wah Dsatps _ Zor Xp Y Ze Y5p 16 bit signed Color Designate the color of each track Line Width The width of a line including 8 options Data Type Sets the data type with only two options of signed integer and unsigned integer Data pe Max and Min Value in X Direction Set the corresponding maximum and minimum values of each track line along the Y direction When a read value from the corresponding register is greater than the maximum value or less than the minimum value the maximum value or the minimum value will be displayed on the gra
143. am Mad riag a ne Lat Bpr ie StS oe at erre a terete ress e E 3 2 Graph element Window By default there are three important windows displayed within the KA SOFTWARE user interface 54 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software They are not real windows The definition of window will be described in the next chapter The window here refers to a special area related to all components of a project The three windows provide global information for the whole project The three windows are Graph element window Project files window and Project construct window which will be described one by one as follows HMIO whe E File Edit E View V Tools T Library D Windowiw Help H Bede an ie Hoof A Gle AT s ida Sa ll G ee fr HA fe aan BA hi Gre i Je ace 100 a gt ES 7 IHIEKERJ EERHEEF Graph element window Project files window TER ne na va rA Si a 0 Vector Graph Configuration edit window Bit Setting Indicator lamp Component Switch Direct ey tte R ae oe a a ois Graph element eas a window IE 1 Framet Tela A IF 2 Frame2 Word Setting Mutiple State iv Project eile a Kienlas t Function Parts window Message winodow Mouse x 120 y 232 Width 120 Height 80 The Graph element window includes Connector HMI PLC PLC Parts and Function Parts Connector Includes serial port connection Serial and Ethernet connection Ethernet HMI All m
144. am in the following order First execute YO command g Layer 1 Layer 2 Execute Y1 command Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 Finally execute Y5 command First reset the ON OFF of YO and set control of the ON OFF of Y1 step 2 set the ON OFF of Y2 Step 3 and so on and finally set the ON OFF of Y5 step 6 Please note that when the CASTOR encounters the Change Window command it will bypass the following components and directly change to the target window As shown in the following figure if Y2 is a function key for Change Window Y3 Y5 will be neglected The number of overlapped components should not exceed 32 Layer 1 Yo First execute Y0 command Layer 2 Execute Y1 command Layer 3 Change Window Layer 4 Components following Y 2 will Layer gt be bypassed Layer 6 259 Chapter 6 Components Note Book 6 39 Notebook Component PLC Parts The Notebook Component is like the Notebook Program in the Windows Operating System The user can input text contents in the component area Operations such as Copy Cut and Paste are supported These functions are implemented by adding Function Key components The Notebook Only functions of the Function Key are listed in the following figures Function Key Component Attribute Function Key Enable Addr Tag Graphics Position C Switch Window Change Te m Keyboard Func t Message Board ren Magnify Multiple Print Page 1 m
145. and will get lost after power failure of the HMI Do not write recordable messages on the message board E Function Key 6 29 Function Key Component Function Parts The Function Key component can be used to change screen display input digital or ASCII character maximize or minimize window move window design message board or print gt Procedure to add a Function Key component 1 Click the Function Key icon and drag it to the Configuration Edit window and the Function Key Component Attribute dialog box appears Click the Function Key tab to set the various functions and behaviors of the function key component These functions are Switch Window Keyboard Function Message Board and Print The details about these functions are discussed below _ Function Key Component Attribute Function Key Enable Addr Tag Graphics Position Change 0O FrameO a Keyboard Func Ente a TouchCalibrate D Hon mport Proj ect To HMI C Message Board 0 Print Color fo pas Maonify Multiple Print Fage p E e eo m 2 The Enable Address tab is reserved for special usage don t change the default setting here before contacting a Kaspro Group Technician Go to the Tag tab Select use tags and input the proper tag for the function key Go to the Graphics tab Select Vector Graph or bitmap to display states 223 Chapter 6 Components 5 Click OK and adjust the position and size of the Function Key
146. apter 3 Description of the KA Software Software HMI Simulation HMI Station HMI Information Simulation Serial Port HMI COMO HMI COM Show Information Simulation Type HULL pkg File Fath FULL Communication Type TEs Select an HMI to be simulated click Simulate to start simulation A Note 1 The CASTOR panels can perform indirect online simulation via the Ethernet USB or serial port 2 The GEMINI GALAXY panels can perform indirect online simulation via the USB or serial port 3 9 Download After a project is compiled it can be downloaded to the touch panel for actual operation The CASTOR panels provide three download methods USB Ethernet and serial port The GEMINI GALAXY panels provide two download modes USB and serial port Downloading via Ethernet is the fastest way while downloading via the serial port and USB is a bit slower Before download upload the user must set the communication parameters first Set the communication parameters by going to the Tools menu in the menu bar and then select the Download Way submenu as shown in the following figure 66 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Tools T Option O Window W Help H Compile C Compile AIR Clear Build Result E Download D DownLoad wayita Offline Simulation E FS Indirect Online Simulation I Shit F5 Direct Online Simulation HY Ctrl F5S System Manager G HMI Version Manager Upload Manage
147. ar in window 0 Set the Moving Step and Moving Rate parameters like the following figure Alarm Bar Position Moving Step Pixel Moving Rate 10 100 ms 4 Add two bit state toggle switches and two bit lamp to control and display the ON OFF state of the LB1 and LB2 The ON OFF state directly triggers the display of alarm messages on the alarm bar 207 Chapter 6 Components 5 Save and compile the project and then perform online offline simulation or downloading The operation effect is shown in the figure below FILBZ is of f LB1 is on LB i Nenu Task Bar Since the LB1 is set to ON and LB2 is set to OFF both alarm conditions are met Both alarm s information is displayed on the defined alarm bar area The colors are different for each alarms making them easier to be distinguished from each other EJ Oscillograph 6 25 Oscilloscope Component The Oscilloscope component has similar functions with the Trend Graph component The difference is that when the current window containing the trend graph closes the background data 208 Chapter 6 Components acquisition continues therefore when a user switches back to the trend graph at any time the user can obtain the sampling information before the switchover However the data acquisition of the oscilloscope is only valid on the current page in other words after each switchover the system will not sample oscilloscope data and the data will get
148. ask Bar Press the button to close the window Nenu Task Bar gt Adding an Indirect Window 1 Click the indirect window component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the component attribute dialog box appears 7 2 Chapter 6 Components Indirect Window Com ponent Attribute Basic Attribute Position Prionty Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC HMI HMIO Addr Type LW Add 0 Addr Type LW Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN Word E Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address The address of PLC word register designated to store direct window No When the register value changes the window designated by the changed value will pop up For example if the value changes to 20 window 20 will appear the window must be a created window If the value changes to 0 the window closes Address Type The address type must be properly set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Address The word register address corresponding to the indirect window Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words The default value is 1 for input address Use Address Label Whether to use the address entered in the address label For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the Indirect Window component Click OK and adjust the position and size of the Indirect Window component The size of the Indirec
149. assword Display only for any reading value This is used for password input Scaling and decimal point are disabled 151 Chapter 6 Components Input Component Attribute Basic Attribute Numeric Data Enable Address Font Graphics Position Data Type password Width Integer 10 Decimal ETTE limit calor Lowlimit color Minval 1 Mar val 4294967729 ai O Variable Max Bc L PLC 0 T fasi E Addr T Fron Min Value 0 mr J Max Value 4754967295 5 Single float Data from the controller register is translated from a 32 bit IEEE Floating Point format to a decimal number and displayed 6 Double float Data from the controller is translated from a 64 bit IEEE Floating Point format to a decimal number and displayed When input data the Input Min and Input Max limit the range of valid input data and Engineering Max and Engineering Min limit the range of valid input data if Project Engineering Data Conversion is selected If Proportion Conversion Engineering Data Conversion is selected the value written to the PLC Input data Engineering Min x Input Max Input Min Engineering Max Engineering Min Input Min Single Float format 32 bits X X I SOTO ex 8x0 152 Chapter 6 Components ero x00 s 0 e 255 f 0 Positive infinity s 0 or 1 e 255 f 0 Invalid number Double Float format 64 bits 0 lt e lt 2047 1 8 x 271023 x 44
150. ate Setting component is maximized window Max the corresponding PLC bit register is turned ON When the window containing this Bit State Setting component is maximized window Max the corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF When the window containing this Bit State Setting component is minimized window Min the corresponding PLC bit register s is turned ON Set OFF at When the window containing this Bit State Setting component is minimized window Min the corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF set ON while When the window containing this Bit State Setting component is being back light OFF displayed and the back light is OFF the corresponding PLC bit register is turned ON set OFF while When the window containing this Bit State Setting component is being back light OFF displayed and the back light is OFF the corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF Set ON at When a numeric input component has conducted a successful input operation successful input in the window containing this Bit State Setting component the corresponding PLC bit register is turned ON Set OFF at When a numeric input component has conducted a successful input operation successful input in the window containing this Bit State Setting component the corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF 3 Go to the Tag tab Fill in text to denote states 4 Go to the Graphics tab Select a Vector Graph or bitmap to indicate the touch area an
151. basic ASCIl Qwerty keyboard is window 4 They are automatically included in the project after creation and cannot be deleted After creating the project the window shown in the edit area is window 0 use 4 1 Frame gt blank area of a window will invoke the Window Attribute dialog box of that window Shift to to change the window shown in the edit area Double clicking in the window 2 the default Fast Selection window and double click to show the Window Attribute dialog box There you can see that the window is 100 pixels wide and 220 pixels high with a frame of the width of 5 pixels Click i to add a new window into the project the new window will be designated window 5 Open the window attribute dialog box to set the size of window 5 the same as window 2 and add the same kind of frame Add two more windows window 6 and window 7 Window 6 will be used as a Basic window and window 7 will be a Pop up window Change the size of window 7 to 200 pixels wide and 150 pixels high 3 Place three Function keys on window 2 make one Change Basic Window the change to can to Basic window 0 and add another to change to Basic window 4 Add a Change Fast Selection Window Function key that can switch the current Fast Selection window from window 2 to window 5 Add tags for these Function keys for indicating to the operator the function they will perform when pressed the finished window 2 is shown as below 226 Chapter 6 Components Fast Se
152. ble parts such as bit state setting function keys and so on defined in the bottom window are also valid in the current window The common window is also displayed with all parts of it valid if it has been invoked by taskbar button The maxim number of windows in a project is 65535 including all three types of windows A project can only have one fast selection window however the function key Change Fast Selection Window can be used to switch over to another window and assign that one to be the current fast selection window For details please refer to Section 6 29 Function Key After creating a new blank project there is a default start window Normally this window is numbered 0 to change the number please change it in the HMI Properties dialog box in the project edit window In general a project contains multiple windows The valid window number ranges from 0 to 65535 By default Window 1 and Window 2 are the common window and fast selection window of a project respectively To change the default fast selection window and common window double click the HMI to modify the Touch Screen Extended Properties as shown in the following figure 82 Chapter 4 Windows HMI Attribution Frint Setting Serial Fort O Setting Serial Fort 1 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribution ScreenProtect Public Win Attribution Display below the basic windoy TextLab Lan 4 gt Pop Window Attribution Display on the top laye
153. brary refer to Section 6 33 in Chapter 6 Picture Ly This icon can be used to add pictures when creating bitmaps For related content refer to Section 5 6 Bitmap Switch page Toolbar Add Window Bio Q 100 Zoom Out Previous Window Fa Zoom In Current Window ext Window Add Window Adds a configuration window Previous Page Goes to the previous configuration window Current Page Shows the current configuration window Next Page Goes to the next configuration window Zoom in Zooms in the current window Zoom Multiple 100 200 and 300 are optional Zoom out Zooms out the current window Line style toolbar 49 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software 1 Pound D amp O O amp O Gg 8 Pounds 2 Pounds 7 Pounds 3 Pounds 6 Pounds 4 Pounds 5 Pounds It is used to select the line width the number indicates the pounds of the line width System toolbar lta ete T Compile neverse compile Download ea Direct on line Simulation Off line Simulatio ndirect on line Simulation Compile Compiles the current project and checks whether there is any error Projects have to be compiled before download or simulation or the download and simulation tools are disabled grayed out Download Downloads a project to the HMI panel Offline Simulation Used for offline simulation of a project Indirect Online Simulation Used
154. c Event Print Setting Min Saver win O Fram Pub Win Attr Display below the basic wir W Use orgwin if screen saver ends Pop Win Atr Display on the top layer I Back light energy save 10 Min Iv Upload Open backlight if alarming M Uncompile Key 888885 Int Window 0O Frame OLevel Key o86666 l Public Window 4 Common Vi 1 Level Key 1111 Fassel Win 2 Fast Sele 2 Level Key FileList Win 0 FrameD Text Lib lang The register LW9042 is reserved by the system to display the security level of the current base window We can only read the reserved register LW9042 but cannot write in the LW9042 Create a numeric display component and place it in window O to display the current security level as shown below I P Display Component Attribute Basic Attribute Numeric Data Font ics Position Priority Normal Read Address White Address HMI HMIO 0 HMI HMI Addr Type LW Addr S042 Addr Type LWW Code Type BIN Format DDODDD Code Type BIN WordNo 1 Use Addr Tag WordNo Addr Tag The whole project is shown in the following figure Window 0O NDO Current level 325 Chapter 12 Security Level Save it to the disk compile and then run in offline simulation mode as shown in the figure below inate elim Nenu Task Bar Because no password is entered the current security level must be O when the project runs
155. cannot be corrected Upon detection of an error it will request for retransmission However since it is easy to implement it is widely applied To implement communication between two parties the settings of data bit start bit stop bit bits per second and parity check for serial ports of both parties must be set to be the same The Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy and most PLCs support only asynchronous transfer mode Our description is also based on asynchronous transfer mode If you are interested in synchronous transfer mode please refer to related documents Certainly entity interfaces are required as transmission media to send or receive data in asynchronous transfer mode This is the difference between RS 232 RS 422 and RS 485 as detailed respectively below 13 2 RS 232 Presently RS 232 is the most widely applied serial interface in the PC and communication industry RS 232 is defined as a single ended standard to extend communication distance in low rate serial communication RS 232 adopts an Unbalanced Data Transmission UDT interface under which the voltage of a single cable relative to a grounding signal cable is used to indicate the logic status Mark or Space A typical connection method is shown as follows 338 Chapter 13 Serial Communication The Pinout of a typical RS 232 interface PC Compatible is shown as follows Carrier Detect CD ef Received Data RD Data receiving signal cab
156. cation Set Download Operate Communication Type 5 ernal port Save in galay56 demo hame HME image Li sound tar temp vg galaxy56 demo Date modified File name Save as type User Data Files pkg 336 Chapter 12 Security Level Chapter 13 Serial Communication 13 1 Serial Communication Serial communication means the bit by bit transfer between different equipment through two data signal cables Sometimes a control line is required Each data bit occupies a fixed time length This communication mode uses less data cables and features low cost The following is the data frame of a byte in asynchronous communications mode consisting of start bit data parity bit and stop bit 5 V A Space te th a 7 eC E a ES BV OV 3 V E a gee eee A EE NE Mrk D JEP ESS y St i ss Bary O00 8 In general logic 1 MARK 3V 15V logic 0 SPACE 3 15V and each data frame 7 or 8 bits consists of a high voltage start bit a low voltage stop bit and a parity bit The Bits Per Second Baud rate of data usually consists of 9600 Bit S 19200 Bit S 38400 Bit S or 115200Bit S During transmission of serial data an error may occur due to interference For example the bits for the character E during transmission are 0100 0101 45H However due to interference the bit may change to 1 In this case we call it a bi
157. celerate TMO SwDO SWDI Run the macro and perform offline simulation The ball moves in the screen Adjust the speed at different directions and its moving track and speed change We can see from this example that to implement the continuous change of a certain register the repeated revocation of macro instructions must be used and the read and write variables for the register to be used must be defined Example 2 Domino In this example we use a macro template to trigger the next macro template to implement a sequential operation In this way a sequence of dominoes will fall down or stand up in sequence Firstly draw the shape of a domino that is Vector Graph in two states one vertical rectangle and one horizontal rectangle and name the shape as BRICK VG as shown below stateD statel P Make six lamp components with their addresses as LB1 6 respectively Use the Vector Graph BRICK VG The configuration is shown in the figure below SECESE 303 Chapter 9 Macro Code Make six timer components to be triggered by registers with the triggering addresses as LB100 LB105 respectively Taking LB100 for example the timer setting is as follows Select for Trigger Mode Triggered by register state for Response State ON and for Response Mode Execute immediately for Repeat Times 1 Since it is triggered once and immediately it is not necessary to pay attention to execution cycle
158. ch PLC and modify it to be the corresponding PLC station No as shown in the figure below station numbers of the Siemens S7 200 PLCs are respectively 0 and 2 while the station numbers of the MODBUS RTU PLCs are respectively 1 2 and 3 4 Setting of PLC components Select corresponding PLC number 438 Chapter 17 Networking of Castor Series Touch Screens _PlCTe a a Siemens 57 200 PLCO0 Siemens 57 200 Modbus ATU 17 1 3 Networking of Multiple Touch Screens with One PLC A Caution 1 Different types of touch screens can be connected with each other 2 Different touch screens are connected with each other through the Ethernet As shown in the figure below select and drag an Ethernet cable from Connector Ethern Connect the Ethernet cable to the Net interface of the touch screen and connect two touch screens together in this way 439 Chapter 17 Networking of Castor Series Touch Screens AbeAlT Drag another Ethernet cable from Connector and connect it to the Net interface of a touch screen In this way three touch screens are connected as shown in the figure below oleae COMI CoMo Connect the PLC with the corresponding touch screen as shown in the figure below 440 Chapter 17 Networking of Castor Series Touch Screens PS se Siemens 57 00 HBA A Caution Edit configuration only on the touch screen connected with the PLC When editing
159. ck and White ren rl M lti lor E Text Magnify Multiple 10 Indicator Print Page Trend Graphics All Bitme Curent paper si All VectorGraph Replace Paper f Background Printer Color The user can select Black And White or Color Magnify Multiple Zoom The value range is 1 0 2 0 Page Range Current Page or Next Page Select the page to be printed Horizontal or Vertical Landscape or Portrait Select the print mode Print Content 1 Print text 2 Print Indicator 3 Print Trend Graphics 4 Print all Bitmaps 5 Print all Vector Graphs 6 Print Background Color A Caution When you select the Next Page option in the Page Range frame the printer will Skip the current page and start printing from the next page The Print Function key can be used to print screen data conveniently The data is output from the standard printer port as graphics 308 Chapter 10 Print 10 2 Screen Hard Copy Function Project Database PLC Control Component The Screen Hard Copy function uses a bit address to control the printout of the current screen The printout of the current screen starts when the bit address changes from OFF to ON PLE Control Triggered HMI Hl HMD PLE Mo D Addr Type LE Address 0 Code Type BIN Format DODOD word Len 1 Use Address Tag Control Type Macro ID Execute Method Of lt s OFF Open Address Tag Library Cancel As shown in the above figure if LBO is set to cont
160. click Open to download the logo file ki Sc x5 Communication Set X Download Operat D EO _ Communication Type Net Look in J galaxy56 demo ey Ev 6 Upload Operate p 255 255 255 Name Date modified Type Size X HMI image eo Serial NO NULL J sound Sitar J temp Jw JE Get Version Download Section Uncompile Operate Download User Data Download Recipe Download LOGO LOGO Show Set Determine whether the logo will be displayed during the power on of the panel Changes will take effect after restarting the panel Select Show logo and restart the panel the logo will be displayed during power on select UnShow logo and restart the panel you will not see the logo during power on 424 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for KA Manager Communication Set Communication Type Network IF e T PORT 21845 Download Section LOGO Show Set Uncompile Operate Download User Data Show LOGO Download Recipe UnShow LOGO Download LOGO Communication Set ES Download Operate Communication Type Network IP 255 255 255 255 PORT 21845 Get Version Download Section LOGO Show Set Download User Data O Show LOGO Download Recipe UnShow LOGO Download LOGO Upload Operate lt lt BACK MEST gt gt Exit If the download setting fails an error message dialog box appears Then modify the settings of the communication parameters again 42
161. creen Width Height A pop up window supports the setting of width and height smaller than the size of the screen of course However a basic window should be set to the default size that is the full screen size Print Page Indicate whether the window is used as the print window For more information about printing refer to chapter 10 Video Page Indicate whether to set the window as a video window Only the Castor 121 and Castor 151 have the video function Use Background Fill Effect To fill the background of window with patterns or colors check this option Fill Color and Background Color Select according to the fill style used for the description of the fill effect toolbar please refer to Chapter 3 The selected fill color is the impression color and the background color is the fill pattern color Fill style O is used by default that is a pure color In this case only the fill color is displayed Pop up Window Type Track Monopoly Truncate and Coherence These parameter types indicate the relationship between a pop up window and its adjacent window If a window has the property of Monopoly before the window appears its father window 84 Chapter 4 Windows will be frozen and the pop up window will be displayed in the topmost layer all the time If a window has the property of Truncate the frame of the window is restricted by its father window that is to say the part displayed outside the frame of its father
162. cstscctbesscecccctsceuceesdccostesssisivascecasecuenuscdoactienccdesisasdenseieuseestesees 263 Ta OWS REEN e cre aces screen pe ne tet N E E E A E 263 FA TASK AR oasis n Seo E AE E geste ew eeee ten a E 264 7 3 TOUCH SCREEN EXTENDED PROPERTIES ccccccsssccsssccesseccesseceseeeseseeeesseceessecesaeeccseecesseseeeaesenaes 266 LA PRNTOETHNGS ee ee ne ee re ee 270 Eo CON ETHNO art eee cg gee eo mgt wsee ese ns ctns nts ose a tise cateeprenpea dae reese eae 271 FO TU STON IN cscs E eee et ees ad oe eens ecnae eee 274 CHAPTERS mk Oe ad ong Bf eer ne rn re ne Ore ee rene err eco ammo arer ene 275 8 1 CREATING A RECIPE DATA TRANSMISSION COMPONENT cccsssccessccessscessscceeseeeessesesseeeesseeeeses 275 9 2 RECIPE MEMORY soeieesseeieein eie E EER 276 8 3 UPLOADING DOWNLOADING OF RECIPE DATA BETWEEN TOUCH SCREEN AND PLLC 283 CHAPTER 9 MACRO sissioni aa E a a Ti 291 9 1 QUICK START A SIMPLE MACRO TEMPLATE s ccsssssecessssceessceeessesecesseeecessaeecssesessssesessnaeeeess 291 9 2 OPERATING PRINCIPLES OF MACRO TEMPLATE AD READ WRITE VARIABLE cccsccceeseeeeees 296 9 3 TRIGGERING OF MACRO 0 cccccssccesscessscessssecesssecsscsessseecssaecenseecesaecessscssaeecssaseesaeseaeassessaesesaeeesaes 298 9A EXAMPLES oin ea e E EEE E EAE 300 CHAPTER 10 PRINT e E 307 10 1 THING TION KEY aerorose sateen canst TEE EEEE Epai 308 10 2 ORS IN RUIN IR cereri or asisan eee sae aapteceeseeunePeceeeneceadeunabeeeseaeensceeee
163. ct Set Top Layer and Set Bottom Layer in the Layer submenu in the Edit menu to change the layer sequence of the components First select a component and then click the related icon to set the component to the expected layer The components on the top layer are always displayed above the components on the layers below Top Group Ungroup This function can be used to group multiple selected components or shapes so that they can be used as a single component To group multiple components select these components and then select Group in the Edit menu or click the icon l To ungroup select the grouped entity and 36 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software l then select Ungroup in the Edit menu or click the icon i Equal horizontal space This function can be used to implement the equal horizontal space between multiple selected components and shapes First select a shape or component to be operated and then select Equal Horizontal Space in the Edit menu or click the icon 54 The effect is as follows Equal vertical space This function can be used to implement the equal vertical space between multiple selected components and shapes First select a shape or component to be operated and then select Equal Vertical Space in the Edit menu or click the icon aay Horizontal center This function is used to place multiple selected components or shapes in the horizontal center positio
164. ct edit state and other status information 3 1 4 Tools Menu As shown in the following figure for the contents of the Tools menu please refer to related descriptions in Sections 3 5 3 7 3 8 and 3 9 LibrarviD Window HelpiH Compiletc Cbrl FF Download D Ctrl D Offline Simulation F FS Indirect Online Simulation Shift FS Direct Online Simulationg M Chrl F5 Options o Olt F 3 1 5 Project Database As shown in the following figure the Library menu provides eight items For the details refer to related descriptions in Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 52 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software LibrarviD Window wti HelptH Text LabrarytT Address TagtB Alarm Information Lagan 4 Event Information Lagon E PLC ControliPs New Graphicsta Import Graphics LabraryiTi Macrocode Mi 3 1 6 Window Click Window in the main menu bar and the following dropdown menu appears The functions Cascade Arrange Icons Tile Horizontally and Tile Vertically are used as follows Cascade is used to display windows in a cascade sequence Arrange Icons is used to arrange various icons Tile Horizontally is used to display a window in the Horizontal tile mode and Tile Vertical is used to display a window in Vertical tile mode Window Wh HelptH Cascade Range Icon Tile Horizontally Tile Vertically The Tile Horizontal window is shown as follow
165. ct 4 in this example Frame Color Foreground Color Background Color Select your desirable color 4 Adjust the Note Pad to an appropriate size as shown below fh Message Board 5 Add some function keys to the left and lower part of the message board Select Function keys FKO FK1 FK2 and FK3 respectively for Pen Eraser Clear Block and Clear Screen functions Select FK4 FK5 and FK6 respectively for the Pen Color of red green and blue Select FK7 FK8 FK9 and FK10 respectively for the Brush Width of 2 4 6 and 8 as shown below 221 Chapter 6 Components After setting these options save and compile the project perform online offline simulation or downloading The operation effect is shown in the figure below enu Task Bar LB9020 LB9022 are reserved by the system to control and identify whether the brush eraser and block cleanout functions are selected LB9030 LB9032 are used to set the pen width LB9006 is used to set message board operation mode LW9007 is used to set the brush thickness LW9008 can select any one color for the brush among all 256 colors For details refer to related parts in Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System 222 Chapter 6 Components Note 1 Each HMI panel can use only one message board component If there are several message boards the contents must be consistent as they share the same storage area 2 Data in the message board will not be saved
166. ct Logic series RS 232 interface 6 pin RJ 11 female Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 connector Note Port amp Port2 of the DLOS series Port1 amp Port2 of the DL240 series Port1 of the DL250 series Port1 of the DL350 series and Port2 of the DL450 series are all RJ 12 hardware interfaces The wiring method for them is the same as that shown in the above figure Please note that the address of some ports is 1 invariably but the address of some other ports has to be set Make sure the communication protocol of the port is set to K sequence Pin assignment of RJ 11 6 pin Female Connector 2 CPU DL250 CPU Port2 RS232 Kaspro KOYO PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy DL250 CPU touch screen RS 232 port2 COMO COM1 15 pin SVGA female 366 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs connector Note Port2 of the DL250 CPU combines RS 232 electrical interface and RS 422 electrical interface Please pay attention to the setting of the type during use bd 6 D I gt 4 Da E Pin Array of 15 pin SVGA D SUB Female Connector 3 CPU DL250 CPU Port2 RS422 KOYO PLC Kaspro P DL250 CPU CASTOR Gemini Galaxy RS 422 port2 touch screen 15 pin SVGA female COMO COM1 connector Note Port2 of the DL250 CPU combines RS 232 electrical interface and RS 422 electrical 367 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs interface Pl
167. d The procedure of creating and editing a bg file is shown below 1 Select New Graphics in the Library menu or click the I icon on the toolbar the following dialog box appears State Bitmap Width f Vector Graphics Hei ght File Hame el textitext_Olivz Description 2 Select Bitmap for Type enter the number of states and name of the bg click Create lt UU 108 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE The user can add additional states to an existing bg file The procedure is described as follows Double click the bg file you want to add a state to in the Project file window After entering the editing mode click the editing area below the states prKaspro window the icon for adding new states will be activated Click the icon a new state will appear after the current last state in the states prKaspro window The latest added state will be selected and ready for editing oo ARNE ESA a state 3 Click thel icon in the Drawing Toolbar find the image you want to import and click to 109 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE open it For bitmap graphics you can only import a picture other editing operations such as line drawing tools and other similar tools are disabled as shown in the following figures BIS cree ee E 2 m 2 OO i 4 i ll ill KASPRO GROUP logos EVIL bmp gif jpg Click Save and close the bitmap editing wind
168. d B e e e e A keypad is composed of a variety of function keys with different ASCII codes 0 1 2 and a b c and special keys such as Enter BS ESC and CLR etc Since any character can be assigned to a function key specialized keypads can be made for any application Keypads are used with the Numeric Input or Text Input components to enter numeric values Create a keypad for numeric input component 1 Create a new window place function key components used for input the numbers and characters 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ENT BS CLR as shown below 4 z 6 CLR i i 9 ESC Set the FK_0 for input digit 1 as follows 232 Chapter 6 Components Function Key Enable Addr Tag Switch Window Change 0 FrameO Keyboard Func ASC i yboard Disable TouchCalibrate Import Export Import Project To HMI ft Pat Color f Black and Whi Multicolor Magnify Multiple 1 0 Print Page f Curent paper Horizontal m mia fa fn faia Replace Paper Wertical Set other function keys FK_1 FK_14 as follows Other characters 2 9 0 ENT CLR BS Put a Number Input component in window 0 and set the necessary parameters see relative sections for details Save and compile the project start the off line simulation When the Numeric Input component is activated the Function keys FK_O F
169. d controls the position along the predefined path As the PLC position register changes value the Vector Graph or bitmap jumps to the next position along the path ANID 0 d Q Nes gt 3 Predetermined path 2 Graphics is roaming on the predefined path when read address 1 0 1 2 3 4 gt Adding an Animation component 1 Click the Animation icon 2 Click on screen to define the path and the moving nodes for the object to travel click on each moving node one by one to set the path and then right click to complete end the setup of path 3 Double click on the animation component and the following dialog box appears Fill in the Basic Attribute tab 143 Chapter 6 Components Animation Component Attribute Basic Attribute Animation Tag Graphics Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC HMI HMIO PLC Add Type LW Addr O Addr Type LW Addr Code Type BIN Format DODDO Code Type BIN WordNo 2 Use Addr Tag WordNo Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address Read Address The word address that controls the state and label of the Animation component in the PLC Read Address 1 is the word register address that controls the position of the Animation component Data in the register may be interpreted as either BIN or BCD format refer to the Multi State Display component The No of Words is restricted to 2 Address Type The address type must be properl
170. d PLC communication parameters are correctly configured Macro Code Error xxxx macro No Programming error with macros so it encounters infinite loop or execution timeout Please check the programming code of the macro The number following is the macro number System error System error an internal error with the touch screen Print error Print error not connected with the printer or print error Server Error Server error 446 Editorial Notes Appendix II Troubleshooting The following is the method for removing the PLC no response and PLC response error fault The flow chart is shown below PLC no response Y4 Check whether PLC type is N correct Whether System Parameters gt PLC Type setting is correct Check whether the connection is N Refer to Chapter 14 correct Check baud rate parity bit data bit stop bit RS 232 or RS 485 refer to Chapter 14 Check whether PLC station No is correct Refer to Chapter 14 Check whether PLC address type and range are correct N Refer to the contents related to PLCAddressView Check whether PLC address Supports write operation Refer to related PLC data Y 4 PLC response error Y4 N Whether System Parameters gt PLC Type setting is correct 447 Check whether PLC type is correct Editorial Notes N Whether System Parameters gt PLC Type setting is correct Check whether PLC address type and ran
171. d software by looking on your computer on the hardware installation CD or on the Windows Update Web site with your permission Read our privacy policy Can Windows connect to Windows Update to search for software Yes this time only Yes now and every time connect a device No not this time Click Next to continue 68 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software 1 Found New Hardware Wizard This wizard helps you install software for EA SOFT USE Ce f your hardware came with an installation CD or floppy disk insert it now What do you want the wizard to do Install the software automatically Recommended T Install from a list or specific location Advanced gt Click Next to continue Please choose your search and installation options a5 Search for the best driver in these locations Use the check boses below bo lint or expand the default search which includes local paths and removable media The best driwer found will be installed Search removable media floppy CD ROM Include this location in the search C Program Files KASPRO ENU V1 4 4driver a gt Don t s rer T ote fe tat a P Choose the dri Select the Folder that contains drivers For your hardware guarantee that b Java C JoshMadisan C KASPRO_EMNU 1 4 C bga wa ib C cygwin C disk LO driver IUI To view any subfolders click a plus
172. d touch status whether this component is pressed or not 5 Go to the Position tab and adjust the position and size of the bit setting component if necessary 5 Click OK to complete the setting of the bit setting component a Bit state 6 3 itch Bit State Switch Component PLC Parts The switch is a combination of Indicator Lamp and Bit Setting components It indicates the ON OFF status of a PLC bit register and defines a touch area that when activated may change the status of a designated bit register The input address and the output address can be the same or different gt Adding a Bit State Switch component 125 Chapter 6 Components 1 Click the Bit State Switch icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the Component Attribute dialog box appears Bit State Switch Cor ponent Attribute Basic Attribute Bit State Switch Tag Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC HMI HMO PLC 0 Addr Type LE Addr 0 Addr Type LB Addr 0 Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN ei ia WordNo 1 Use Addr Tag WordNo 1 Use Addr Description Priority Reserved function not used now gt Input Address Bit address of the PLC register that controls the Bit State Switch state shape and label information gt Output Address Bit address of the PLC register whose ON or OFF state is controlled by the switch Address Type The address typ
173. data will not be discarded Previous data will be saved to the memory for future reference Please note that a maximum of 31 pages of historical data are available which is determined by the No of Pages parameter Attribute Start from left or start from right In other words it determines whether the oscillograph is displayed from the left to right or from the right to left wnen displaying sampling data Sampling Time Time interval between two sampling points in seconds Sampling Ratio When selecting values other than 1 for this parameter the Oscilloscope will read the multiple groups of data at a time and display them For example if the input address is LW10 number of channels set to 3 and sampling ratio set to 2 the Oscilloscope component actually read data from 6 registers LW10 LW15 at a reading operation The six registers form 2 groups group 1 is composed of LW10 LW11 and LW 12 while group 2 covers the other three When the sampling time is 1 second it will read these two groups of data in 210 Chapter 6 Components each second It is required that the PLC should prepare these two groups of data in advance at a sampling speed of 0 5S and store them in the corresponding addresses The Oscilloscope can read display two 0 5S data at the same time in one second so as to display the curve effect of the 0 5S sampling cycle Save Time If this check box is selected the Time box in the Control Address frame is available Sampl
174. ddress output PLC number type of output address and output address Double clicking an entry will lead to the configuration frame where the component is 3 7 Offline Simulation The KA SOFTWARE provides an offline simulation function During offline simulation the program does not acquire data from the PLC data will be read from the local address Therefore all data displayed on the configuration windows are static data With the offline simulation the user can conveniently test the configuration without the need to download the program to the touch screen every time Therefore valuable development time is saved Select Offline Simulation in the Tools menu or click the icon the following dialog box appears 63 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software r T Zal KASimulator a HMI Simulation Simulate Simulation Serial Port HMI Port PC Port HMI Port PC Port HMI Port PC Port COMO COMI COM1 COM1 COM2 COM Show Information Simulation Type Offline Simulation File Path pkg c program files kaspro_enu_ 1 4 project test test pkg Communication Type NULL IP NULL PORT NULL COM NULL BPS NULL Select an HMI to be simulated and click Simulate the offline simulation screen of the selected HMI panel appears 3 8 Online Simulation The KA SOFTWARE provides online simulation operation With the online simulator a project can be simulated on the PC and the configurati
175. de Type BIN WordMo A D Use Addr Tag WordNa Use Addr Tag Description The name of the Recipe Datal 285 Chapter 8 Recipe Data omponent Attribute Basic Attribute Numere Data Enable Address Font Graphics Position Prionty Monmnal Read Address Write Address HMI HMIO PLC o HMI HMIO PLC Addr Type 4X Addr Addr Type LW Addr Code Type BIN Foma DDDDD Code Type BIN Word o 7 Use Addr Tag WordNo Description Create two Recipe Data Transmission components one is for downloading recipe data and the other is for uploading recipe data The address for both of them is 4x100 Basic Attribute Recipe Data Tag Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address e Write Address HMI HMIO PLC 0 HMI HMIO PLC 0 Addr Type LWV Addr 0 Addr Type 4X Addr 100 Code Type BIN Code Type BIN Fomat DDDDD Description REP 1 In addition we have to design two buttons to enable a user to query and modify each group of recipe data conveniently One button is to query previous data and the other is to query the next data Use the Multiple State Setting component Each time when you press this button the system will deduct 5 from the value of LW9000 because each group of recipe data consists of five words Press this button once and the RWIO can display the data of the previous recipe as shown in the figures below 28
176. des will let you easily implement more robust and powerful functions Presently the KA SOFTWARE supports the following macro triggering modes 1 System initialization macro Select the Initialization Macro check box in the HMI Extended Attribute tab shown in the following window The initialization macro will be triggered upon system startup to implement such functions as setting initial values of registers and transferring recipes 298 Backlight energy save 0 Min Chapter 9 Macro Code Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Screensaver 0 Min Saver win O Frar Pub Win Attr Display below the basic wir Pop Win Attr Display on the top layer X M Upload Key 888888 alaming V Uncompile Key 888888 O Frame0 OLevelKey 888888 Public Window 4Common yi 1Level Key 888888 Fast Seleci 2 Level Key 888888 0 Frame Textliblang 4 Deflang 2 Function key triggered macro Use the Execute Macrocode function of the function key to trigger macros which is a common triggering mode 3 Timer Triggered macro Use the Execute Macrocode function of the timer to trigger macros The macro can be combined with the timer trigger to implement multiple triggering modes of Register triggering Timer triggering and Window initialization triggering 4 PLC Control macro Set the PLC Control component a
177. destination register Data Type Select to transfer data of bit or word type Data Transfer Length Length of the data to be transferred number of the bits or words 236 Chapter 6 Components Timer Timer Function Position e Data Transfer Set Mode Source Destination HMI HMI HMI HMI PLC No 0 PLCONo 0 Set value HMI HMil1 Data Type Bit PLEO Nos O0 Word Len l LE a i LE ae Addr Type Addr Type Akk Type 1B 7 Value 0 Address 0 Address 0 CodeType BIN CodeType BIN Miklos O ddr Tag CodeType BIN bane t Daolon PA Address 0 3 Set Status Set specific register value when the timing time arrives Set Address address of destination register to be set when the timing time arrives a Set the bit register Set Mode Set value or Periodic Toggle as shown in the figure below Timer Timer Function Position C Execute Macro Data Transfer 7 Source Destination HMI HMIO HMI HMO PLCNo 0 PLCNo 0 z HMI PLE No 0 Addr Type LB gt pe LB Addr Type Addr Type AddrType LB Address Address CodeType EIN CodeType PIN Addr Tag E Addr Tag E Code Type BIN Address 0 Data Type Sit Datalen Detailed description of different functions is as shown in the table below Set Value Set the designated bit register to 0 or 1 when the timing time arrives 2
178. disconnection between the transmission driver and the transmission line When the Enable end is active the transmission driver is in a high impedance State that is the third state a state different from the logic 1 and logic 0 as shown in the figure below Chapter 13 Serial Communication Corresponding specifications are made for the receivers AA and BB are connected with balanced twisted pairs between the transmission end and the receiving end When the level between AB at the receiving end is greater than 200 mV it outputs positive logic level when the value is less than 200 mV it outputs positive logic level The level range received by the receiver on the balanced cable is from 200 mV to 6V as shown in the figure below RS 422 standard stands for Electrical Characteristics of Balanced Voltage Digital Interface Circuits which defines the characteristics of the interface circuits The following figure shows a typical 4 wire RS 422 interface In fact it has another signal ground cable and totally 5 cables Since the receiver adopts high input impedance and the transmission driver has high driving capability than RS 232 interface a maximum of 10 receiving nodes can be configured in the same transmission cable Among all these nodes one is the master node and the others are slave nodes Slave nodes cannot communicate with each other Therefore RS 422 interface supports poi
179. dows are attached to the windows which contain the components that invoke those pop ups So pop up windows invoked by components in the common window will exist until the common window components turn them off 4 2 Window Properties To set the window properties double click on the blank area of the window or click the sd icon to show the window properties setting dialog box 83 Chapter 4 Windows Window Attnbution Hindow Safe Level Lowe Special Attribute E Position Use Background Color 2 OO vy oO E width 320 Height 240 Transparence Oe Bottom window 1 Mone ki 3 None Frame Pop Window Type W Tracking Monopoly i F Color eidh seal W Clipping Coherence The descriptions of the window properties are as follows Name A unique name allocated to each window for the convenience of differentiation and remembering The name here can be changed whenever it is necessary to do so Number The valid window number ranges from 0 to 65535 The window number is automatically allocated by the system when a window is created The user cannot change it The window numbers may not be consecutive due to the deleting adding operations Position If a window is a window that appears by use of the function key in Pop up Window the position of the point at the upper left corner of the window will be displayed here The position of the origin point of the screen is 0 0 and the origin point is the upper left corner of the s
180. e Address Label Library appears 250 Chapter 6 Components Name Hmi No PLC No Stati Data Type Address Type Delete DeleteAl Modify 2 Click Add the following small dialog box titled Bulid Address Tag appears Tag Name Hal PLC No Data Type Address Type Address Code Type BIH Format ODOOODD Tag Name Enter the name you wish to assign to the Address label A meaningful name can help the user recognize the purpose of that register It is very useful when selecting address tags from the list HMI Select the HMI panel corresponding to the tag PLC No Select the PLC station number corresponding to the tag Data Type Select whether the tag is a Bit or a Word register Address Type Select the address type corresponding to the tag address types of the registers vary with the type of PLC Address The address of the tag Code The type of code of the data BIN or BCD 251 Chapter 6 Components 3 Enter the proper values for the above parameters click OK and the Address tag entry will appear in the library Temp HID Add Delete Delete Al Modify Using Address tags Select a component open the Component Attribute dialog box check the Use Addr Tag option and select the desired tag in the Addr Type drop down list Basic Attribute Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Fosition Priority Nonmnal Read Address o Write Address HMI H
181. e Alarm Indicator 9016 Printer error It is set to ON in case of a print error and to OFF if printing is indication normal R 9017 Printer control To disable the print function set it to ON to enable the print function set it to OFF In the system parameters all printing options must be set to ON first otherwise this bit address is invalid RAW 9018 Enter screen saver When the system enters screen saver backlight and energy saving the bit is automatically set to 1 when the system exits the screen saver it is set to 0 901 Exit screen saver When the system exits screen saver backlight and energy smurf eb aortas ene en 314 10 11 12 13 15 9 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System enters the screen saver it is set to 0 9020 Brush it is set to ON Message board function determines whether the brush is when the brush _ is currently selected RAW 9021 Eraser it is set to Message board function determines whether the eraser is ON when the eraser currently selected RW is selected 9022 Block Cleanout it isiMessage board function determines whether the clearing set to ON in thelarea function is currently selected R W clearing area status 9030 Brush width is 1 Message board function set brush width to 1 pixel when the 9031 Brush width is 2 Message board function set brush width to 2 pixels when ee ee 9032 Brush width is 3j Message board function set brush width to 3 pixels when
182. e a direct window part with the Address Type set to LB Address to 9069 and Window No to 3 Adjust the width and height of the component to be of the same size as Window 3 Direct Window Component Attnbution Basic Attribution Direct Window Position Priority Normal Output Address HMI Input Address HMI HMIO AUE PLE 0 Addr Code Type BIN FormatDDDDD WordNo hd x HMIO 0 Addr 0 Format DDDDD Addr Type LB Addr Type Code Type BIN v F Use Addr Tag 7 Use Addr Tag Y wordNo 7 Description DWO Direct Window Component Attribution Basic Attribution Direct Window Position Window No 3 Frame3 Sa The entire project is shown as follows 94 Chapter 4 Windows Save compile and perform an offline simulation of the project fenu Task TP 4 Click Number Input part Upon LWO input a keypad appears below the component for you to input After the input the keypad automatically disappears as shown in the following figure 95 Chapter 4 Windows 4 7 Window related Components Function keys directly related to windows include Change Basic Window Return to Previous Window Change Common Window Pop up Window and Change Fast Selection Window Components directly related to windows include Direct windows and indirect windows For the contents of these components refer to related contents in Chapter 6 C
183. e being gt Input Address Bit address of the PLC register that controls the lamp state shape and label information HMI If your project contains more than one HMI panel select which HMI panel the lamp part belongs to in this field PLC Select a PLC If this HMI is connected with more than one PLC select the PLC containing the expected register Address Type Select the address type corresponding to the lamp that is the address type of the register being monitored The address type varies with PLC type Besides the PLC registers you can also use the bit registers within the HMI panel For internal register 119 Chapter 6 Components address of HMI refer to Section 5 4 Please note that some internal addresses of the HMI are reserved by the system Do not use these system reserved addresses For details refer to Chapter 11 Address Bit address corresponding to the lamp Use Address Label Whether to use the address entered in the address label For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the lamp 2 Go to the Bit State Lamp tab Basic Attribute Bit State Lamp Tag Graphics Position value 0 switch Blinking on state Oor 1 value 16 7 value 0 switch Blinking on state O or 1 value 1 Blinking on state 0 value 1 Blinking on state O value 0 Blinking on state 1 value 1 Blinking on state 1 value 0 Blinking on state 1 value 1 switch Blinking on state Oor 1 value 0 Blin
184. e component may not be displayed The state numbers 1 32 correspond to internal register values 0 31 respectively The position is controlled as shown in the table below Position is relative to the original location of the graphic X axis indicates the horizontal axis and Y axis indicates the vertical axis Length of Read Data of Read Data 2words words 2 2words Swords words shame word are State eee State a State an integer between an integer between an integer between Chapter 6 Components pO and 31 0 and 31 0 and Oand31 0 a word Read X displacement Y displacement X siaii Address 1 3 word Read Y displacement Address 2 Moving modes are as follows Moving Component Attribute Basic Attribute Moving Component Tag Graphics Fosition Moving Type X Axis Only MaxValue Y Axis Only AG Y Axis X Scaling Min Value Y Scaling A Reverse Scaling Scale Upper Lil Y Reverse Scaling The moving modes are described as follows When this option is selected the component will move horizontally along the X axis At this time the input X axis only maximum minimum value will be invalid the first register stores component state and the second register stores position When this option is selected the component will move vertically along the Y axis At this time the input maximum Y axis only minimum value will be invalid the first register stores the component state and the second register
185. e must be properly set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Address Input output address of the register corresponding to the switch Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the Bit State Switch component 126 Chapter 6 Components Go to the Bit State Switch tab and set switch types Basic Attribute Bit State Switch Tag Graphics Position Switch Type Switch Types and Functions When the component is pressed touched on the panel the corresponding PLC bit register is turned ON The state will be kept i e remains ON even O being released When the component is pressed touched on the panel the corresponding Oo bit register is turned OFF The state will be kept i e remains OFF even after being released Toggle Every time the component is pressed the corresponding PLC bit register p its current state once ON gt OFF OFF gt ON Only while the component is held down pressed is the specified PLC bit register turned ON Likewise when the switch is released the specified bit register is turned OFF Go to the Tag tab Fill in text to denote states Go to the Graphics tab Select a Vector Graph or bitmap to indicate the bit register states and represent the touch area Go to the Position tab and adjust the position and size of the switch component if nece
186. e range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note LG Master K series PLCs cover independent type and substrate type Where the independent type covers LG Master K 10S1 10S 30S 60S 80S series of CPUs and the substrate type covers LG Master K200S 300S 1000S series of CPUs They all can be connected with the Kaspro touch screen through the communication port on their respective CPUs In addition Master K80S 200S 300S 1000S series of CPUs can be connected through the extended Cnet module Please note that different PLC types must be set in the touch screen software when different PLC CPUs are adopted When Cnet protocol is used pay attention to the setting of communication protocols For setting methods refer to operating instructions provided by LG Industrial Systems 390 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 1 CPU K10S1 K10S K30S K60S K80S K200S K300S K1000S RS232 Kaspro LG Master K PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Master K series CPU touch screen RS 232 interface COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector Note When K10S1 is used the Bits per second in the touch screen software must be set to 9600 When K10S K30S K60S K100S are used the PLC type must be set to LG K60S and the Bits per second to 9600 When K80S K200S K300S K1000S are used the PLC type must be set to LG MASTER K300S CPU and
187. e same as the COM Second 57600 115200 port settings of the PLC l l Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity l i parity none port settings of the PLC PLC Station DEE Must be the same as the COM No port settings of the PLC PLC software setting Set the communication protocol of the COM port to Hostlink Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of OMRON Reference website HT TP oeiweb omron com oei TechManuals PLC htm Operable address range PLC Operable Address Description Type 0 65535 65535 I O and internal VO and intemal relay eae 65535 deities B relay 0 65535 Auxiliary relay OR 0 65535 DDD BB Link relay 345 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 0 255 DDD Timer counter register Note D indicates decimal notation B indicates bit code and the value range is 0 15 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note The CPU of CPM1 CPM1A series does not provide standard serial ports and has to be configured with OMRON CPM1 CIF01 RS232 communication adapters or OMRON CPM1 CIF 11 RS
188. e setting of the HMI attribute setting dialog box including the setting of taskbars extensional attribute printer settings and serial ports settings These parameters are required for correct PLC connection s and other operations Double click the HMI icon in the configuration project window to show the HMI attribute dialog box Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Pot 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attibute Historic Event Print Setting Network Setting Subnet Mask 255 255 Display Setting Screen Display Mode In the dialog box there are six tabs namely HMI Taskbar HMI Extend Properties Historic Event Print Settings Serial Port 0 Setting and Serial Port 1 Setting Note there may be more or less options depending on the HMI model selected as detailed below 7 1 HMI tab Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Network Setting Display Setting Screen Display Mode 263 Chapter 7 System Parameters IP Address Set the IP address of the HMI This IP address is the IP address of the HMI when the Ethernet connection is used IP Address is only valid for models with Ethernet ports such as CASTOR and GALAXY L Port Number Refer to the description in Section 3 9 Display Settings Select the Display Mode Horizontal or Vertical The Display Mode is s
189. e simulation again and the result will be Nenu wk Bar This simple example is complete However this segment of code still has a problem What if the LW1 input is 0 We all Know the number O cannot be a divisor In the C language if a number is divided by O in an operation it will cause the error of division by zero overflow In severe circumstances it may lead to program deadlock or exit The macro will encounter the error of division by zero overflow and affect normal operation of the system What shall we do then We have to check the operand Modify the codes as follows int MacroEntry Judge whether LW1 is 0 preventing division by zero overflow if LW1_R 0 LWO divided by LW1 is LW2 LW2_ W double LWO_R LW1_R return O Run the macro again If the divisor is 0 the macro will not conduct the division operation thus enhancing the robustness of the codes 9 2 Operating Principles of Macro Template and the Read Write Variable As shown in the above section you may gain a preliminary understanding of the creation and use of the macro template In this section we will introduce the operating principles of the macro template and the precautions in the use of the macro template A macro template can be regarded as a black box with input and output Taking the example in the section 9 1 for example the model is as follows 296 Chapter 9 Macro Code Macro Module Read in int Macr
190. e that some internal registers of the HMI are reserved by the system Do not use these registers For details refer to Chapter 11 Address The initial address of the word registers corresponding to the curves in the oscilloscope component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Depends on the number of sampling channels curves If the number of 209 Chapter 6 Components channels is N 1 lt N lt 16 which means there are N curves to be shown the No of Words is N Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 35 Description A reference name not displayed on the runtime screen that you assign to the oscilloscope component 2 Go to the Oscillograph tab to set related parameters Oscillograph ponent Attibute Basic Attribute Oscillograph Channel Position Sam Type Single page Atr Startfrom Let Sam Type Time Sam Ratio 1 Save par 10 PageNum Channel 1 F Control Address HMI PLC Addr Type Address Code Type WordNo 0 BIN 1 Type Single page or multiple pages If the user selects the single page mode it will only display the data change of the sampling values in the current page It does not allow the extension of the oscillograph If the user selects multiple page display it allows the extension of the oscillograph The data is displayed in the same way but when the oscillograph rolls forward the previous sampling
191. e the contrast function of increasing decreasing brightness contrast Upon Used to switch input When the value of LB9100 is 1 the system switches to method in the case Pinyin input method when the value is 0 the system of Pinyin input switches to English input method method Keypad control bit The whole screen of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy is divided into four equal parts as shown below 318 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System Left Top Right Top LB9062 Top lt LB9 80 LB9066 PTE b OF ECL gt On i gi pea Lef LB9064 ci 69068 R ight4LB9664 Bot tom Lef t Bottom R ight LB9063 BottomgLB9081 LB9067 When LB9060 is used to control the keypad and if text input or numeric input in the left part of the screen is triggered the keypad will appear in a Direct window In general the Direct window is designed to appear in the right part of the screen so it will not overlap the Input component in the left Likewise when LB9080 is selected and the Text input or Numeric input in the upper part of the screen is triggered the Direct window including the Designated keypad will appear 11 2 Local Word LW registers reserved Recipe data index RWI and RBI use these two words to store index Ce Cc address R W address for accessing recipe data the lower word is 9000 and the higher word is 9001 R W upper limit of thejlt indicates the maximum input
192. ease pay attention to the setting of the type during use 4 CPU DL430 DL440 DL450 CPUPort0 RS232 Kaspro KOYO PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy DL405 series CPU touch screen RS 232 interfaced COMO COM1 15 pin D SUB female connector FONLINE 4 ONLINE 14 GND 5 CPU DL430 DL440 DL450 CPU Port amp DL350 CPU Port2 RS232 Kaspro KOYO PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy DL305 405 series CPU touch screen RS 232 interface COM0 COM1 25 pin D SUB female connector 368 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 6 CPU DL430 DL440 DL450 CPU Port amp DL350 CPU Port2 RS422 Kaspro KOYO PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy DL305 DL405 series CPU unit touch screen RS 422 interface COM0 COM1 25 pin D SUB female connector 18 RTS 23 CTS 7 CPU DL450 CPU Port3 RS422 KOYO PLC DL405 series CPU unit RS 422 interface3 25 pin D SUB female connector Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO COM1 369 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 8 Data communication unit D2 DCM module of DL205 series D4 DCM module of DL405 series RS232 Kaspro KOYO PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy DL205 405 series DCM unit touch screen RS 232 interface COMO COM1 25 pin D SUB female connector Note Among all PLCs in the DL205 series only DL240 DL250 CPU supports D2 DCM unit All PLCs of the DL405 series support D4 DCM unit Please pay attention to the settings of the DIP switch It must be se
193. ecesscescccsscessccesocesccesscessocssocesceesoe 434 IET NETWORKING assesses tecnica a sec easesanance vate eoteeei aaa tans ieueee Sage oe 434 17 2 MUTUAL DOWNLOAD BETWEEN DIFFERENT TOUCH SCREENG cccsccccesssccessseceessseeeesseeeens 445 APPENDIX I SYSTEM MESSAGES vrsti res ue sai Gee oes 446 GEMINI GALAXY AND CASTOR SYSTEM MESSAGES TABLE ccccccssscesssccesecesseeeceseeeseecesseeeesseeeesees 446 APPENDIX II TROUBLESHOOTING cccssscsssscssssccsssscssssscsssssssssssssesscsssssssssssssssssssesssssssoes 447 KA Software for Gemini Galaxy and Castor Series User Manual Introduction Warranty Statement Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc warrants each product to be free from electrical and mechanical defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of shipment This warranty does not apply to defects in the Products caused by abuse misuse accident casualty alteration negligence repair not authorized by Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc use on current or voltages other than specified by Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc or application or installation not in accordance with published instruction manuals This warranty is in lieu of any other warranty either expressed or implied Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc liability is limited to the repair or replacement of the Product only and not costs of installation removal or damage to user s property or other liabili
194. ed 313 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System The system reserves some areas of Local Word LW Local Bit LB and Recipe Word RW for special purposes The user must use these addresses according to related description Local Bit LB Reserved range LB9000 9999 Local Word LW Reserved range LW9000 9999 Nonvolatile Local Word Reserved range LW10000 10256 11 1 Local Bit LB registers reserved Note The letter R and W indicates the available operation for the address R means readable and W means writable So a register with the mark R W can be read and write Eanes ce 9000 9009 Set ON during These bits can be used to initialize some components to be iiia ON upon system startup RW 90 Recipe download iThe bit address can be used to indicate the download indication progress of the recipe In the process of download it is set WE to ON upon completion of download it is set to OFF R 90 Recipe upload The bit address can be used to indicate the upload progress indication of the recipe In the process of upload it is set to ON upon completion of upload it is set to OFF R 90 Recipe These bit addresses can be used to indicate the download upload download upload progress of the recipe R O pe 90 Touch screen Set it to ON when touching the Touch Screen Indicator R ee eee 90 R Alarm indicator Set it to ON when touching th
195. ed manner Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1or2 COM port settings of the PLC Bits per eons 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the Second 57600 115200 COM port settings of the PLC l Even parity odd Must be the same as the Parity None l l parity none COM port settings of the PLC PLC Station i E Adopt the recommended No value for DF1 protocol Note If the DF1 communication protocol is selected the DF1 in the PLC communication parameters must be set to full duplex mode check mode set to CRC and hardware handshaking disabled It is not required to set PLC station No If the DH485 communication protocol is selected the PLC station No must be set and the human machine station No must be different from the PLC station No PLC software setting Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of ROCKWELL Reference website HT TP www AB com Operable address range PLC Address Type Operable Format Description o oe ODD Exemal output node T4SV 0 254 DDD Set value register of T4PV 0 254 DDD Actual value register of C5SV 0 254 DDD Set value register of 374 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs CSPV 0 254 DDD Actual value register of N7 10 11 12 13 14 1 0 254 DDD Data register Note 1 D indicates decimal notation and the DD after the bracket indicate the value range of 0 15 When the address is less than 10 add a
196. ed on the basis of RS 422 many electrical specifications of the RS 485 are similar to those of the RS 422 Both of them adopt balanced transmission mode and the transmission cables have to be configured with terminating resistors RS 485 supports 2 wire and 4 wire modes The 2 wire mode supports real multipoint bidirectional communication where the Enable signal controls the transmission and receiving of data as shown in the figure below 342 Chapter 13 Serial Communication A _ 6 a 4 r B T la om RX O gt Ow B 3 en G G c 00000 R OOO a ie yw 000000 o GG OOD ane G G Electrical characteristics of the RS 485 are as follows Logic 1 is indicated by the voltage difference of 2 6 V between two cables logic 0 is indicated by the voltage difference of 2 6 V between two cables RS 485 supports a maximum transmission rate of 10 Mbps RS 485 interface adopts a combination of balanced drivers and differential receivers to enhance its capability of preventing common mode interference featuring better noise suppression and anti interference performance The standard maximum transmission distance is 1000 feet but it can achieve an actual distance of 3000 meters In addition the bus of the RS 232 interface can be connected
197. ed with the touch screen directly they can also be configured with CPM1 CIFO1 RS232 communication adapters or OMRON CPM1 CIF11 RS422 communication adapters to establish a link Where CPU51 61 of the CQM1H series support serial communication module CQM1H SCB41 For hardware descriptions refer to manuals provided by OMRON 348 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 1 CPU OMRON PLC Kaspro ot CQM1 1H CPU RS 232 CASTOR Gemini Galaxy interface touch screen 9 pin D SUB female COMO0 COM1 connector Note The following CPUs can be connected with the touch screen directly CQM1 CPU21 41 42 43 44 and CQM1H CPU21 51 61 For hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by OMRON 2 Communication module CPM1 CIF01 OMRON PLC CPM1 CIFO1 adapter RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 connector Note Set the mode setting switch of the CPM1 CIF0O1 adapters to the Host Link communication 349 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs mode 3 Communication module CPM1 CIF11 Kaspro OMRON PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy CPM1 CIF11 adapter touch screen RS 422 interface COMO0 COM1 5 pin terminal block 4 Communication module CPM1H SCB41 OMRON PLC Kaspro Se eae CPM1H SCB41 communication CASTOR Gemini Galaxy module touch screen COMO COM1 RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector Kasp
198. egister to conduct these PLC control operations Code Format BIN or BCD Control Type Designate the operation behavior The following operations are supported Change Window Report Printout Write data to PLC Current Base Window General 254 Chapter 6 Components PLC Control Back Light Open Close With or Without Write back Screen Hardcopy and Execute Macro Program The function of each Control Type is described later Macro No It refers to the number of the Macro code to be executed when the Control Type is set to Execute Macro Click OK to exit the PLC control component dialog box Click Exit again to exit the PLC Control Object List Change Window This operation needs the use of two consecutive word registers When the register corresponding to the Input Address address specified in the PLC Control dialog box is changed to a valid window number the current window will be closed and the designated window will be displayed The number of this designated window is read from the register of the Input Address Then that number will be written to the Input Address 1 register of the PLC Input address Designate the target window number Input address 1 Write the target window number here Triggered HMI HMI HMIO PLC Ho Addr Type Lys Address 0 Code Type BIN Format DOOOD word Len 2 Use Address Tag Control Type Change Window Macro ID Execuke Method ON lt gt OFF Open Address Taq Library Cancel
199. el This option is selected by default 2 Ethernet For CASTOR panels only The Ethernet interface can be used for downloading the HMI configuration the setting of the HMI system parameters and the indirect online simulation of the configuration Furthermore multiple HMlIs can be interconnected via the Ethernet to form a multi HMI application 1a Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software go Project Settings Option Compile i Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Bytes Download Download Device PC Senal No COM IP Address 192 Port 21845 Edit Option Screen Grid Space a 2 al Cancel IP Address Refers to the IP address of the HMI to be downloaded In addition to this IP address the IP address of the PC should also be set The two IP addresses should be in the same network section that is to say the range of the IP address of your PC is 192 168 0 1 11 13 255 To implement normal download the IP address of the HMI should be different from that of the PC Port No A network is actually composed of seven layers of protocols One of the most important tasks of the Transport Layer is to provide a reliable end to end connection Where the end here means the port Of course there are many ports ranging from 0 to 65535 The TCP IP protocol has many ports All the ports less than 1024 have clear definitions You are recommended to use ports above 1024 Set such a port to a port used for the to
200. emale connector MITSUBISHI PLC FX series RS 232 BD module RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 3 Communication module RS485BD MITSUBISHI PLC FX series RS 485 BD module RS 422 interface 5 pin terminal block Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 Connection of Mitsubishi FX3U Series PLC with CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC PLC Type Mitsubishi FX3U FX3U faerie be the same as the Data Bits 7ors COM port settings of the controller Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 1or2 COM port settings of the controller Must be the same as the 9600 19200 38400 Bits per Second COM port settings of the 57600 115200 controller l Even parity odd Must be the same as the Parity Even parity l l parity none COM port settings of the Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs controller Must be the same as the PLC Station No COM port settings of the controller Operable address range PLC Bit Word Address Operable Range Description Corresponding PLC software does 8000 9999 DDDD not contain this register eee SD_wor PLC software does word 8000 9999 DDDD not contain this register C_dwor Dword F 200 255 359 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common
201. ems 1 ON 2 ON System setting Adjusting brightness contrast date and so on e System Setting Mode In this mode the touch screen will start a built in system setting interface where the user can set such parameters as IP address brightness contrast and buzzer e Touch Screen Calibrate Mode In this mode when you touch the screen the screen will display a sign through which you can calibrate the touch accuracy of the screen e Firmware Update and Basic Parameter Setting Mode In this mode the user can update firmware set the IP address and perform other lower level operations In general do not use this mode e Application Online Operation Mode This is the normal working mode of CASTOR series touch screens The screen will display the starting picture of the downloaded project 1 Set DIP switches 1 and 2 on the back of the touch screen to ON and press the Reset key The Setup interface for the Kaspro GEMINI GALAXY and CASTOR series appears Startup Window No Startup window O by default Modify the parameter only when necessary After modification re download or reset the touch screen and the modified window will appear Backlight Saver Time Screen saver time is in the unit of minutes The default value is 10 No screen saver will be available when the value is set to 0 The time can be modified The Setup interface may not be able to display in full size in a single screen In this case click
202. en HMI is used as a slave device 10030 44 PLC Communication Time out 56 10063 64 PLC Communication Time out 10065 66 Protocol Time out 1 Protocol Time out 2 1 If LB9044 is set to ON communication settings will be written back to the system EPROM including IP address and port number If LB9050 is set to ON some system parameters will be restored to factory default settings Note 1 When the local addresses exceed 10000 the system does not support the dynamic modification function in simulation mode however the addresses can be read For example the address is LW10005 and the offline simulation displays as 2006 However the value cannot be modified in the offline simulation mode and it can be modified when run on the actual panel 2 The offline simulation mode does not support backlight control function The offline simulation mode does not support the use of video components 4 The offline simulation mode does not support print function 323 Chapter 12 Security Level Chapter 12 Security Level Security level is used to set different access rights for different users and only the user with a high level password can access windows with high security levels which greatly enhances the security of application projects In the Window Attribute window there is a Safe Level Security Level option In other words we can set the security level for any window as shown below er Attribute Window
203. ent of a KA SOFTWARE project Each display is composed of a number of windows There are three types of windows Basic Common and Fast selection A basic window can be used as a pop up window after changing its size All windows can be assigned as underlay windows Basic window A Basic window is the normal type of window that would be displayed during HMI runtime When using the Change Window command to switch to a basic window the current screen will be cleared all windows except the Common window and Fast selection window will be turned off When the components in the base window invoke the pop up window the original information of the base window will be kept while the invoked pop up window will be attached to the current base window The relationship between all such pop up windows and the base window is a kind of father son window relationship Upon the switchover from base window N to base window M all sub windows of window N will be closed while window M and sub window of window M are displayed The base window should be of the full screen size Fast selection window The Fast selection window is a window activated by touching the Task button This window will be always displayed on the screen unless it s hidden by a Task button The Fast selection window is useful for popping function keys which perform functions such as switching windows or other commonly used features By default Window 2 is the fast 80 Chapter 4 Wind
204. er Select the printer model Print No If this check box is selected a serial number will be printed out with the event message The serial number will be increased with each new event Print Time If this check box is selected the print time will be printed out with the event message Print Extend Time Determine whether to print out the time in the format of day hour minute Print Date Determine whether to print out the print date Print Extension Date Determine whether to print out the date in the format of YYYY MM DD Check Window Errors Determine whether to check errors in the window during printing For detailed print settings and methods refer to Chapter 10 270 Chapter 7 System Parameters 7 6 COM Settings Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting IEE PLC Communication Time Out ka Frotocol Time Out 1 ms Frotocol Time Out 4 ms Max interval of block pack WORDS Max interval of block pack BITS Max block package size WORDS Max block package size BITS none Stop Bit 1 Slave No 0 t takes efect when HMI as slave The CASTOR Gemini Galaxy series panels provide two serial ports so the user has to configure COMO and COM1 separately The two serial ports can be used simultaneously connecting with two PLCs For communication with PLC the two ports are identical So we only introduce the se
205. er sv GoieHMleosM rtGoOnw a meee we SO Dl EErEE EEEE l s a ald HO CCSCOOOOR hRHRHa ARH DABM GRE 81 8 F orane 2 SE Q 1008 gt ME gna apts a as Lag z i i NZS Z iilE INE g Bene os 7 Project files window fa Vector Graph ln ii NUM_KEYOOlvq ae NUM_DISP_BAROO1 PLC NUB_CTRL_BAR001 d A Bit Setting Indicator lamp Component amp Switch Direct Window Graph element window Connector Touch screen displays corresponding contents aaa a Tia AA Word Setting Mutiple State Display aan aif Message winodow H M l0 a nd P LC have 0 Frame0 Multiple State Scroll Bar i corres po nd ing co nte nts 1 Framet Switch ocode F 2 Frame2 a F 3 Frame3 a 2 i E 4 Frame4 as kr IA 5 Frame5 oving nimation 6 Frame6 Component 7 Frame A 8 Frame8 f i PLC di PLC1 0 Mouse x 32 y 10 Width 146 Height 124 Number 4 PLC parts It includes various configuration parts as shown in the following figure 57 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Graph element window Connector HI PLO PLC Parts te A N DIP a A 4516 s L A wm SS OO i o oa Bit Setting Indicator lamp Switch Direct Window Word Setting Mutiple State Multiple State Scroll Bar Moving Component Display Switch Component amp N L Ws y D 2 Animation Alarm Display Trend Curve xYPlot Bar Picture Meter Recipe Data Event Display Ind
206. et when dragging and dropping the HMI icon Once it is selected it cannot switch over to the other mode So this parameter is only for reference here Description Description of the HMI which will be displayed in the HMI description frame during download or simulation to help user distinguish different HMI panels 7 2 Taskbar tab HMI Attribute Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Background Color Button Position Align left hi I Undefined Area Color Text Align Align left 7 Include CPU Lamp B CFU Lamp Color Hide F S Window Hide Task Bar Include Alam Lamp E Alam Lamp Color Menu a Task Bar Include F 5 Win IT Lamp Frame Color Mic un Workspace Color 4 t I T Workspace Color Color coor ButtonArea Size Width 125 Height 20 Font 16 Font 16 Show Hide FastSelct Nenu Task Bar Ti Pp E Window Show Hide Task Bar Alarm Lamp CPU Lamp Touch Lamp E Display taskbar Determine whether to display the taskbar If this check box is selected the taskbar shown in the above figure will be displayed in the lowermost part of the screen Use Touch Control When the screen is touched the T lamp will blink If this check box is selected the touch screen lamp will be displayed in the right part of the taskbar as shown in the above figure The touch lamp can blink different colors when you t
207. et to 0 and 1000 respectively The first register stores the component state and the second register stores the position The function is the same as the X but in an opposite X Reverse Scaling l The function is the same as the Y scaling but in an opposite Y Reverse Scaling ee direction When Scaling is used scaling is performed as follows Display value Current position Reading value Input Min x Scaling max Scaling Min Input Max Input Min When Reverse Scaling is used scaling is performed as follows Display value Current position Input Max reading value x Scaling max Scaling Min Input Max Input Min 3 Go to the Tag tab Fill in text to be displayed and change color of text if desired 4 Go to the Graphics tab Select Vector Graph or bitmap to represent motion or to display states 5 Go to the Position tab and adjust the position and size of the Moving component if necessary 6 Click OK to complete the setting of the Moving component 142 Chapter 6 Components a E Animation 6 9 Animation Component PLC Parts The Animation Component is used to place an object on the window at a specified location determined by a predefined path and data in the PLC The state and the absolute location of the shape on the window depend on current reading value of two continuous PLC registers Typically the first register controls the state of the object and the secon
208. example level security level 2 to a lower level for example level 0 Refer to related part in Chapter 12 Security Level W 9050 Base Window number Number of base windows in the touch screen are saved here The slave machine can maintain the same base window with the master machine according to the word using PLC control component R 9054 Report output format 0 Text amp meter amp trend graph 1 Text amp meter amp trend 9057 9058 9059 Size of event entry Size used by the recipe memory to store the event entry message base message base including management message R 9060 9075 Numeric input amp text LW9075 includes the recently entered data Numeric input Value or Text R 9100 Change address 9100 stores the window number 9101 Applicable only to the 9101 stores the offset of PLC address external PLC When LW9100 is set to 11 and LW9101 is set to 20 the PLC word addresses of all components in window 11 will be added with an offset of 20 that is D10 changing to graph amp Vector Graph excluding templates 2 Text amp meter amp trend graph amp bitmaps 3 Text amp meter amp trend graph amp bitmaps amp Vector Graphs excluding templates 4 All RW Size of each item in Size used by the recipe memory to store each item of event entry message the event entry message base R D30 and all bit addresses will be added with an offset of 20 16 320 that is M20 changing to M340
209. f the Notebook not the last character of the current text content in many cases they are different 2 To activate the cursor touch the Notebook component on the panel to pop up the keyboard for input The cursor will glitter to indicate the current position j _ Function Key Comp onent Attribute Function Key Enable Addr Tag Graphics Position 0 Switch Window Change O Frame0 O Execute Marco Keyboard Func Selectte 2 Start selec f Map Keyboard Disable Ipping Key oT ranr P le npor Export Import Project To HMI Message Board Figure 2 shows the functions related to Text Select operation Start select and Finish Select Start select After activation move the cursor to the start of the text you want to select touching this function key will confirm the start of the text being selected Finish select After touching Start select move the cursor to the end of the text content you want to select then touch this function key to complete the select operation Function Key Component Attribute Function Key Enable Addr Tag Graphics Position C Switch Window Change 0 FrameO Keyboard Func Textope Oo Map Keyboard Te apping Ke Import Project To HMI Message Board Magnify Multiple Print Page eee ee Figure 3 shows the functions related to text operation Copy Cut and Paste 261 Chapter 6 Components Copy The selected text will be copy to the memory for future paste opera
210. ferring data from the PLC to the recipe memory of the touch screen Data Length The data to be transferred in the unit of words In the Tag tab Enter the words to be displayed In the Graphics tab Select Vector Graph or Bitmap to display the component Click OK place the component and adjust its size 8 2 Recipe Memory The recipe memory is the SRAM with backup batteries Therefore the contents in the memory can be saved for at least half a year after power failure When the system is powered on the batteries will be automatically charged The total size of the recipe memory is 64k words The recipe memory has two expressions RW indicates the absolute address while RWI indicates the index address LW9000 indicates the offset of the index address For example if the LW9000 is 50 the index address RWI 0 will direct at the data of the address RW50 At this time if we change the data of LW9000 to 51 the index address RWI 0 will direct at the data of the address RW51 as shown in the figure below 276 Chapter 8 Recipe Data LW 9000 51 es cc lt Based on the above basic concepts the following is an example We designate a project and RWIO 0X2222 Rw 0X3333 RWI12 0X4444 RWI3 0X5555 RWI4 0X6666 RWI5 OX7777 select the MODBUS RTU as the PLC type The following section describes how to upload 5 word text data beginning from the slave address 200 and with the slave addres
211. ffi PLC di PLC1 0 i PLCO 0 See the figure above the icons labeled FrameX represent the configuration windows of the panel marked as HMI1 DW0O and DW1 in the above figure represent components of Window 1 The symbols indicate windows containing components click on the will expand the tree and make the components of that window visible Windows containing no components don t have the 1 3 symbol and can not be expanded To collapse the expanded tree click on the symbol If the user wants to delete some windows or components click to select and press the DELETE key on the keypad the selected frame or part will be deleted PLC Attribute 61 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software PLegio aa aa a Dee a E Modbus ASCII Modbus ASCI E gt Siemen 57200 comi carl ormi AEE a ea PEC Attnbution The first digit indicates the number of PLC that is the number designated to the PLC for identification in the project The digit after the colon indicates the station number of the PLC which is used for communications purposes 3 5 Compile Information Window The Compile Information Window displays the compile progress and the compiling results indicates any errors when they occur as shown in the following figure Message winodow Compilation Done Error When a project is open the Compilation Information Windo
212. g PLC bit Toggle Set ON at window open Set OFF at window open Set ON at window close Set OFF at window close register is turned ON The state will be kept i e remains ON even after release When the Bit State Setting component is touched the corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF The state will be kept i e remains OFF even after release Every time the Bit State Setting component is pressed the corresponding PLC bit register will flip its current status once ON gt Toggles OFF OFF gt ON Only while the Bit State Setting component is held down pressed will the corresponding PLC bit register be turned ON Likewise when the switch is released the specified bit register is turned OFF When the window containing this Bit State Setting component is opened the corresponding PLC bit register is turned ON When the window containing this Bit State Setting component is opened the corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF When the window containing this Bit State Setting component is closed the corresponding PLC bit register is turned ON This operation is only applicable for a local bit LB or LW x When the window containing this bit setting component is closed the corresponding PLC bit register is turned OFF This operation is only 124 Chapter 6 Components Pe applicable for local bit LB or LW x Set ON at When the window containing this Bit St
213. ge are correct N Refer to related PLC data Check whether PLC address Supports write operation Contact the vendor Fault with compilation information The user can view the number of errors as well as causes in the compilation information window 1 Address error or threshold crossing of a PLC component as shown in the following figure Write Address HMI HMI1 Addr Type 1X Code Type BIN WordNo Refer to Chapter 14 for the address range of PLC components or refer to the related PLC manual to modify the PLC component address 2 Macro programming error as shown in the following figure simulation of an incorrect macro 448 Editorial Notes 1 Zinclude macrotypedef h 2 include math h 3 4 int MacroEntry 5 65 Fj 8 g 10 4 I Jarameters macro Qc Param name PLC No PLE Address type Address Message window am finux uclibe gec Program Files KASPRO ENU V14 cygwin bin macro_0 c No such am inuec uclibe ger am finux uclibe gec Program Files KASPRO_ENU V1 4 cygwinsbin macro_0 c No such file or direckoryanndinux uclibc gec no input files am finux uclibe gec am finuc lt uclibe ger am inuc lt uclibe gec am finucc uclibe ger Program Files KASPRO ENU VW1 4 cygwin bin macro_0 c No such file or directa am finucc uclibe ger am finucc uclibe ger am finux uclibe ger Program Files KASPRO ENU V14 cygwinSbinmacro_O c
214. gered at Window Close and By reg address Triggered by Register State All time Always Triggered If this option is selected the timer will be triggered upon initialization regardless of the trigger mode to execute the triggered operations until the times designated by the Repeat Times are reached Then it will not be triggered until the next initialization Initial frame The timer will be triggered upon initialization of the window to execute the triggered operations until the times designated by the Repeat Times are reached This function is basically the same as the All time mode Close frame The timer is triggered only once when the window closes By reg address The timer will be triggered according to the setting of the Trigger State and the value of the register designated by Trigger Address When the Repeat time is 0 it will continue to execute the triggered operation until the trigger condition is cancelled If the Repeat time is N it will clear the trigger register once triggered and then trigger N operations before it automatically stops Execution Cycle The timing cycle of the timer in 100ms units The timer will execute the triggered operation at an interval of the execution cycle Response Mode Determines whether to execute the operation immediately or delay in execution Executing immediately means it will be triggered immediately when the trigger condition is satisfied Delayed execution means it w
215. given earlier in this document 2 5 Event 10 4 Information Event Printout Function Project Database Event Information Component When the user enters Events in the Event Information background component the user can set trigger printing The corresponding contents will be printed out when the set condition is triggered 310 Chapter 10 Print Triggered Htl HMIO Address Trigger Function Hal E PLC Noo W Pop up window 0 Framed Data DE f Confirm Pop C Trig Pop Addr Type i write Data 0 Address HMI HbA PL Ho 0 Addr Type LE Address 1 Code Type BIN Use Addr Tag Format DODOL Use Addr Tag Text Attribute Line On Please Inspect Event Trigging Fort 16 i Text Color q Use Text Library cre Min Value Max Value U Print i On Trigger Return to Normal Open Text Library Open Address Tag Library Ok Cancel If the Bit option is selected in the Data Type drop down list box as shown in the above figure and when the Print On Trigger check box is selected the system will print out the contents when the LBO changes to ON When the Print Return to Normal check box is selected the system will print out the contents when LBO returns to OFF lf the Word option is selected in the Data Type drop down list box the following window appears 311 Chapter 10 Print Event Triggered HHMI Address Trigger Function HMI PLC No W Pop up window 0 Frarnet Data Type Wo
216. gram If the designated bit address state is ON the selected macro will be triggered PLC Control Hl HMI PLE No Addr Type LE Address U Code Type VFormatDD Use Address Tag Control Type Execute Macro Frogram Macro Number Open Address Tag Labrary Cancel Address Type Address The address of the register triggering the execution of the macro instruction If this bit is set to 1 the macro code will be executed if it is set to 0 the macro instruction will not be executed 258 Chapter 6 Components Macro No The number of the macro code to be executed AN Note This function can be used only when macrocodes are added to the project For the adding of macrocodes please refer to Chapter 9 6 37 About the Overlapping of Components The overlapping of multiple components will generate many special functions The CASTOR can support the overlapping of multiple components If these overlapping components are touched the program will execute related operations according to the Layer Order of the individual components The components in the topmost layer are considered to be touched first and the corresponding function will be conducted first and then the second layer and so on For example If six Bit State Setting Change components are overlapped to respectively control register YO the topmost layer to Y5 the bottommost layer when these components are touched the CASTOR will execute the progr
217. gure below 329 Chapter 12 Security Level Window Change to Window 5 Henu Task Bar The current security level is now 1 Press the Change Window 5 button and the system successfully switches to window 5 as shown in the figure below Window 5 Henu Task Bar How to change to a window with lower security level from a window with higher one The register LW9043 is reserved by the system to switch from a higher security level to a lower security level Add a Number Input component in window 0 as shown below 330 Chapter 12 Security Level nponent Atthibute Basic Attribute Numeric Data Enable Address Font Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMIO PLC HMI HMIO PLC Addr Type LWW Addr 9043 Addr Type Ly Addr Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 2 Use Addr Tag WordNo Use Addr T Description NII Save it to the disk compile and then run in offline simulation mode Window 8 Menu Task Bar Enter 1 in the Change Level frame but the current level will not change to 1 because it is not permitted to change a window with a lower security level to a window with a higher security level as shown below 331 Chapter 12 Security Level Window 8 Menu Task Bar Then enter the password 1111 to change the current security level to 1 as shown in the figure below Window Menu Task Bar Press the func
218. hat you assign to the Multi State Setting 128 2 component component Chapter 6 Components Go to the Multi State Setting tab and select the setting modes for the Multi State Setting Multi State Setting Component Attnbute Basic Attribute Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Fosition SettingMode Inc value Set Constant Set at Window Open Set at Window Close Set at Window Maximized Set at Window Minimized Set at Backlight Of Set at Enter Success Set at Enter Fail Setting Mode As shown in the following table Type Set Constant Set at window open Set at window close Set at window Max Description When the component is pressed touched preset constant data will be written to the designated PLC word register The constant is set in the Set Value box To initialize the designated Word Register with a constant value at the time of window open This operation is only applicable for LW local word Enter the constant in the Set Value box To set designated word register with a constant value at the time of window close This operation is only applicable for LW local word Enter the constant in the Set Value box To initialize the designated PLC Word register at the time window is maximized Enter the constant in the Set Value box Set at window Min To initialize the designated PLC Word register at the time window is Set at back light OFF min
219. he CPU 171 CCS 700 760 780 in the Momentum series are all RJ 45 hardware interfaces The wiring diagram is shown in the above figure For related software and hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by Schneider Electric RJ45 Pin 1 378 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Pin assignment of 8 pin RJ 45 female connector 2 CPU Momentum series PLC RS485 Kaspro Modicon PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Momentum series CPU touch screen COM port COM0 COM1 8 pin RJ 45 female connector 3 CPU Compact Quantum series PLC RS485 Kaspro Modicon PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Compact Quantum series CPU touch screen COM2 COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector Note Modbus serial ports of the CPU A984 and E984 241 245 251 255 of the Compact series and the Modbus serial ports of the Quantum 140CPU series are all 9 pin RS 232 hardware interfaces Where A984 131 141 and E984 241 251 of the Compact series and the 140CPU 434 534 of the Quantum series have two Modbus ports The wiring diagram is shown in the above figure For related software and hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by Schneider Electric 4 Communication module 172 JNN 210 32 applicable to Momentum series 379 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Kaspro Modicon PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy 172 JNN 210 32 adapter touch screen COM port COMO COM1 8 pin RJ 45 female con
220. he outline of the parts the touch lamp will blink a color different from the color when touching the valid area of the touchable parts The color for the non effective touch is set here CPU Lamp Color Set the color of the CPU Lamp 265 Chapter 7 System Parameters Alarm Lamp Color Set the color of the Alarm Lamp T C Lamp Frame Color Set Touch Lamp Frame color T C un Workspace Color Displays the Touch Lamp color when touching a non working area T C Workspace Color Displays the Touch Lamp color when touching a working area Hide F S Window and Hide Taskbar The texts entered in these two boxes are the texts to be displayed in the Display Hide Fast selection Window and Display Hide Taskbar window Button Position The position for Fast Selection Window Buttons and Taskbar Buttons is set here only two options are provided Aligning to the Right or Aligning to the Left If the Align Right option is selected the Fast Selection Window Buttons and Taskbar Buttons will be displayed in the lower right corner of the screen otherwise they will be displayed in the lower left corner Text Align The alignment mode of the text in the Fast Selection Window Buttons and Taskbar Buttons You can enter a name in the Fast Selection window and Taskbar like Start Taskbar Button Area Size Select the width and height of the button area Font Size Select the font size of the labels of the Fast Selection Window Button and Taskbar Button 7 3 HMI
221. hese registers will take effect after restarting the panel System parameter settings Address Description 10011 Screen saver time Set to 0 will disable the screen saver Value larger setting backlight and energy than O will enable the screen saver The valid saving range is 1 600 minute If the value is 10 the panel will enter screen saver after 10 minites with no touch operations 10012 Buzzer 0 Disable 1 Enable Disable 1 Enable 10013 Common window pop up 0 Normal 1 shown above other windows aie eee 10014 Common window properties 0 Below base window eS mene 10015 Number Number of stored events stored events 0 65535 10016 a source O ce a Local Word 1 Internal RTC Security Level Mapping Address Description 10020 Use security level setting O Disable 1 Enable 1 10022 10023 Password level O 1 Occupy double words 10024 10025 Password level 1 1 Occupy double words 10026 10027 Password level 2 1 Occupy double words Communication Parameter Mapping Address Description a 10030 10033 IP address 1 Each WORD occupies a field with a value haa ennai aa 10034 Port number download portilt is to save the download port number instead ee mn n 10085 Reserved i ne COMO 10037 10038 Baud Rate Double word acs lala a 322 Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System 0041 Stop bit 0042 HMI station number when HMI is used as a slave device 44 0062 HMI station number wh
222. ick the text icon 4 the text dialog box appears as shown in the following figure Text Attribute Text Position Graphics Mode Vector Font Tag Mode Beare ke sean Font 16 Align Lett Language English USA Content Shows the text contents on the parts When entering text you can press the Enter key to start a new line Graphics Mode In this mode you can change the font size font font style and more Click 47 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Vector Font to show the font property setting dialog box as shown in the following figure Text Attribution F MS Ul Gothic F MT Extra O MV Boli O Niagara Engraved O Niagara Solid Effects Strikeout Color Text Position Graphics Mode Tag Mode Text Libra Font 16 z Align Left Language English USA W coor Text Library Mode In this mode you can use the text pre defined in the text library 48 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Text Attnibution Text C Graphics Mode Content C Tag Mode Honame 16 Align Left Language a Color Font Size 8 16 24 32 48 64 72 and 96 pixels are optional Align The text alignment mode can be Left Right and Center Color Indicates the text display color Content Shows the text content on the part When using the text library the text content can only be edited in the text library For detailed description of the text li
223. ielded cable and the value may be smaller when the cable is used in an environment with considerable interference Since RS 232 C interface standard was developed in an earlier time it has the following defects 1 The signal level value of the interface is high which may easily cause damage to chips of the interface circuitry 2 The transmission rate is low with a baud rate of 20 Kbps in asynchronous transmission mode 3 The interface uses a signal cable and a signal return cable to form a common ground transmission mode This common ground transmission may easily lead to common mode interference Therefore the noise suppression and anti interference capability is low The higher the baud rate is the lower the anti interference capability will be 4 The transmission distance is rather limited 13 3 RS 422 RS 422 and RS 485 are different from RS 232 For RS 422 and RS 485 data signals are transferred in differential transmission mode that is balanced transmission mode It uses a pair of twisted pair cables with one cable defined as A and the other defined as B In general the positive level between the transmission drivers A and B is at 2 6V which indicates a logic state while the negative level is at 2 6V which indicates another logic state In addition there is a signal ground C and an Enable end in the RS 485 while they are optional in the RS 422 The Enable end is used to control the connection
224. ight up the backlight use the Backlight Open function 251 Chapter 6 Components Backlight Close return value This function is similar to the Backlight Close function we have just mentioned above The only difference is that when selecting this type of Backlight Close the control Bit will be automatically cleared after the backlight going off Backlight Open This function can be used for opening panel backlight with a bit register When the specified Bit register state is ON the backlight of the panel will be turned on Even if the Bit register is set OFF the backlight will not go OFF To use a PLC Bit register to shut off the Backlight use the Backlight Close function Backlight Open return value This function is similar to the Backlight Open function we have just mentioned above The only difference is that when selecting this type of Backlight Open the control Bit will be automatically cleared after the Backlight being turned on Screen Hardcopy This operation is used to control the printout of the content of the current screen by use of a bit address If the bit register is triggered from the OFF state to the ON state the current screen will be printed out In the Print Settings interface that appears by selecting HMI Properties in the Communication Configuration interface the valid printer type should be set Please refer to the descriptions of Screen Hardcopy in Chapter 10 Execute Macro Pro
225. ile If Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Downoad Download Device PE Serial Ho IPF Address Port 21845 Edit Option r Screen Grid Space Serial Port No Select the serial port you want to use Make sure the port you designate is available and the download cable is connected properly The user can contact Kaspro Group or your local distributor to get the serial download cable Te Ca Download D GP DownLoad Way A Offline Simulation F Indirect Online Simulation I Shift F5 fi Direct Online Simulation N CtrH F5 Compile Download m Edit Option Screen Grid Space Pal Toob T Option O Window W Help H La cCompile c Ctr4Fy EG Compile AMR 41 Clear Build Result E Ctrl e Ctrl D FS Jj Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Download Device PC Serial Ho IF 4ddress Fort Anions Due to the slow downloading speed downloading through a serial port will take a longer time and for this reason it is not our recommended downloading channel but will function asone if needed After selecting the downloading method and setting the required parameters you can start 75 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software downloading by clicking the icon 8 A dialog box will pop up after clicking the download
226. ill be triggered after the delay of an execution cycle once the trigger condition is satisfied 235 2 Chapter 6 Components Response State Determine whether to trigger the timer by the value of ON or OFF when it is triggered by the register Repeat Times The number of repeated operations after the timer is triggered Refer to the description of the execution times for each trigger mode If the Repeat Times is set to 0 the timer will be triggered whenever the condition is satisfied Trigger Address Address of the register to execute corresponding functions when the timer is triggered by the register Note that the address must be an LB address Timer Timer Function Position Basic Attribute Trigger Address Trigger Mode By reg address z HMI Exe Cycle 100ms 40 A100ms PLC No o Response Mode Immediate Address Type LB Response Sate OF Atos Repeat Times 1 Format DODDD Zero means repeat all along Go to the Timer Function tab There are three function blocks Execute Macro Data Transfer and Set Status 1 Execute Macro code The macro code to be executed each time when the timing time arrives 2 Data Transfer Implement the data transfer function when the timing time arrives and transfer data of corresponding length from the source address to the destination address Source Address Starting address of the register containing the data to be transferred Destination Address address of the transfer
227. imized Enter the constant in the Set Value box Set when the back light is turned OFF Enter the constant in the Set Value box 129 Chapter 6 Components Set at successful Set when the numeric or text component conducts a successful input Set at input failure Set when the numeric or text component conducts an unsuccessful input gon eave SVE Every time the component is pressed the incremental value is added to the current value of the designated PLC word address if the result is not larger than upper limit The incremental value is set in the Inc Value field Every time the component is pressed the decreased value is subtracted from the current value of the designated PLC word address if the result is not less than lower limit When the component is pressed and held for a time longer than Delay Time the incremental value is added to the current value of the designated PLC word address in every interval of Execution Speed The increased amount is the Incremental Value When the component is pressed and held for a time longer than Delay Time the decreased value is added to the current value of the designated PLC word address in every interval of Execution Speed The decreased amount is the Decreased Value 3 Go to the Tag tab Fill in text and colors to denote states 4 Go to the Graphics tab Select Vector Graph or bitmap to indicate the corresponding address states and represent the touch area
228. indow If the function key is set as Change Common Window when the touch area is pressed the current Common window will be replaced by the specified window as the new Common window Also the new Common window is designated by selecting from the list 224 Chapter 6 Components Change Fast Selection Window This function changes the Fast Selection window The window specified in this function must be the exact same size as the original Fast Selection window window number 2 by default Pop up Window If the function key is set as Pop up Window when the touch area is pressed the window designated by window number selected from the list will be displayed over top of the current base Window 4 Window 4 Window 100 Pop up window 100 window The existing window s will not be terminated Close Window A Close Window function key terminates the Pop up window where it is placed when pressed However it cannot close direct or indirect windows The open close of direct indirect windows are controlled by their corresponding bit word registers and the Close Window function key can only close Pop up windows and cannot control the register data Popup Window Title Bar A function key defined as Popup Window Title Bar is used to move the position of a Popup window on the screen A Popup window on the screen that has a function key inside the window with the Popup Window Title Bar attribute set can be moved by t
229. indow tab and select a target window number in the Window No drop down list box Basic Attribute Direct Window Position Window No 0 FrameO 1 Common Window 2 Fast Selection 3 NUM Keyboard 4 ASCI Keyboard 5 Frame 5 3 Click OK and adjust the position and size of the direct window component The size of the window limits the area of display The area of pop up window out of the direct window boundary will not be displayed A Function Key can be assigned to the window to enable repositioning and minimizing features Refer to Chapter 6 29 Function Key Component for more information Frames 0 1 and 2 are system default frames and can not be popped up as direct window please use another frame for example frame 5 6 18 A larm Information Logon Component Toolbar Icon Messages to be displayed on the Alarm Display component must be registered in the Alarm Entry list Alarm information logon Each message corresponds to a PLC bit register If the PLC bit device activates either ON or OFF the corresponding message is displayed on the Alarm Display This component is only used to enter alarm messages To display alarm messages the Alarm Display component is required gt Procedure to add modify alarm entry message 1 Click the E icon in the database toolbar the Alarm Message Object Library will pop up or enter the alarm message entry page in the Library menu in the menu bar HMI No Address I
230. ing The languages corresponding to different values of the LW9130 LW9130 0 Language 1 Contents in the Language 1 column will be displayed LW9130 1 Language 2 Contents in the Language 2 column will be displayed LW9130 2 Language 3 Contents in the Language 3 column will be displayed LW9130 3 Language 4 Contents in the Language 4 column will be displayed LW9130 gt 3 Language 1 Contents in the Language 1 column will be displayed Therefore you can place some Word Setting components in the main interface to set the value of the LW9130 the tags of those Word Setting components indicate the language they stand for Touch the Word Setting component corresponding to the desired language after the HMI panel has just powered on so that the user can select the appropriate interface language To change the language return to the main interface to select the language again 6 35 9139 Address Tag Component Project Database The Address Tag component is a list for storing frequently used register addresses It also saves a lot of development time for the user by avoiding the trouble of frequently reentering an address You can use the addresses in the list in any place that supports the application of Use Address Label The usage is described as follows Create an Address Tag in the Tag Library 1 Click the i icon on the Tool Bar or select Project Database gt Address Label on the toolbar th
231. ing Plot Number of sampling points for one curve displayed on the graph No of Pages When the Type is set to Multiple Pages this box is available Channel Number of tracks to be displayed corresponding to the number of word addresses of the PLC data One word register corresponds to one track Hold Keep The bit address that controls the start or stop of the oscillograph in other words the data sampling stops when the Hold bit is turned ON and the sampling continues and oscillograph will be dynamically displayed when the Hold bit is turned OFF Roll Changing the value of this register can implement scroll display of the graph Each incremental unit can move the oscillograph left right by one sampling point For example create two numeric setting components with their register addresses the same as the address of the register controlling the scrolling Set one component to addition and the other to subtraction In this way it can turn the oscillograph to the previous or next page Time When the Save Time check box is selected the Time box in the lower part of the window will be activated It includes 12 word registers used to save the time of the latest sampling point The registers are restricted to HMI local words the user can specify an address for them 3 Go to the Channel tab and set related parameters of each track No Line Width 1 5 16 bit signed 16 bit signed Color Designate the color of each track
232. irect Window 12345 ABC 1234 fasc i a Number Text Display Number Input TextInput Oscillograph Video Note Book a Mimle Function Parts After creating a project and switching to the Configuration screen edit window you can drag parts to be used into the Configuration window For detailed instructions on using the PLC parts please refer to Chapter 6 Function Parts 5 Graph element window Timer x Function Key Alarm Bar Scale Connector HMI PLO PLO Parts Function Parts a A BitMap vector graph NotePad Function parts include Function keys Scale Alarm Bar Timer and more For the usage of them please refer to Chapter 6 A canon In the Graph element window right click and select the Small Icon in the shortcut menu the icons will be displayed in the form of smaller icon which can save the window area for small displays as shown in the following figure 58 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Graph element window Connector HMI FLC FLC Farts H Bit Setting Component i Indicator lamp eq Switch ay Direct Window i Word Setting d Mutiple State Display a Multiple State Switch ll Scroll Bar a Moving Component sige Animation f Alarm Display os Trend Curve Function Farts 3 3 Project files window Files related to shape library and HMI panels are displayed in the Project files window so there are two branches in the tree
233. is strongly recommended to resize the original image to the same size of the component using that image Doing so will greatly save storage space and ensure fastest operation of the panel For example the user wants to import an image for a component of the size 100x60 but the size of the original image is 200x120 Since the image size doesn t exceed the smallest panel resolution 320x240 the image can be imported and used for that part but it will be displayed as a 100x60 part which means the a original image of the size 100x60 will have the same effect Resizing the larger original image will certainly save 3 4 storage space and the smaller file will save processing time Always take your time to resize the image to proper size as this will allow for a smaller project file and a faster running project Images are stored in lossless compression mode in the panel so any image of the loss compression format for example jpg will be converted to lossless compression file which may make the file larger than original image The actual size of an image depends mainly on the number of pixels For example for a 100x60 color picture its size before compression is 100x60x2 12000 bytes and the compression rate in lossless compression mode is 10 80 depending on the specific images Therefore to reduce the project size reasonable optimization of the image size and colors is the best way When importing a bitmap if there is no special requirement try
234. isplay Component PLC Parts The Alarm Display component will display all triggered alarm messages in a designated area The content displayed is the same as that displayed on the Alarm Bar All alarm messages are related to specific bit registers When an alarm message is generated the alarm will be removed only after the corresponding bit register switches back to normal state otherwise the alarm message will always be displayed that is the alarm state remains ON This component is only used to display alarm message Messages must be entered with the Alarm Information Logon component before display gt Adding alarm display 1 Click the Alarm Display component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the component attribute dialog box appears Alarm Displa Basic Attribute Alarm Display Position Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMIO PLC HMI HMIO PLC Addr Type LW Addr 0 Addr Type LW Addr Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 1 Use Addr Tag WordNo Description Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address The Input Address controls the scrolling up and down of the alarm display window All active alarm messages are sorted by time the new alarms are displayed on top and the older ones are put on the bottom If the register value is N then the top N 1 messages will be ignored and the number N message of the order of arrival
235. isters LW9040 LW9041 reserved by the system are used to enter passwords for different security levels Add a Number Input component to window O as shown in the figure below ent Attibute Basic Attribute Numeric Data Enable Address Font Graphics Position Prionty Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMIO PLC HMI HMIO PLE Addr Type LW Addr 9040 Addr Type LV Addr 0 Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN Worda 2 Use Addr Tag Worda Use Addr Tag Description Go to the Numeric Data tab and in the Data Type drop down list box select the password option as shown below 328 Chapter 12 Security Level Basic Attribute Numeric Data Enable Address Font Graphics Position Data Type password Width peal 7 Integer 10 Decimal 0 Min val 0 Mex val 429496729 Pant color m Lowlimit color Variable MaxMin Value E coor E cob HMI HMIO PLC E lah T iah Addr Type LW Addr 0 Code Type BIN l Width 4 Addr Tag Min Value 0 Max Value 479496 7295 A Caution The user has to enter a security level password through the reserved registers LW9040 LW9041 of the system Therefore the Width must be set to 2 words DWORD Save it to the disk compile and then run in offline simulation mode Window Menu Task Bar The current security level is 0 so the Change to Window 5 button is unavailable Enter the password 1111 and the current security level changes to 1 as shown in the fi
236. it an unauthorized person from uploading the project file from the panel to a PC and hence protects the intellectual property of the project designer and authorized users Note The initial 267 Chapter 7 System Parameters password is 888888 by default Level 0 2 Key Security key password For details refer to Chapter 12 Security Level TextLib lang The number of languages included in the project for example English Germany French and Chinese or any other language For details refer to the description of the Text Library in Chapter 6 34 Def lang The default language of the project when it is created Init Macro The number of the first macro to be run after the panel finishes the power on sequence and has started the application project Note This selection will be grayed out if there are no Macros created in the project Use Buzzer Enables disables the buzzer If this check box is selected the system will give a buzz sound when the panel is touched Cursor Color Choose the cursor color from a palette or create your own customer color 7 4 Historic Event tab Save Method Select from the drop down box one of the following selections Not Save Turns even logging off SD Card only if your model has SD card capability USB Disk 1 not available on all models USB Disk 2 not available on all models HMI uses the HMI memory for even logging Save Count Indicates the maximum number of events to be saved S
237. king a Simple Project Graph element window Connector 5 In the HMI window click to select the model of touch panel corresponding to the actual hardware hold and drag the icon to the Project Structure Window Release the mouse and the following dialog box appears Msplay Mode HMI Display Mode horizont Select Horizontal or Vertical display mode to view the touch panel in horizontal or vertical direction click OK 6 Select the proper PLC to be connected the PLCs supported by KA SOFTWARE are listed in the PLC window click to select hold and drag itto the Project Structure Window as shown in the following figure Anal 7 Inthe Project Structure Window drag to place the HMI and PLC when the ports shown as the gray trapezoids of the HMI or PLC are close to the end of the wire the wire will automatically attached to the ports when both ends are attached to one port of a device the connection is established Note The connection port number should be consistent with the actual physical connection PLEO G B Siemens 57 200 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project 8 Click the HMIO icon the following dialog box appears FLENG R Siemens S 200 Frint Setting Serial Fort D Setting Serial Fort 1 Setting HMI Task Bar HII Extend Attribution e Network Setting IP Address Pott Number 2008 o Display Setting Screen Display Mode H
238. king on state 1 value 0 Blinking on state O value 1 Blinking on state 1 value 0 Blinking on state 1 value 1 Blinking on state 1 value 0 switch Blinking on state Oor 1 value 1 Blinking on state 1 gt Function Normal Just display state graphic in static state Blinking on state 0 The lamp will blink the shape corresponding to state 0 when the bit status is OFF The blinking period is set in the Rate text box When the bit status is ON the lamp will show the state 1 shape in static mode Blinking on state 1 The lamp will blink the shape corresponding to state 1 when the bit status is ON The blinking period is set in the Rate text box When the bit status is ON the lamp will show the state 0 shape in static mode 120 Chapter 6 Components 3 Go to the Tag tab Fill in text for either or both the OFF and ON state ent Attnbute Basic Attribute Bit State Lamp Tag Graphics Position IM Use Tag Language English USA D Use Tex Tag List State in this example as the above figure shows the label for the lamp state 0 is OFF and turns to ON when the lamp state is 1 The user can enter any content for the specific state Alignment Three alignment modes are available Left Entered contents are placed to the left edge of the graphic Left edge justified Right Entered contents are placed to the right edge of the graphic Right edge justified Center Entered contents are placed in the middle of
239. l Read Address r Write Address HMI HMO HMI HMO PLC 0 Addr Type LW Addr Type FKE Addr 200 Code Type BIN Code Type BIN _ Famat DDDDD Word o 5 _ Use Addr Tag 281 Chapter 8 Recipe Data The completed project is shown as follows RHIO LHJ0G PAAAAAAAAA Downloa ae 4X100 Run the project in offline simulation mode Firstly set the value of LW9000 to 300 and enter AAAAAAAAAA in the RWIO text box The operating state is shown as follows Henu Task Bar Click Download The text data will be transferred from RW300 to 4x100 282 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Nenu Task Bar In the above example we find that whether uploading PLC data to the recipe memory or downloading data from recipe memory to the PLC the starting position of the recipe memory data is the value corresponding to the LW9000 address This is important for implementing some complicated recipe data functions The section below gives a detailed description of the usage of the recipe memory data 8 3 Uploading and Downloading of Recipe Data Between a Touch Screen and a PLC Recipe data is very important For example in an industrial production line the production equipment can fulfill different tasks according to different parameters We can store a group of data to the recipe memory in a defined format and revoke such data when necessary In this way we do not need to enter data temporarily which greatly
240. l automatically change to the IP address set in the HMI Properties window If the IP address set in the HMI Properties interface is inconsistent with that set in the Compilation Download Options window download using the old IP address will fail In this case it is necessary to adjust the IP address in Compilation Download Options window or enter the SETUP state to modify the current IP address of the touch screen Chapter 1 Installation of KA SOFTWARE 1 2 3 Printer Interface eeogCCGCGCEH GOGH E eeegceEeEeEoC CeCe ES 25 The CASTOR series and the GALAXY series have a printer port The interface setting is the same as a PC port interface The GALAXY 56 56L series provides a 15 pin print interface Parallel Print Port 15 pin D SUB Female Connector The user can print the window events texts and bitmaps online 1 Printer setting In the Project Structure Window double click the HMI icon and the HMI Properties dialog box appears Enter the Printer Settings window as shown in the following figure HMI Attribute Seral Port 0 Setting Seral Port 1 Setting Seral Port 2 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Print attribute of the Event shows Printer port setting Print Number Print Date Port LPT m Print Extend Baud Date fyyyanm dd Print Time Print Extend Data Bit Time d h m Parity g Print Standard Timefh m s Stop Bit Check Window Err
241. lay the date in the format of MM DD Extended date format Display the date in the format of YY MM DD Sequence No Day Trigger time Acknowledge time Return to normal time Event content Note Be sure to allow sufficient character length to accommodate all messages If the Format message and message text exceed the Character length the message is truncated 200 Chapter 6 Components As for the method for obtaining day and time refer to Section 11 3 Nonvolatile Local Word LW 10000 10006 RTC SEE o BIN code 10003 RTC day Value range 0 31 a 10004 RTC month Value range 0 11 RW 10005 RTC year Value range 0 9999 R W Note on RTC A user can display system time with a corresponding component with its value writable However the user has to make sure its value must be within the value range otherwise the operation will be ignored and the current time value will not be modified 3 Click OK and adjust the position and size of the Event Display component Example of Event Display 1 Create a New Project 2 Enter two event entries to the Event log object list as shown below HMI0 PLCO 1 i Line On Please HI PLC 1 le Orn Temp TOO Higt Delete Delete All Modify Import Export Where the first event corresponds to pop up window 4 and the second event corresponds to pop up window 5 201 3 4 Chapter 6 Components Add an event display component to window 0 as shown
242. le a Transmitted Data TD Data transmission signal cable Signal Ground Grounding signal cable Data Set Ready DSR Request To Send RTS Ring Indicator RI Pinout of the Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy RS232 is shown as follows Piano PinName Deserpion Clear To Send CTS CTS and RTS work only on Request To Send RTS some PLCs Only COM1 supports CTS and RTS If without CTS or RTS the typical connection between the Kaspro Castor Gemini Galaxy RS 232 and PLC is shown as follows TID TD seaccccdccasacscstcesssssostgte 28 RB B D PD E A E T TD GD e eeheehe e e GD Since RS 232 adopts the full duplex transmission mode it has independent transmission TD and receiving RD signal cables and a grounding signal cable The purpose of CTS and RTS is intended for handshaking control between the Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy and the PLC The CTS or RTS of only a few PLCs must be controlled by the Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy 339 Chapter 13 Serial Communication The length of RS 232 connection cable is often a question The standard length shall not exceed 50 feet 1 foot 30 cm or the capacitance shall not exceed 2500 pF Based on capacitance standard the typical capacitance of a UTP CAT 5 connection cable is 17 pf feet and the maximum length of a connection cable is 147 feet that is about 44 m The value may be larger in the case of a sh
243. le Range Description Type System internal external Ox 1 9999 DDDD output node System internal external 1x 1 9999 DDDD input node 1 9999 DDDD Analog input data register 1 9999 DDDD Data register 377 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Note 1 D indicates decimal notation If it is necessary to operate the double word variable select 2 in the corresponding component address properties dialog box 2 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note Modicon Compact Momentum Quantum series PLCs can be connected with the Kaspro touch screen through the communication port on the CPUs and by the Modbus RTU protocol Where the 171 CCS 960 XX in the Compact A E 984 series does not support Modbus serial port and cannot communicate with the touch screen directly instead it can be connected with the touch screen through the communication module 171 JNN 210 32 For detailed settings refer to the technical manuals provided by Schneider Electric 1 CPU Compact Momentum series PLC RS232 Modicon PLC Kaspro o Compact Momentum series CASTOR Gemini Galaxy CPU touch screen COM port COMO COM1 8 pin RJ 45 female connector Note Two Modbus serial ports of the CPU E984 258 265 275 285 in Compact series and the COM1 of t
244. lect Window 5 4 Click onthe Drawing toolbar to place a Static Text component on window 1 The content of the text is Common Window 1 5 Place a Static Text component on window O with the content Base Window 0 Place a Function key whose function is Goto Previous and labeled as Return and a Pop up Window Function key with the label Popup Window 7 to pop up window 7 as shown in the figure below Basic Window 0 FEO Popup window f 6 Place a Text component on window 4 to display the text of Basic Window 4 and a Return to Previous Function key with the label Return 221 Chapter 6 Components Basic Window 4 FRI 7 Place a Fast Selection Window Function key on window 5 for switching to Fast Selection window 2 a Change Common Window Function key for setting window 1 as the current Common window and a Change Common Window Function key for setting Common window 6 as the current Common window Common eH indow 1 Fast Select Window 2 8 Place a Static Text component with the content Common Window 6 on window 6 9 Place a Popup Window Title Bar Function key on window 7 to display the title of Pop up Window a Minimize Window and a Close Window Function key 10 After setting these options save and compile the project run online offline simulation or downloading The operational effect simulation is shown in the figure below 228 Chapter 6 Basic
245. lip and more For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 System toolbar Is used for compiling downloading and simulating a project For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Line width toolbar Is used for adjusting the line width For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Turn to page toolbar Is used for scrolling forward and backward within the pages of a project For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Database toolbar Includes text library tool alarm messages tool address labels tool PLC control tool and event messages tool For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Code compilation toolbar Is used for controlling the compilation of codes For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Line style toolbar This toolbar is used for selecting the line style with or without an arrow a dotted line or 25 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software solid line The style of lines arcs and the outline of rectangles are also set by this toolbar For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 m Graph element window The Graph element window has five optional columns Connector Used to select the type of communication link HMI Used to select the HMI type PLC Used to select the PLC type PLC parts Used to select various configuration parts related to PLC registers Function parts Used to
246. lost When a user switches back to the oscilloscope window it will resume data sampling from the very beginning The advantage of an oscilloscope is that a user can monitor multiple waveforms for which the long term monitoring is not necessary without adding extra background processing loads Meanwhile the oscilloscope provides variable rate sampling function which when cooperating with a PLC enables a user to obtain higher sampling frequency without being restricted to the frequency of 1 point per second gt Procedure to add an oscilloscope Click the Oscilloscope component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the component attribute dialog box appears Oscil Od raph am J anent Attribute Basic Attribute Oscillograph Channel Position Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC M HMI Addr Type LW Add 0 Addr Type LW Code Type BIN Foma DDDDD Code Tye HN WordNo 7 Use 19 WordNo Input Address Specify the PLC word register address corresponding to the first curve the second curve data register is located at Read Address 1 and the third is located at read address 2 etc Address Type Select the address type of the register corresponding to the oscilloscope that is the monitored register s address type The address type varies with PLC type Alternatively you can also use the internal register of the HMI For internal registers of HMI refer to Section 5 4 Please not
247. meric display component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 1 or 2 for input address Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the numeric display component Fill in the Numeric data tab by referring to related contents in the Number Input component Basic Attribute Numeric Data Font Graphics Position Data Type unsigned int Width WORD Integer 4 Decimal 0 Uplimit color Lowdimit color m color m color HMO PLE 0 flash flash 0 Max wal 9999 Addr Type LY Addr O Proportion Conversion Min Value E Max Value 3999 3 l Data Type Control the display format of data including Signed integer Unsigned integer Hex Binary Password Single float and Double float Numeric Setting Set the position of the decimal point number of digits max value and min 154 Chapter 6 Components value Engineering Data conversion Applicable only to the two data types of Signed integer and Unsigned integer 3 Goto the Font tab Set related parameters by referring to the Number Input component Basic Attribute Numeric Data Font Graphics Position Font Siz 16 i Align Right 4 Click OK to complete the setting and place the numeric display component in an appropriate position a
248. more time Select components and click the icon to copy multiple components as shown in the following figure 40 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Multiple Copy Copy Quantity Address Auto lncrease After Address Auto Increase Iw Direction W Y Direction f e Direction f Interval COY Direction Direction 2 Address Increment Y Direction 2 Mote Address auto increase is invalid for address tag Cancel A configuration window appears for entering the copy quantity interval of the copies and some other options Attribute To change the attributes of a component select the component double click it or click the icon cE the Properties dialog box of the component appears The user can make editing in this dialog box Database Toolbar As shown in the following figure the contents of the items in the menu correspond to each other which are as follows in turn Text Library Me it L Via Mahn ma Edit an Initial window Address tag ioe Import data from recipe Alarm Inforamation Logon Add macrocode Event Information Logon Import a graphic file PLC controller Create a new graphic Text Library Stores text tags Address tags Stores address tags 41 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Alarm Information Logon Enter alarm messages Event Information Logon Enter event messages PLC Control Adds PLC control components
249. n after setting is shown as follows 216 Chapter 6 Components The operation effect is shown as follows Henu Task Bar When the display remains still click a position in the scroll bar to move the current display to the corresponding page in historical data It implements the browsing function similar to that in a Windows system and it is easy to use i Note Pad 6 28 Note Pad Component Function Parts The Note Pad is used as a canvas for users to save and transfer messages The user can write some notes on the HMI at will It is similar to the MS Paint included with 217 Chapter 6 Components Windows but we can only user fingers or a stylus to write on the message board gt Procedure to add a Note Pad 1 Click the icon and drag it to the window the Note Pad component attribute dialog box appears Message Board Position Frame Width Frame Color filled Background Frame Width The width of the Note Pad frames Fill Background Select the frame background and foreground color or you can leave it empty Position tab Set the position for the Note Pad 2 Click the OK key and adjust the position and size of the message board component Tools of the Note Pad like Brush Color Brush Width and Clear Screen are provided by the Function Key component After placing the Note Pad component place a Function Key component on the window the Function Key tab of the Function Key Compo
250. n describes how to compile a simple macro template and the macro template will implement the following simple operation functions Read two signed numbers divide LWO with LW1 and place the result of a double float in the four words of LW2 LW5 Click the macro icon kt in the toolbar of the database or select the Add Macrocode command in the File menu Option WindowlW Help H Project Path P AIk F8 Compress big graph C At F Macrocode M Text Library T Address Tag B Sound Lib S Sea pp The following dialog box appears Mew N ETETETT i HMO STEN File Mame macro Oc arosi 291 Chapter 9 Macro Code Select an HMI number and enter a file name in the File Name text box Click Create to enter the macro editing window as shown below include macrotypedef h include math h int MacroEntry return 0 ONOUARWNE Le gt Parameters macro_0 c Data type Param name PLC No PLC Address type Address No of Word OptMode Before compiling macrocodes define input and output variables Right click in the Macrocode Variable Window and the following menu appears Param name PLC Address type Address No of Word Add Variable Delete Variable Modify Variable Select Add Variable and the following dialog box appears Variable HMI Data Type bit PLC Ho Address Type 0s Address 0 Word Length 1 Format DODOD Asta Readwrite Code Type BIN
251. n of the window First select a shape or component to be moved and then select Horizontal Center in the Edit menu or click the icon as shown in the following figure 37 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Vertical center This function is used to place multiple selected components or shapes in the vertical center position of the window First select a shape or component to be operated and then select Vertical Center in the Edit menu or click the icon The figure is omitted Flip and Rotate Only shapes drawn by drawing tools can be flipped such as straight lines circles and polygons Other components cannot be flipped First select a shape to be flipped and then select Flip Flip Horizontal flip left right Rotate for 90 degrees rotate anticlockwise for 90 degrees Flip Vertical Flip up down o a Horizontally Flip Vertically and RoE 90 in the Edit menu or select the icon a dA to flip the component 38 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software 3 1 3 View Wiew iv ToolstT LibraryiD Window HelptH Basic Toolbars Ctrl Alk 5 Component Labrary Window Chrl Alk Graphics Toolbar Chrl Alt 5 Turn To Page Toolbar P Ctrl lk P Position Adjust Toolbart 4 Crrl 4E 4 Line Width Toolbar w Ctrl Alt L Line Style Toolbar Chrl Alt System ToolbariT Ctrl Alt T State Toolbar ia Ctrl Alk I Database Toolbar L hrl
252. nate position of the moving nodes where you can edit the coordinate position of each node 5 Go to the Tag tab If you want to use tags for different states check Use Tag and Fill in the text to be displayed 6 Go to the Graphics tab Select a Vector Graph or bitmap to represent moving objects the selected graphic must have more states than the number of states of the Animation component 7 Click OK to complete the setting Read Data Assignment Read Address Object state Read Address 1 Position number on the path The following is an example showing how to use the animation component 6 9 1 Adding an Animation component The settings are as follows Read data LW1 BIN format state control LW 2 BIN format position control No of states 4 Number of positions 4 Selection of state graph State 0 State 1 State 2 State 3 145 Chapter 6 Components state 1 State State 3 F Display current reading value Touch the part area to activate the data input DEGE FE EE ig Enter data by customer tailored keypad 6 9 2 Presetting the screen track nodes 1 When LW10 0 LW20 0 2 When LW1 1 LW20 1 3 When LW10 2 LW20 2 4 When LW1 3 LW20 3 Chapter 6 Components A3 A2 Li Number 6 10 Pt Number Input Component PLC Parts The Number Input component displays the current value of register data from a PLC and can pop up a small keypad for the u
253. ncompile Operate Upload Recipe M User defined recipe length Upload LOGO lt lt BACK NEXT gt gt There are three upload choices Upload User Data Upload Recipe Upload LOGO Upload User data will a upload pkg file which can be used for download but may not allow for editing Upload Recipe will upload a rcp file which will contain any recipe information if any was used in the application Upload LOGO will upload a LOGO file which contains the startup LOGO You can download a logo file to reflect your own logo if necessa Communication Set Communication Type Netto PORT 21645 HMI Information A E User Data must choose O Logo File L Recipe File lt lt BACK NEST gt gt In this example we choose file name aaaa which will be given a file extension of pkg 334 Chapter 12 Security Level Save in jl Kaspro Group d fe Name Date modif Type Size di kaspro_V1 4_Build1132_090518 After clicking Save you will be asked for a password and unless you have made a change the default is 88888 then click OK a a Flash writing please wait ss Cancel When finished the upload you will have a file labed aaaa pkg Now if we again Open the KA Manager and choose the Download option and Download User Data and choose the file we Uploaded earlier aaaa pkg This is the file that will be Downloaded 335 Chapter 12 Security Level Communi
254. nction defined by PLC control part is invoked PLC control PLC or controlled by PLC registers Most components support bit or word addresses Such components as numeric input and scroll bar can perform double word operation Since some PLCs have double word address so the drivers of these PLCs will convert between double word address used in the PLC and word address used in the panel The user has to pay special attention to the operation instructions for PLC drivers 118 Chapter 6 Components Bit State 6 1 P Bit State Lamp Component PLC Parts A Bit State Lamp displays the ON or OFF status of a designated PLC bit address If the bit status is OFF the shape representing state 0 will be displayed If the bit status is ON the shape representing state 1 will be displayed The corresponding label will also be displayed if Use Label is enabled The figure below shows the appearance of an indicator lamp component gt Adding a Bit State Lamp 1 Click the Bit State Lamp icon and drag it to the configuration edit window the component attribute dialog box comes up The fist tab is the Basic Attribute F Graphics Position Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC G HMIO PLC Addr Type LB Addr 0 Addr Type OX Addr Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 1 iz iddr Tag WordNo 7 Description gt Priority Reserved function not used for the tim
255. nector Kaspro m Modicon PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy 172 JNN 210 32 adapter touch screen COM port COMO COM1 8 pin RJ 45 female connector Note When the 172 JNN 210 32 adapter is configured with CPU 171CCS 780 or 171 CCC 780 the RS 485 port on the adapter becomes unavailable For related software and hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by Schneider Electric 5 Communication module NOM 21X 00 applicable to Quantum series PLC RS232 Kaspro l BAR Modicon PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy l NOM 21X 00 series adapter touch screen COM port COMO COM1 9 pin D SUB female connector 380 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 14 6 FACON PLC FATER Connection of FACON FB Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen Fatek Automation KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC PLC Type FACONFB FB com con COMO0 COM1 a Must be the same as the COM Data Bits 7ors port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 or 2 l port settings of the PLC Bits per eee 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Second 57600 115200 port settings of the PLC l l Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity l l parity none port settings of the PLC PLC Station ques Must be the same as the COM No port settings of the PLC PLC software setting Please refer to related PLC
256. nent Attribute dialog box appears There is a function block titled Message Board Select this function block and designate the specific function for the Function Key component 218 Chapter 6 Components Tuponent Attribute Function Key Enable Addr Tag Graphics Position Switch Window Change 0 Framel Keyboard Func Enter a Disable TouchCalibrate mpor Export Import Project To HMI x f Black and hite Tool E Multicolor C PenColor eo es Magnify Multiple 10 E Print Page Curent paper iG eonsl ay H o a i C Pen Width 197779 Clear i Replace Paper f Yertical E T ne Hon Key Component Attribute Function Key Enable Addr Tag Graphics Position i Switch Window Change 0 FrameO Keyboard Func Enter a Disable ping Key TouchCalibrate mport Export import Project To HMI ane Color Black and White Tool Pens Multicolor Magnify Multiple 1 0 Frnt Page f Current paper f Horizontal Replace Paper Vertical Pen Select a pen and then you can write down messages or draw a picture on the message board Erase Erase the contents on the Note Pad Clear Block Clean out the contents in a selected area in the Note Pad 219 Chapter 6 Components 2 Pen Color Set the color of the pen as shown below unction Key Component Attribute Function Key En
257. nent Attribution Basic Attribution Direct Window Position Priority Normal Input Address _ Output Address HMI PLC HMI HMO Addr Type LB Addr 9068 Addr Type Code Type BIN Fomat DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 4 Use Addr Tag WordNo Description DWO 162 Chapter 6 Components a se pieu a E a a a MN Y NGNZ II PARARAARAA A m o Clee B ua e i la a a l AEM Z NZ NZ lI vn i 4 Save the project and compile it Perform the off line simulation The effect of the project is shown in the following figure hello 163 Chapter 6 Components Text Display 6 13 Text Display Component PLC Parts A Text Display component displays the current value of the PLC register data The data is decoded by standard ASCII character table The ASCII code stored in the lower byte is displayed on the left and the one stored in the higher byte is displayed on the right gt Adding a Text Display component 1 Click the Text Display component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the Component attributes dialog box appears Text Display Component Attribute Basic Attribute Fort Graphics Position Priority Normal Change byte order Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC M HI HMIO Addr Type LW Addr 0 Addr Type LW Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 1 E To P
258. ness click Contrast Contrast to adjust the contrast and click Color Color to adjust the color so as to achieve the best camera effect Click the Window Bar and the entire window can be moved You may select to close or minimize the window Note 1 The Video component window does not support offline simulation indirect online simulation or direct online simulation 2 The video window runs above the base window all the time 2 Bitmap 6 32 Bitmap Component Function Parts Bitmap components are a static image used as an illustration or background With this component you can place images already imported into the bitmap library onto the configuration window For details about importing an image to the bitmap library please refer to Section 5 6 The KA SOFTWARE supports the display of images in 65535 colors It can display beautiful and vivid color pictures so that your operator interface looks more detailed How to add a Bitmap component to the window 1 Click the icon and drag it to the window Select a bitmap you want to use from the drop list 245 Chapter 6 Components as shown in the following Graphics Position W Use Bitmap motor 10 bg Use Picture Init Size Click OK adjust the position and size of the bitmap in the window if necessary For details about importing an image to a bitmap library please refer to Section 5 6 Ta 1 wa Vector Graph 6 33 Vector Graph Component F
259. nfo HMI PLC Stati Content nor Delete All A codify lmpart 176 Chapter 6 Components 2 Click the Add button to add message or click the Modify button to modify an existing message Triggered HEI HRI PLE Address HEI Hrallio PLE Mao o Address Type LEB oa Address O Format DOD DO D 4sddress Tag Library Attribute T rigger f OW Use Buzzer Buzzing Time oO T est Content T est Library Text Color A i PLC Address Designate the PLC bit address to trigger the message Attribute Alarm ON Displays alarm message when bit is ON Alarm OFF Displays alarm message when bit is OFF Content Enter the message content and color and the default font size for messages is 16 3 Click OK and the alarm message will be displayed in the Alarm List After entering alarm message you can edit existing message through the Delete and Modify button Click Exit to exit alarm entry Address Info HMI PLC Stati Alarm Content HMIO FLCO 1 High lar HMIC PLCO 1 LB 100 Low Alarm wn Delete Delete Al Modify Import Export In order to improve the communication efficiency it is recommended that a block of continuous PLC bit registers be used for the alarm list For example Use M100 199 to control the display of 177 Chapter 6 Components all messages In this case one read command reads M100 199 all at once instead of one bit at a time A Alarm 6 19 P Alarm D
260. ni Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting KEYENCE PLC Type KV 1000 COM RS232 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the ee Data Bits Tor8 port settings of the controller Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1or2 port settings of the controller Bits per acca 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Second 57600 115200 port settings of the controller l l Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity l l parity none port settings of the controller PLC Station Must be the same as the COM No port settings of the controller Controller software setting Please refer to user manuals provided by Keyence 409 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Reference website hitp Awww keyence com global home page Operable address range PLC Operable Bit Word Address Description Range Type Bt O R 059915 Reay e e oasis o cota ee ee ee eee Le ee ee CTC High speed counter Bit CTC_contact 0 3 comparator Word 0 65534 DDDDD Data memory wua m on om Temoran samenon A e nono Note D indicates decimal notation The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the PLC Some register addresses are reserved by the system and cannot be used For details refer to Keyence KV1000 user manual Detailed wiring diagram Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy KV
261. nt attribute dialog box appears 198 Chapter 6 Components Basic Attribute Event Display Component Position Fronty Mormal Read Address gt Write Address HMI HMO PLC HMI HMIO ddr Type LWW Addr 0 Addr Type Lv Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNa 1 Use Addr Tag WordNo 1 Description Input Address The Input Address controls the scrolling up and down of the event display window All active event messages are sorted by time the new events are displayed on top and the older ones are put on the bottom If the register value is N the number N message of the order of arrival is placed on the first line of the display window Address Type Select the address type corresponding to the meter that is the monitored address type The address type varies with PLC type Alternatively you can also use the internal address type of the HMI panel For internal address types of HMI refer to Section 5 4 Please note that some internal addresses of the HMI are used by the system Do not use these addresses For details refer to Chapter 11 Address The word register address corresponding to the event display component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words The default value is 1 for input address Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the Event Display component
262. nt to multipoint bidirectional communication Since the 4 wire RS 422 interface adopts independent transmission and receiving channels it is unnecessary to control data direction Any necessary handshaking between different devices can be implemented either in software mode XON XOFF handshaking or in hardware mode a pair of independent twisted pairs 341 Chapter 13 Serial Communication T se a c 00000 R 000 00D WN OOOUOUUUU GG O00 RS 422 interfaces support a maximum transmission distance of Gemini Galaxy feet about 1219 meters and a maximum transmission rate of 10 Mb s Where the length of the balanced twisted pair is in inverse proportion to the transmission rate and the maximum transmission distance can be achieved only at the rate of 100 Kb s The maximum transmission rate can be achieved only within a very short distance In general a twisted pair as long as 100 meters can have a maximum transmission rate of 1 Mb s RS 422 needs a terminating resistor while its resistance is equal to the characteristic impedance of the transmission cable The terminating resistor is not required for short distance transmission within 300 meters The terminating resistor is connected to the farthest end of the transmission cable The pinout of the Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy RS 485 4 wire is shown as follows Piano Pinwame beseipton 13 4 RS 485 Since RS 485 is develop
263. nual for detailed information Address The initial address of the word registers corresponding to the text input component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words 1 16 consecutive word registers can be selected for storing the characters Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the text input component 2 Go to the Enable Address tab Enter the trigger address which enables the text input component Using LB9000 will make the text input component always enabled 156 Chapter 6 Components Text Input onent Attribute Basic Attribute Enable Address Fort Graphics Position HMI E PLC No 0 Addr Type LB gt Address 9000 Format DODDO Go to the Font tab Set the attributes of display data Refer to the Numeric input component Go to the Graphics tab Select Vector Graph or bitmap to display the state Click OK key to complete the setting and place the text input component on an appropriate position Note on the Storage Mode of Text Input In this example the Text Input component uses 4 words for 8 characters 1 When the Font Align parameter is set to Left When entering the character A 4 Highest word Word Word 2 Word Word 1 Word Lowest Word 0 Word A a S a a S E AB When entering the character AB Highest word Word Word 2 Word Word 1
264. o be ON after startup the component uses LB9000 as the default trigger address For details about system reserved 148 Chapter 6 Components registers see chapter 11 Basic Attribute Numeric Data Enable Address Font Graphics Position HMI E PLC No 0 Addr Type LB Address S000 Format DODDD Font Size 16 r Font Size Set font size including such options as 8 16 24 32 48 64 72 and 96 Align Applicable only to decimal format that is two data types of Signed integer and Unsigned integer For example set integer digit 5 decimal digit 0 and enter the number 123 The display format covers Align right 123 149 Chapter 6 Components Left 123 Leading zero 00123 5 Go to the Graphics tab Select Vector Graph or bitmap to enhance display effect The graphic selected here can be used as the background of the digits Number Input Component Attribute Basic Attribute Numeric Data Enable Address Font Graphics Postion EV_DISP_BAROO5 vg Graphics State Click OK to complete the setting and place the Numeric Input component in an appropriate position Numeric Display Format 1 Signed integer and unsigned integer Data displayed in decimal format 0 9 Only when these two options are selected will the Engineering data conversion function be enabled The reading value is displayed in its original value and place the decimal point in the
265. o the TERM state For other settings refer to related PLC programming software user manual provided by Koyo Electronics Reference website Http Awww automationdirect com Operable address range PLC Address Operable Range Description Type External input X 0 32767 node External output Y 0 32767 node Internal 0 32767 auxiliary node 0 32767 Counter node 0 32767 Data register 900 ar 000 Note O indicates octal notation Presently KA SOFTWARE does not support some PLC address types They can be translated into the addresses actually supported The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note KOYO Direct Logic series PLCs cover DLO5 DL105 DL205 DL305 and DL405 series The CPUs of all these series can be connected with the Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen 365 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs through the K sequence serial communication protocol and by the RS 232 RS 422 interface on the CPUs Where DL240 DL250 and DL405 series of PLCs can be connected with the touch screen through data communication modules For related software and hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by Koyo Electronics 1 CPU DL05 DL105 DL230 DL240 DL250 DL350 DL450 RS232 Port KOYO PLC Dire
266. oEntry f i White out variable S variable if LW1 R 0 read only LW2 W double LWO R LW1 R Conly write LWO_R return Q LW2_W LW1I_R z The execution principle is as follows Before the module executes the macro it obtains register values of LWO and LW1 and assigns them to the read variables LWO_R and LW1_R and then runs the macro template After the macro function is returned it will write the variable value of LW2_W to LW2 Therefore the macro template inner variable is only a copy of the register Modification of the variable value does not mean modification of a register value A Note 1 The macro template does not read a register value in real time instead it reads the value at the beginning of the macro template operation Therefore during the operation of the macro template changing the register value externally does not affect the operation results of the macro template 2 The value of the macro template is not written in real time Therefore the variable value assigned during the operation of the macro template will be written into the macro template only when the operation comes to an end 3 The read variable is read only and the write variable is write only Therefore assigning value to a read variable or reading the value of a write variable by macrocode is an invalid operation Likewise if an address has to perform read and write operations it must corres
267. odels of Kaspro GEMINI GALAXY and CASTOR series HMI panel are listed here the user should select the proper model in accordance with the actual panel for their project PLC All the PLCs supported by Kaspro HMI panel system are listed here the user should select the proper model in accordance with the actual PLCs for their projects PLC Parts All the parts related to PLC registers are listed here including Bit Setting Part Switch Multi state Display Part Trend Graph Part XY Plot Part Numeric Input Part Text Input part and so on Functional Components Parts for special functions are listed here including Function Key Part Scale Part Alarm Bar Part and Timer Part Usage 1 Connector If you select RS232 or RS485 click the Serial icon drag it to the Project Window If 33 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software you want to use the Ethernet connection click the Ethernet icon then drag it to the Project Window When dragging the icon will appear like a wire After dropping it the wire will stay in the Project Window 2 HMI Identify the model of the actual HMI panel you are currently using click the corresponding icon and drag it to the Project Window eao Make sure that the selected HMI model is consistent with your hardware model 3 PLC Identify the model of PLC currently being used click the corresponding icon and drag it to the Project Window After selecting the PLC HMI and communicati
268. oe O x O 14 Q O Cc 14 O Ke O O 14 O 0b o F E N 7 N E r Ee RSASSSSSSSSSSASSSASASSSSSSSSNS NNSSAASSA SSNS SSAA ANNA 8 NWOSSASSAAS SASS A SSSR N ASS NAASAASSAS SANA AAE VLSAASSSASSS ASSESS ERR S ERS Se NASSAASSA SSAA SSAA NAS pO ONS NASSASSAAS SAR SSN EASES eS Se bee Sheesh ee ee eee Sela e ae NSSAASSAASSA ASSN E A a 88S pS OOS NLSSAASSARSS NESSES RSENS Bs Re NASSAASSA SSSA SSAA SSNS 8 888 pL OS NASSASSAAS SASS S ESSER SS Se eS eh ee ee ae WOSAASSAAS SAS SSN SSSA SSN A888 NRASAASSAS SANS SERNA S RNS VASSAL ASSESS RSS ERS AWOSAASSAAS ASSN S NSS ENRON pS ROLAND NASSASSARS SARS N RSENS Dees eee eo se eel ee See e eae NASSAASSA SSNS SAAN NEN 8 SOA OOOO a AE SSNS SERA S ES SS See eee eee ee ee NVI EA SSAA SSSA AS AAAS EASA S ULAVASA ANAS ESSER SERS RS SALAS SS SERS SESS SERS SSO US ee ee ee eee See ooo AA SERS SOR A Sos P CEERET x select the shape to be filled and then click one of the above fill style icons The To fill a shape method is the same as that for filling a window The only difference is that for a component the line color is the line color of the pattern while the fill color is the pattern background color as shown in the following figure 51 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Status bar nea iit x 302 reer 0 m0 ASB The stats bar shows the current mouse position the width and height of the selected obje
269. ols gt Offline Simulation gt Simulation Thus you can view the switch you have added to the project You may click it to switch between its ON OFF state which acts as the same as a real switch as shown in the following figure 11 If you have set the IP address see page 20 you may use the indirect online simulation 12 Select Tools gt Indirect Online Simulation Using your mouse to control the switch on the screen of your PC you will also be controlling output point QO of the PLC You may use the output of the PLC to change between the ON OFF states of the switch See chapter 3 for the details of simulation 13 Select Tools gt Download 14 After download reset the touch panel and you can control the switch by touching the switch Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project shown on the panel screen with your finger 15 Creating the switch is now completed The creation of other components is similar For details refer to the introduction to related components in Chapter 6 For detailed operations of offline simulation and downloading refer to Chapter 3 23 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Chapter 3 Description of the KA SOFTWARE Interface 3 1 User Interface of KA SOFTWARE Run the KA SOFTWARE create an empty project as described in Chapter 2 The KA SOFTWARE interface will show the contents as seen in the following picture The name and function of each item are described as follows
270. omponents 96 97 Chapter 4 Windows Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE Chapter 5 Design with KA SOFTWARE Some Basic Knowledge 5 1 Designing Components Generally a window contains many components of different kinds such as switches lamps numeric input parts and shape components Components are divided into two species PLC parts and Function Parts They can be found in the Graphic element Window Following a three step procedure the user can add a part to the window gt Process of adding a PLC part 1 Click to select then drag a part icon from the PLC component toolbox to the window editing area 2 After dropping the icon the Component Attribute dialog box of the part appears Set the properties of the part in this dialog box Attributes most frequently used are PLC input output address Vector Graph or bitmap label position and more PLC Parts Bit State Bit State Bit State Setting Lamp Switch ey Direct Multiple Multiple Window State Setting State Display wi ed Multiple Scroll Bar Moving state Switch Component T A A Animation Alarm Trend Curre Display Re i wh AY Plot Bar Picture Mleter E Indirect Window Number Text Display Number Display Input 1 f a a 98 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE Basic Attribute Et State Setting Tag Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address HMI HMI Addr Type Ox Code Type BIN WorndMNo 1 Description
271. on The difference between their pins lies in PIN 7 and PIN 8 COMO is a 9 pin male connector with the pin out definition as follows P1 GND TX TX PC TAD TXD_PLC PC_RXD RXD_PLC RX B RX A DININI 0A o0 COMO MALE PC232 PLC232 NO HARDWARE CONTROL 485 422 COM1 is a 9 pin female connector with the pin out as follows Its difference from COMO is that it s PC _RXD and PC_TXD are replaced with TRS_PLC and CTS_PLC hardware control connected to PLC 232 COM1 FEMALE PLC232 HARDWARE CONTROL 485 422 Chapter 1 Installation of KA SOFTWARE 1 2 2 Ethernet Port The CASTOR and GALAXY L have an adaptive 10M 100M Ethernet networking Port which can implement functions such as Program Download Online Simulation and the interconnection of multiple devices The Ethernet port allows for the following operations 1 Downloading programs from a PC to the HMI The download is much faster than Downloading through an RS232 or USB port 2 Implementing networking and interconnecting to multiple HMIs 3 Implementing communications between the HMI and field equipment The settings of the Ethernet interface are as follows 1 In the Project Window double click the HMI icon and the following dialog box appears ee ECE Lg Siemens 57 200 Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribution Network Setting IP Address Port Number 2008 Di
272. on connection connect them properly Drag the PLC and HMI icon to make the wire ends attach to the ports automatically Clicking and draging the wire ends towards the ports will yield the same result To make sure the connection is established drag the HMI or PLC icon the properly attached wire ends will move with the mouse A Note If there isn t any PLC or HMI in the Project Window the Project File Window and the Project Construct Window will be blank as shown in the following figure 56 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software g aazel ee 2d 422 File Edit E View V Tools T Library D Window wW Help H ir nee Dali s saa io sla allee B a a ae a re Ls Pn Per Po P EE g an Pp Pe m SRL aa wh Bee d E uA g Graph element window The touch HMI Screen and PLE er i image library 3 3 s are blank PLC Parts XYPlot Bar Picture p iy ea ee ee HMI and PLC Meter Recipe Data all blank A S E E Project construct window Event Display Indirect Window 12345 ABC Number Text Display Display Function Parts Ready Mouse x 211 y 8 _ width 72__ Height 73 M I l i Once the PLC and HMI icons have been placed in the project window related information will be displayed in the Project files window and Project construct window as shown in the following figure HMI0 whe aime amp File Edit E View V Tools T Library D Window W Help H o BSA saRBL
273. on simulation screen acts as the actual panel The simulator will exchange data with the PLC via GEMINI GALAXY HMI panel connected to the PC in the indirect mode The data displayed on the simulator screen is the actual data from the PLC registers Using online simulator when debugging the configuration project can save valuable development time The online simulation function has two modes direct and indirect which will be explained in detail in the following paragraphs 3 8 1 Direct Online Simulation In direct online simulation mode the PLC is directly connected to the serial port of PC running the simulator Its merit is that the PLC data can be obtained dynamically without the transfer and possible delay of the HMI panel The user can even create and evaluate the configuration project without an actual panel on hand which can be cost effective for a potential client who only wants test the product for his application The downside is that only a PLC with an RS232 interface can be used in this mode To debug a PLC with an RS485 interface an RS232 to 485 422 interface convertor is required Note 1 The maxim test time for the direct online simulation is 15 minutes After 15 minutes the system will prompt simulation timeout please simulate again and the simulator will shutdown automatically 64 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software 2 Only the RS232 communication mode can be used for direct online simulation
274. open an existing one make sure there is an HMI icon in the Project Window Click the icon on the toolbar or right click HMI icon in the Project Window to enter the Initial Start Window edit window as shown in the following figure 77 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Le Delete Init Start Window Import Recipe Edit g Attribution Graph element window Connector P i Le J Bit Setting Indicator lamp KASPRO k R 0 L F Component amp Switch Direct Window By default there is a logo picture of Kaspro Group in the editing window The user can replace it with the company s logo or other desired picture To import a user defined picture click the k icon on the toolbar and the following dialog box appears T Date modified Type B sound de temp Files of type Graphics File bmp gif jpg Cancel Find your company s logo image and click Open The supported image format is bitmap JPEG image and GIF image and the image to be imported as the logo should not be larger than the size of the panel For Galaxy 56 Galaxy 56T CAStor 56 Castor 57 the size is 320x240 for Galaxy 80 Galaxy 104 Castor 104 the size is 640x480 In the following figures we will use the logo of Kaspro Group as an example 78 Look in Jl KASPRO_ENU_W14 Name Date taken Tags J bg_vg_lib Ub disk i fieldbus uid picture J resource uid win B LockBmp Description of the
275. or internal registers of HMI refer to Section 5 4 Please note that some internal registers of the HMI are reserved by the system Do not use these registers For details refer to Chapter 11 Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words This cell is automatically filled with 4 the user can t change it eUse Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag For details refer to Section 6 35 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the video component 2 Goto the Position tab and adjust the position and size of the Video component if necessary Note Video components can only be placed in a pop up menu They should not be placed in the base window For the window where the Video component is located the Video Page option in the Window Attribute dialog box should be selected Window Attribution window a Frame Ho O Safe Level Lowe i Special Attribute Print page g Eni Position Init Pos 0 i width 1024 Height bo came Use Background Color 1 None 2 None 3 Nome Frame Pop Window Type i Tracking Monopoly i Clipping Coherence Width 0 2 Frame Color An example for using Video Component 1 Create a New Project Select Castor121 or Castor151 as the HMI Any PLC type in the PLC list is supported and can be used In this example we select FACON FB 241 2 Chapter 6 Components FACIN FE Delete Init Start Window
276. oren 0 68 baa General register Timer counter register Timer counter register DDDD General register General register General register Timer counter register PV_Dword 0 255 Timer counter register 0 2047 DDDD General register SR_Dword 0 511 Special register Note D indicates decimal notation H indicates hexadecimal notation and the value range is 0 F The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range 413 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Detailed wiring diagram Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy OEMAX PLC series CPU touch screen RS 232 interface PLC RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector 9 pin D SUB male connector 14 17 ABB 07KR51 PLC Connection of ABB 07KR51 Series PLC with CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC Type ABB 07KRS51 O RS 232 RS232 RS485 beetles be the same as the Data Bits Torg COM port settings of the Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 or 2 COM port settings of the Must be the same as the 9600 19200 38400 l Bits per Second 9600 COM port settings of the 57600 115200 controller Must be the same as the Even parity odd l Parity None l COM port settings of the parity none controller Must be the same as the PLC Station
277. orizontal Vertical Description Set the IP Address and Port No of the touch panel in this dialog box If there is only one touch panel in your design and you will not use the function of indirect online simulation or download the project file to the panel via Ethernet you can simply skip this step If you use functions such as multi HMI interconnection via Ethernet or Ethernet download please allocate a unique IP address to your touch panel according to the actual situations of the LAN Local Area Network If there is no conflict over the network it is recommended not to change the default port number 9 Double click the PLC icon set Station No to be the corresponding PLC station number Siemens 57 200 E PLC Attribution Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project 10 Set connection parameters Double click the HMIO icon to show the HMI Properties window Click the COM1 Settings tab set the parameters of COM1 settings in this window If the PLC is connected to COMO please modify the parameters of COMO in COMO Settings as shown in the following figure PLEO AMT ATH bot OT Print Setting serial Port O Setting Type AS232 PLC Communication Time Out Baud Rate 9600 Protocol Time Out 1 Word Length Protocol Time Out 2 Parity hone Max interval of block pack MORDS Stop Bit 1 Max interval of block pack BlIT S Slave Ho E Max block package size ORDS Max block package size BITS In
278. ors For printing methods please refer to Chapter 10 which details this process 1 2 4 USB Interface Our CASTOR and GEMINI GALAXY provide the user with a high speed USB download option The USB port significantly increases the download speed without the need of knowing the IP address of the target device in advance We recommended using the USB port for downloading For download operations please refer to Section 3 9 Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project Chapter 2 Creating a Simple Project Ease of use is one of the most outstanding advantages of our KA SOFTWARE configuration software In this chapter a step by step instruction creating a simple project containing only one switch control part is provided with the aim of familiarizing the user with the basic project development procedure Obviously more sophisticated projects can be created with similar methods 2 1 New empty Project gt Part 1 New empty project 1 After installing the KA SOFTWARE software find the corresponding executable program under the directory Start gt AIl Programs gt KASPRO gt KASPRO_ENU_ V1 4 gt KA Software and click the KA SOFTWARE icon d KASPRO d0 KASPRO_ENU_V14 Ea KAManager KAPLCAddressView ir KA Software gy Uninstall 2 The following window appears I File F Edit E View V Screen P Draw D PLC Parts P Tools Option O Window W Help H nAg aa a aje p e Ee e l E E E E 4 H e mh HT E fe al Cm BENDAS NEk
279. ouch screen PLC CPU232 port 6 pin DIN COM0 COM1 round female connector 2 Communication module Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COM0 COM1 MITSUBISHI PLC Q series QJ71C24 RS455 interface 363 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs MITSUBISHI PLC Q series QJ71C24 RS232 interface 9 pin D SUB male connector Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COM0 COM1 Koyo Electronics Connection of KOYO Direct Logic Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting KOYO PLC Type DIRECT Set it according to the type of COM COM0 COM 1 RS232 RS485 COM port actually in use Data Bits Stop Bits Pare Data bits for this protocol are or set to 8 in a fixed manner Must be the same as the COM 1or2 port settings of the PLC Bits per Second 9600 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM 364 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 57600 115200 port settings of the PLC Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Odd parity l l parity none port settings of the PLC PLC Station Lagi Set this parameter according to No the recommended settings PLC software setting 1 The security password function must be disabled 2 The COM port must adopt K sequence protocol 3 Set the switch of the CPU with working mode setting switch t
280. ouch the three types of panel area workspace area non workspace area and any undefined area The color will indicate which kinds of area you are touching this can help you touch the correct position 264 Chapter 7 System Parameters Include CPU Lamp The CPU Lamp is a bar graph showing the percentage of CPU resources currently being used If this check box is selected the CPU Lamp will be displayed in the right part of the taskbar as shown in the above figure IncludeAlarmLamp The Alarm lamp is a bar graph showing the percentage of the number of current alarms to the total number of alarms entered in the alarm message If this check box is selected the Alarm Lamp will be displayed in the right part of the taskbar as shown in the above figure Henu Task Bar Include F S Win Determine whether to include the Fast Selection window If this check box is selected the user can use the parts in the Fast Selection window to switch over between different windows If this check box is not selected the Fast Selection window will not appear Background Color Select the background color of the taskbar from any of the following colors or select Custom to configure your own color Background Color Bu Default Color ATE E SmE E S BETES ETENE ET O0 E O AORO Custom Color Undefined Area Color When you touch an undefined touch area that is the area outside the valid touch area of the touchable parts but still within t
281. ouching the Title bar then touching a another position on the screen the window is moved to that place 1 Touch the tile bar of the popup window 2 Touch on the position where the window You want to move Should move to it wil be displayed there Minimize Window If a pop up window on the screen has a Function key set to perform the Minimize Window 215 Chapter 6 Components function when the Function key is pressed the window will be minimized to a window icon on the taskbar at the bottom of the screen A touch on the window icon will maximize the window again A comprehensive example of Function keys related to window manipulation In this section we provide a detailed example containing all the functions related to window manipulation After finishing the application project under the following instructions the user can simulate this project to observe the behavior of these Function keys Also the user can get a better understanding of the basic concepts on using and identifying various window types such as Basic window Fast Select window Common window and Task Bar 1 Create a new project and save it Select any type of PLC for this project doesn t use any PLC register 2 The default project wizard has five windows Basic window 0 Common window 1 with two direct window components for the default number input keypad window 2 as the default Fast Selection window window 3 as the default Number Input keypad and
282. ouse x 234 y 9 window Write PLC PLCO 0 Q Component list window Width SO Height SO R Status bar Library Windows HelptH Basic Toolbarts trl alk 5 CErl 4lk Ckrl Alk 65 Ctrl 4lk P Ctrl 4lk 4 Erl GlE L Ctrl Alt r CErl 4lE T Ctrl 4lk 1 Ctrl 4lE 6 Crrl 4lk D Erl 4lk H Chrl 4alk 0 Ckrl Alt F Cerl AlE M1 Ctrl 4lk E Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Title bar Menu bar The menu bar provides menus for selecting various groups of commands If one of these menus is selected the corresponding dropdown menu appears Each dropdown menu provides a group of related commands Basic toolbar The basic toolbar provides tool icons like Create Project Open Project Cut and Paste For details refer to the icon descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Drawing toolbar Each icon stands for a drawing function as it shows The drawing tools include line tool rectangle tool ellipse circle tool arc tool polygon tool and text tool For detailed information refer to Section 3 1 4 Fill effect toolbar This toolbar provides tools used for filling the screen background or areas within a enclosed barriers such as rectangle ellipse and sector Each icon represents a filling style For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 1 4 Position adjustment toolbar Is used for adjusting the position of components such as Align Top Align Bottom Justify Align right Equal Size Cascade Group f
283. ow you can use it in the configuration window through the bitmap component logo bg Tad Eile Edit E view Tools T Library D Windowiw Help H eR Ai E AE ME N eea AE a EE EE EB pE Yoo sa Bg Bly lm Paice tt DT S Sl Tt we op amp 2 itt tle ALLL LO OE SEJR 10x S Bi tl ieee Svs lt P RR RNEeg Project files window Connector S lamp 17 g a HI NUM_KEY001 vg NUM_DISP_BARO01 Ea NUB_CTRL_BAR001 PLO Parts ss vg LA VG lyvg by la a We ARROW BLUE1 24 b e ARROW BLUE1 23 b Y ii gt SE element window Meter Recipe Data Event Display Indirect window m ae Number Text Display Display Function Parts Message winodow Mouse x 70 y 97 width 100 Height 100 Number 110 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE BGL KASPRO GROUP Use of bitmaps 1 Select a component you want to have use a bitmap open the component attribute dialog box and switch to the Shape tab Bit Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position Use Vector Graphics l l a Use Bitmap KASPRO GROUP M Import Graphics Graphics State 2 Select the Use Bitmap option Select the bg file to be used the prKaspro of the bg is shown on the right Click OK to close the dialog box Import Existing Bitmap Graphics 1 You may import a bg file like the import of a vg file Click the iil icon to show
284. ower left corner of the trend graph and three in the lower right corner They represent the start point time HH MM SS and end point time HH MM SS of the coordinate respectively Where the addresses for them are respectively LW112 LW111 LW110 LW118 LW117 LW116 Numeric setting components are set as follows 192 Chapter 6 Components p Disp zy Con ponen Attribute Basic Attribute Numeric Data Font Graphics Position Data Type signed int Width WORD Minval 0 Max val Variable Max Min Value HMI HMIO Addr Type LW J CodeType BIN Z on Min Value 9 Proportion Conversion Max Value Number Display Component Attribute Basic Attribute Numeric Data Fort Graphics Position The configuration interface after setting is shown as follows 193 Chapter 6 Components De NO D4 NOY NOSNOG PE HE HE Hats dab Ht THO Th Th Tha NEO HE MOZ NDS htt AEE HF Het The operation effect is shown as follows Nenu Task Bar TrA 194 Chapter 6 Components lias 6 21 fetPePsts Recipe Data Component PLC Parts The Recipe Data component can transfer data from the recipe memory of the touch screen to the PLC or from the PLC to the touch screen For details refer to Chapter 8 6 22 Event Entry Event Information Logon Tool Bar Icon When a particular event occurs a corresponding message will be displayed on the screen if it has been registered in the Event Entry List before The message
285. ows selection window If another window is set to be the fast selection window the window should be of the same size as the fast selection window Common window The common window will always be displayed on the screen A component to be always displayed can be placed in the common window Thus you can view the state or operation of the component at any time By default Window 1 is the common window The function key Change Common window can be used to change another window to be the current common window However there is only one current common window Bottom Window A maximum of three underlay windows can be set for the window in the Window Properties dialog box Normally the bottom window is used to store common components shared by multiple windows such as background images graphs titles and more Any window can be set as a bottom window l Window Attribution Window Na Ze No O Safe Level Lowe v Special Attribute Position Use Background Color O 0 Width 320 Height 240 Transparence 0 Bottom window 1 None Frame Pop Window Type v Tracking Monopoly i 0 F Color tii iioa Clipping Coherence As shown in the figure above you can select a bottom layer window for the window in the Bottom Window option A bottom layer window is different from a common window During runtime the components of the bottom window are inserted into the general window but actually this bottom
286. pace Sets equal vertical space for multiple components Flip Vertical Flip up down Flip Horizontal Flip left right Rotate 90 Rotate 90 degrees counter clock wise Tag Position toolbar AAA 43 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Some components have a tag on them By default the tag is in the center of the component But when the component has been stretched or resized the tag may no longer lay in the center To position the tag more precisely click the tag to select it this enables the tag positioning tools The tools listed here are Align the tags to the left to the right to the top to the bottom align horizontal midline and align vertical midline Drawing toolbar Select Se Pr PP at ee E e Be ic PRGB Grayscale switch Line Transparent Color Curve Background Span Point Rectangle Fill Color Rounded Rectangle Line Color Polyline Ellipse Image Polygon Text sector The contents of the drawing toolbar are arranged in the following order Select Selects a single component Straight Line Draws a straight line Curve Draws a curve Rectangle Draws a rectangle Rounded Rectangle Draws a rounded rectangle Polyline Draws a continuous straight line Polygon Draws a polygon Circle Ellipse Draws a circle ellipse Sector Draws a sector Text Adds a text Picture Imports a picture to the bitmap library Line Color Sets the color of a line Fill Color
287. per Second 9600 l 57600 115200 port settings of the PLC Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity l l parity none port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM PLC Station No 1 0 255 l port settings of the PLC PLC software setting Please note that the setting of the PLC station No must be consistent with that of the touch screen software Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of Delta Reference website Http www deltadriver com Operable address range PLC Address Operable Description a Range 0 9999 9999 External External inputnode node 0 9999 r 000 Sie SS External output node 0 9999 DDD Internal auxiliary node 0 9999 DDD Sequence control node 0 9999 Timer node 0 9999 Counter node Counter buffer double word CV2 232 255 32 bits bD 0 9999 DDDD Data register Note D indicates decimal notation O indicates octal notation and the value range is 0 7 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the 398 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram Note DELTA DVP series PLCs covers such models as DVP 14 24 32 60ES00 and DVP XXES01 All of them can be connected with the Kaspro touch screen through the programming communication port on their
288. ph Max and Min Value in X Direction Set the corresponding maximum and minimum values of each track line along the X direction When a read value from the corresponding register is greater than the maximum value or less than the minimum value the maximum value or the minimum value will be displayed on the graph Go to the Position tab and adjust the position and size of the XY graph component if necessary Click OK to complete the setting of the XY plot component 138 Chapter 6 Components i int a iene 6 8 Component Moving Component PLC Parts The Moving Component tool is used to place a Vector Graph or bitmap on the window at a location specified by the PLC register The state and the absolute location of the shape on the window depend on current reading value of three continuous PLC registers Typically the first register controls the state of the component The Second register controls the horizontal position X and the third register controls the vertical position Y X amp Y positionis lt controlled by PLC gt Adding a Moving component 1 Click the Moving component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the Component Attribute dialog box appears qi a ing Com pone it tinbute Basic Attribute Moving Component Tag Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC OR HMI HMO PLC Addr Type LW Add 0 Addr Type LW Code Type BIN Fom
289. ple components have the equal width equal height or equal size press the corresponding icons for adjusting component size or select the related menu items The related E icons are UL HH which respectively indicate equal width equal height and equal size The default component for size reference is the component in the left Adjust other components to be of the same width height or size as this one To designate a component as a reference component press and hold the Shift key to select the reference component and then select the other components 34 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Edit E View Toolsi Library D Wine UndofZ Ctrl z fo Curb Ctrl JA Copic ctrl E Mudge Align Make Same Size width Layer LL Height Align Horizontal Centera Ctrl I Align vertical Center T Ctrl g Select All Component Select Componett A 395 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Edit E Wem ToolkstT LibraryiD Wine H Undotz ctrHz fo Cute Ctrl s S34 Copy c Cbrl c Nudge Align Make Same Size PI width Layer F LL Height Align Horizontal Center S Ctrl I Align Vertical Center It Ctrl g Select All Component Select Componett A Layer If multiple components are overlapped you can use the icons n Top Bottom or sele
290. pond to two different variable names for example LWO corresponds to LWO Rand LWO W 4 A macro template can define temporary variables or arrays or even complex associations However it cannot set global variables or static variables To use a global variable to save data it is necessary to use a local address like LW LB and so on 5 The register used as output must be assigned a value AN Note 1 Modify or delete variables in the macros In the Project File Window find the corresponding macro and enter the macro variable window Select a data type right click and then select to add delete or modify the variable 297 Chapter 9 Macro Code Project files window 2x a galary56 demo As E n eee Double click to enter the macro edit mode 2 sen Arrowl 05 wg ares Arrow S 13 4 wq wees Arrows 13 S 0q ee es ee ms C vr F Te a A deleted variable cannot be recovered so be cautious on this operation 2 Deleting a complete macro file In the Project File Window select a corresponding macro and click Delete Project files window H a galaxy56 demo el HMI 2 HM whe G vector Orap Click to select then press Delete Eneee Bj AA el ek sees B Arrow5 13 4 q i fe AArrow5 13 5 q A deleted macro file cannot be recovered so be cautious on this operation 9 3 Triggering A Macro In the KA SOFTWARE macros can be triggered flexibly in multiple modes Creative use of macro triggering mo
291. ponent 1 Click the Bit State Setting component icon and drag it to the window the Component Attribute dialog box appears The first tab is the Basic Attribute tab Bit State Setting Component Attnbute Basic Attribute Bit State Setting Tag Graphics Position Prionty Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMO 0 HMI HMIQ PLC 0 Addr Type 0x Addr 0 Addr Type Addr 0 Code Type BIN Code Type BIN nn WordNo 1 36 Addr Tac WordNo 7 E Description gt Output Address Bit address of the PLC register whose ON or OFF state is controlled by the bit setting component The HMI field PLC field and Address type field is similar with those of the Indicator lamp component Address Bit address of the register corresponding to the bit setting component Use Address Tag Whether to use the address stored in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the bit setting component 2 Goto the Bit State Setting tab 123 Chapter 6 Components Set On when Window Open Set OF when Window Open Set On when Window Clase Set OF when Window Close Set On when Window Maximized Set OF when Window Maximized Several modes of the function of the bit setting component are listed here as the following table describes Type and Functions of Bit State Setting Components When the Bit State Setting component is touched the correspondin
292. port COM0 COM1 3 pin terminal block Note In the FPO series only FRO CxxCxx models support RS 232 interfaces Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 NAIS FP PLC FP1 FP2 FP2SH FP10SH CPU RS232 COM port Note In the FP1 series only FP1 CxxC models support 9 pin RS 232 interfaces The tool port of the FP10SH can also be used to connect with the touch screen The wiring method is shown in the above figure 2 CPU RS422 485 Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COM0 COM1 NAIS FP PLC FP1 CPU RS422 programming interface Round Hirose 8 Pin Port 396 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Hirose 8 Pin Port Kaspro NAIS FP PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy FP3 CPU RS422 touch screen programming interface COM0 COM1 15 pin D SUB female connector Note For detailed software and hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by Matsushita Electric 14 10 DELTA PLC DELTA ben Connection of DELTA DVP Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting 397 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC mo on DELTA DVP COMO COM1 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the ee Data Bits Tor8 port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1or2 port settings of the PLC l 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Bits
293. process Note The default upload password is 888888 if it has not been set in the HMI attribute dialog box as the following figure shows 426 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for KA Manager HEI Attribute Serial Port O Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Serial Port Z Setting HMI Task Far HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Screen saver Min Saver win Pub Win Ath Display below the basic wit saver end Pop Win Ath Display on the top layer X Min Upload Key 80005 Open backlight if alarming M Uncompile Key 555598 Init Window Frame OLevelKey 250068 Init Macro Public Window 4 Commons Level Rey ooooo Fast sel in 3 factGelen 2LevelRey 888888 Use Buzzer FileList Win TextLiblang 4 Deflang 1 Cursor Color To upload the LOGO file or Recipe file select these two options The Logo and Recipe file are uploaded and stored into the pkg file with the user data in this method kd EAB anaver Akla Communi cation Set Communication Type Hettork IF rien Eaa e AE FORT 21845 ka System Operate Serial H0 NULL Get Version Upload Section Upload U Tat Uncompile Operate E ee eae Upload Recipe User defined recipe length Upload LOGO 427 E3 KAManager ES Download Operate Upload Operate B9 System Operate l Get Version Uncompile Operate Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for KA Manager BOOM Communication Set c3 Save A
294. r B DownLoad Manager H Upload Init windowsi L Download Init Window 1 Upload Project P Uncompile Managert ca Ea La c GA i A Then the following dialog box appears 1 Download through USB cable Compile M Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Butes Download Download Device USB z PC Seral Mo COM ha IF Address Fort 21845 Edit Option Screen Grid Space 20 E ie 20 67 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software A USB cable is included in the package of a CASTOR Gemini Galaxy panel Connect CAS TOR Gemini Galaxy panel to the USB port of the PC with that cable before downloading The USB client port on the GEMINI GALAXY panel can only be used for uploading downloading the configuration package file and the logo file or setting the system parameters of the HMI panel Other USB devices such as printers and USB mass storage devices are not supported When using the USB download cable for the first time the user should install the USB device driver manually Connect the panel and the PC with the cable first power on the panel The Windows OS will report that the system has just found new hardware and the New Hardware Wizard will start as the following figure shows The user can finish the installation by following the instructions below Found New Hardware Wizard Welcome to the Found New Hardware Wizard Windows will search for cument and update
295. r Type LW Code Type BIN Foma DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 5 Description Text Input Component Attribute Basic Attribute Enable Address Font Graphics Position HMI E PLC No 0 z Addr Type LB Address 2000 Format DDDDD The project wizard has a default numeric keyboard on window 3 for numeric value input On Window 1 which is the default common window there are two direct window components They will popup window 3 when there is a touch event on numeric text input component To use a customized keyboard other than the default window 3 please delete the two direct window components If you want all the Numeric Text Input components to use the same keyboard put the direct window component on Common window 1 and make the DW part call the customized keyboard window If you want the Input components on different windows to have their own keyboard put DW part on the window where the Input component is 159 Chapter 6 Components ic E 1 Frmct f se Re 100 gt E T EELEE T ZN 2 Il Sill oe The two DW parts on window 1 They will pop up default window 3 when an input component is pressed Delete them if you want to use customized keyboard 2 Compute the size of the keyboard In this example we will create a keyboard with 10 digit keys all 26 letter Keys and four function keys Clear Backspace Esc and Enter The keyboard has four lines with 10 keys on each line We set the size of one key to be
296. r area in scrolling like a banner moving from the right to the left The messages must be linked to some bit node addresses The messages are scrolled from right to left in order of triggering Alarms continue to scroll until they switch to the inactive state Alarm messages must be entered in the Alarm Entry Alarm Information Logon Tool Bar option component in advance This component is used only to display alarm messages To enter alarm messages the Alarm Entry component is required gt Adding an alarm bar 1 Click the Alarm Bar component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the component appears Alarm Bar Position Moving Step Pixel Moving Rate 10 x100 ms For the moving step and moving speed the higher the value is the quicker the scrolling speed will be Moving Step Distance of a step in each moving operation in the unit of pixels A bigger step distance means faster movement 206 Chapter 6 Components Moving Speed Time interval between two moving operations in the unit of 100 ms Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the alarm display component Example of placing an alarm bar 1 Create a new project Click the Alarm Information Logon component icon to enter the Alarm List Add two alarm 2 messages as shown below Content HMIO PLCO 1 High Alarm oO HMIO FPLCO 1 Low Alarm hil Delete Delete All Modify Import E port 3 Add an alarm b
297. r closed by the bit register specified by the Reading Address The Function Key cannot be used to close the window A Direct Window pops up when the bit register is turned ON and the window closes when the bit register is turned OFF Direct Window Reading Address M10 Window No 20 Bit state toggle Switch Reading Address and Output Address are both M10 174 Chapter 6 Components Address change ON and window appears gt Adding a Direct Window 1 Click the direct window icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the component attribute dialog box appears ent Attribute Basic Attribute Direct Window Position Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC HMI HMIO Addr Type LB Addr 0 Addr Type 0X Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 17 Use Addr Tag WordNo 1 Priority Reserved function not used for the time being input Address Bit in the PLC that activates the direct window Address Type The address type must be properly set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Address The bit address corresponding to the Direct Window component Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the direct window component 175 Chapter 6 Components 2 Go to the Direct w
298. r details of the keypad control bit refer to the notes following the table R 9061 Keypad control bit For usage of LB9060 LB9069 LB9080 and LB9081 refer the pop up of thejto the notes following the table R keypad is controlled by the component in the left part of the window 9062 Keypad control bit R 316 the pop up of the keypad is controlled by the component in the upper left part of 9063 keypad is controlled by the component in the lower left part of 9064 Keypad control bit the pop up of the keypad is controlled by the component in the right part of the window 9065 Keypad control bit the pop up of the keypad is controlled by the component in the right part of the window 9066 Keypad control bit the pop up of the keypad is controlled by the component in the upper right part of the window 9067 Keypad control bit the pop up of the keypad is controlled by the component in the lower right part 9068 keypad is controlled Chapter 11 317 Reserved Register Addresses of the System Chapter 11 Reserved Register Addresses of the System by any component of the window keypad is controlled by any component of the window Keypad control bit the pop up of the keypad is controlled by the component in the upper part of the keypad is controlled by the component in the lower part of the Increase contrast Decrease LCD Set the corresponding bits ON the system will execut
299. r iz Default Lan 1 Upload Key 000000 Save Event Log E 0 Level Key SOg00o Init Addr Init Window Frame 1 Level Kep aooaa Record O Public Window Frame 2 Level Kep 00009 M Use Buzzer Fast sel Win Frame Cursor Color AN Note 1 Amaximum of 16 pop up windows can be opened at the same time A window can only be opened once The function key Close Window cannot close direct or indirect windows since the opening or closing of a direct window is only related to the ON or OFF state of the bit address that controls its switch and the opening or closing of an indirect window is only related to the data content of the word address of the indirect window The function key Close Window cannot change the values of these bit word addresses so it cannot close these windows 4 All pop up windows are attached to the current basic window so when the basic window closes or switches to other basic window the attached pop up windows will be closed either In this case if you switch the window to the basic window previously opened again you may find that the original pop up windows attached to this basic window still exist unless you run related command to close them The basic window must be of the full screen size The fast selection window supports pop up windows but the Truncated feature of the pop up windows invoked by fast selection window can not be selected when setting the property of that pop up window 7 Pop up win
300. r the bitmap or Vector Graph Adjusting Knob Image The adjusting button image to be used for scrolling images including such options as Not Use Use Bitmap and Use Vector Graph If you select the Use Bitmap or Use Vector Graph option select a desirable bitmap or Vector Graph in the Image drop down list box At the same time you can select the corresponding State No for the bitmap or Vector Graph 3 Click OK and adjust the position and size of the scroll bar component Example of Using the Scroll Bar Add a scroll bar component to the Multi page Trend Graph described in Section 6 20 2 Set the output address to LW100 consistent with the scrolling address of the trend graph 215 Chapter 6 Components nent Attribute Basic Attribute Scroll Bar Position Priority Normal Read Address i Write Address _ HMI HMIO HMI HMIO PLC 0 Addr Type LWW Addr Type LW gt Addr 100 Code Type BIN Code Type Format DDDDD WordNo Use Addr Tag WordNo 3 Use Addr Tag Description Basic Attribute Scroll Bar Pasition Index Length Word _ Direction Eat Bar Image r Thumb Image _ Picture Use Vector Dige Thumb Picture Use Vector Dig Image EV_DISP_BAR Image EV_KEYO01 vg StateNo o FE StateNo 0 gt Bar Pic Adjust the length of the Scroll Bar to the same as that of the Trend Graph The configuratio
301. rable address range PLC Address ee Operable Range Description Type System internal external 1 9999 DDDD output node System internal external 1 9999 DDDD input node 1 9999 DDDD Analog input data register B 1 9999 DDDD Data register Note D indicate decimal notation If it is necessary to operate the double word variable select 2 in the corresponding component address properties dialog box The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range 400 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Detailed wiring diagram Note The Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy series touch screens can communicate with the controller through the Modbus RTU protocol so all controllers supporting the Modbus RTU protocol and serial communication can be connected with such touch screens They support 01 05 and 16 commands of the MODBUS RTU protocol For detailed functional commands refer to manuals provided by Modicon For related hardware and software settings refer to the technical manuals provided by related controller manufacturers 1 MODBUS port RS 232 Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 MODBUS RTU controller RS232 COM port 2 MODBUS Port RS422 485 Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 MODBUS RTU controller RS422 485 COM port 40
302. rd Confirm Pop Trig Pop Addr Type Lw Wi Write Data 0 HMI HbO PLC Ho 0 Addr Type LE Address 1 Code Type BIN Use Addr Tag Format DODDD Use Addr Tag Text Attribute Line On Please Inspect Event Trigging L a Font 16 e Test Color Use Test Library Cire Min Value U Masale O Frin MW On Trigger Open Text Library Open Address Tag Library Ok Cancel hen the Print On Trigger check box is selected the system will print out the contents when the value of LWO is less than 2 When the Print Return to Normal check box is selected the system will print out the contents when LBO resumes normal that is greater than or equal to 2 10 5 Printing Failure HMI Attribute Print Setting Tab Printing error detection function is provided in the HMI Attributes Print Settng tab Check Window Errors check box 312 Chapter 10 Print Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Printer EPSON ESC P Print attribute of the Event shows Printer port setting Print Number Print Date Part LPT Print Extend Baud 5600 Print Time E DE andi Print Extend Data Bit g Time d h m oe m Print Standard Time him s none When the printer has an error set LB9016 to ON The LB9017 can control the on off status of the printer When the LB9017 is set to ON the printer will be disabl
303. rent ne MODBUS RTU PLCs COMO0O COM1 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the Data Bits Torg COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 1or2 COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the l 9600 19200 38400 l Bits per Second COM port settings of the 57600 115200 PLC Must be the same as the COM port settings of the PLC PLC Station No Of BE Must be the same as the 389 Even parity odd parity none Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs COM port settings of the PLC Note In the case of Master K 80S series set LG MASTER K300S CPU The Bits per second must be set to 38400 The user can also set LG MASTER K Cnet but shall pay attention to the setting of the DIP switch Only Cnet protocol supports PLC station No PLC software setting Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of LG Industrial Systems Reference website Http Awww lgis com Operable address range Eng on els Sees Description Type Range a 0 255F DDD H Input output node 0 255F DD H Holding node 0 255F DD H Internal auxiliary node 0 255F DD H Link relay node 0 255F DDD H Special relay node 0 255 DDD Timer counter node Note D indicates decimal notation H indicates hexadecimal notation and the value range is 0 F It supports T and C nodes only when LG K10S1 is adopted The operable range in the above table indicates the operabl
304. rigger Prints out message when event is triggered Return to Normal Prints out message when the event returns to normal state 3 Trigger Function Execute Macrocode If the corresponding event is triggered it will execute the macrocode set here Pop Window If a registered event is triggered the corresponding event information will be displayed on the event display area When the information is acknowledged pressed on the screen by the operator the designated window will pop up To close the pop up window place a function key component with the function of closing window Write Data If the corresponding event is triggered it will write O or 1 in the bit address set here or perform NOT operation on the current word value Note The Trigger Function is an optional function If there is no need to use those functions leave the checkbox unselected 4 Text Enter the content of the event message and select font color and size Note Data from internal memory can be embedded in an event message To embed a value use the following format nnd Where is the starting delimiter nn is the internal register LW number 00 99 and d is the ending delimiter For example The content is set as Current temperature value 25d UPPER LIMIT ALARM If LW25 120 then the message will be printed out as Current temperature value 120 UPPER LIMIT ALARM To print out current value of PLC register data you should firs
305. riority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address The address of the PLC word registers to be displayed a maximum of 16 words with each word containing two ASCII characters Address Type The address type must be properly set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Address The initial address of the word registers corresponding to the text display component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words 1 16 optional for input address Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the text display component 2 Goto the Font tab Set the size color and alignment mode of display texts 164 Chapter 6 Components Text Display Component Attribute Basic Attribute Font Graphics Position Font Size 16 ki 3 Click OK to complete the setting and place the text display component in an appropriate position Bar Picture 6 14 Bar Picture Graph Component PLC Parts The Bar Picture Graph component displays the PLC register data as a bar graph in proportion to its value as defined by the maximum value and minimum value settings As shown in the figures below the user can customize bar graphs of any shapes gt Adding a Bar Graph 165 Chapter 6 Components 1 Click the bar graph component icon and drag it to the window the basic attribute tab of
306. ro OMRON PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy CPM1H SCB41 communication touch screen module COM0 COM1 RS 422 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector 350 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Note Only CQM1H CPU51 61 support SCB41 communication module For hardware settings refer to the technical manuals provided by OMRON Connection of OMRON C200H HS ALPHA Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommen Optional Setting Precaution PLC Type OMRON OMRON COMO0 COM COM RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the Data Bits T 7ors COM port settings of the PLC l Must be the same as the Stop Bits 2 1 or 2 l COM port settings of the PLC Bits per FRA 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the Second 57600 115200 COM port settings of the PLC l l Even parity odd Must be the same as the Parity Even parity l l parity none COM port settings of the PLC PLC Station noes Must be the same as the No COM port settings of the PLC PLC software setting Set the communication protocol of the COM port to Hositlink Refer to related PLC programming software user manual of OMRON Reference website HT TP oeiweb omron com oei TechManuals PLC htm Operable address range PLC Address PLC Address Operable Range 0 65535 DDD BB I O and internal 0 65535 DDD BB Holding relay 351 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs AR 0 65535 D
307. rol the Screen Hard Copy operation when LBO changes from OFF to ON the current screen will be printed out Upon the completion of printout the LBO automatically returns to OFF The print format is controlled by LW9054 When the LW9054 are the following numbers it will perform corresponding print operations 0 Print Text Print Meter Print Trend Graph Print All Bitmaps Print all Vector Graphs O A O N gt Print Background Color 10 3 Report Printout Function Project Database PLC Control Component The Report Printout function uses a word address to control the printout of a designated window The printout of the screen starts when the entered value of the word address is a valid window 309 Chapter 10 Print number Upon the completion of printout the value of the word address changes to 0 PLC Control Triggered HRI HMO Heal HID gt PLENo OO Addr Type Lw Address 0 Code Type BIN Format OODOD word Len 1 Use Address Tag Control Type Macro ID Execute Method ON lt gt OFF Open Address Tag Library Cancel As shown in the above figure if the value of LWO is set to 4 the contents in window 4 will be printed out Upon the completion of printout the LWO automatically returns to 0 To print out a window by the Report Printout function the system will not switch to the window to be printed The print format is also controlled by LW9054 For control functions refer to the description
308. rs starting with DM10 to be used to control data transmission Thus first we need to input an entry of PLC Control component to the PLC Control Library select General PLC Control for the type and set the Input Address to 4X10 Next determine the data block size and the address offset Set 4X11 to 30 indicating that the size of the transmitted data block is 30 words Set 4X12 to 86 indicating the source start address of the operation is 4X100 14 86 of the PLC Set 4X13 to 200 indicating the destination address is RW200 0 200 Finally based on the data transmission direction set the Transmission Type code to execute the transmission process 4X10 should be set to 1 indicating that the data of the PLC data block with the set start address will be transmitted to the data block of the recipe memory of the touch screen with the set start address If 4X10 is set to 3 the transmission direction is opposite Likewise the transmission operations in the other two directions are the same and the only difference is that the data memory of the touch screen is changed to the local data register LW Backlight Close This function can be used for closing panel backlight with a bit register When the specified Bit register state is ON the backlight of the panel will be shut off Even if the Bit register is set OFF the backlight will not resume To use a PLC Bit register to l
309. s File F Edit E View V Screen P Draw D PLC Parts P Tools T Option O Window W Help H a ga D ug jS a Hom y Fle Si oa A H E WHE a Bp HRERHea BEAD ASAShnRX GARBER HE Graph element window xf E 3 HMO whe Connector ee HMI PLC PLC Parts A A I Bit State Bit State Setting Lamp lt im Lon Bit State Direct Switch Window ai W Multiple Multiple State Setting State Display n r i tr g Multiple Scroll Bar x Function Parts Project Database Message window 53 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software The Tile Vertical window is shown as follows File F Edit E View V Screen P Draw D PLC Parts P Tools T Option O Window W Help H oe a Bjo g goo A G le ad m mot a H mH Hs gt BHRHa BEAD AAZMHM 6S BEA HE Graph element window x fs com ex Connector HMI PLC PLC Parts A a wis Bit State Bit State Setting Lamp E Bit State Direct Switch Window ai Multiple Multiple State Setting State Display s F ti Lf ULL fs Multiple Scroll Bar iy Function Parts Project Database Message window 3 1 7 Help Users can find the software version information here 3 PLC Parts P Tools T Option Q Window E U g About TEN S E Hiii KASPRO GROUP kA Software Edit Software Version 1 4 0 0 Build 1132 Copyright C 2009 2019 Kaspo Inter Reps ACES Inc All nights reserved COMOL I THOM ee ee oa r
310. s Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the numeric input component 2 Go to the Numeric Data tab Number Input Component Attribute Basic Attribute Numeric Data Enable Address Font Graphics Position Data Type unsignedit Width WORD Integer 4 Decimal 0 Uplimit color Lowlimit color B color ME color flash flash Min val Max val 9999 Addr Type CodeType BIN Foma DOC Proportion Conversion Width J Min Value 0 Max Value 9959 Data Type Control the input format of data including Signed integer Unsigned integer Hex Binary Mask Single float and Double float For details refer to Numeric Display Format later in this section Width Either DWORD double word or WORD single word Integer Set the number of digits to the left of the decimal point Decimal Set the number of digits to the right of the decimal point Proportion Conversion Engineering Data Conversion Applicable only to two data types Signed integer and Unsigned integer 3 Goto the Enable Address tab Enter the trigger bit address which enables the numeric input component Only when the trigger bit address is ON will the numeric input operations be valid Since LB9000 9009 are internal reserved addresses initialized t
311. s Communication Type Ne Save in di galaxy 56 demo e m IP 255 255 254 Name Date modified Type Size di HME di image Serial NO NULL J sound J tar L temp D vwg Upload Section Upload User Data Upload Recipe Upload LOGO name f p User Data Files pkag Click Upload Recipe select a file save path enter a file name and then click Save The Recipe file is uploaded and saved as a separate rcp file in this method Click Upload LOGO select a file save path enter a file name and then click Save The Logo file is uploaded and saved as a separate logo file in this method Note The file name and file save path of the uploaded file are determined by the user 15 4 System Operate system Operate is mainly used for refreshing the embedded OS files and testing Communication parameter setting the same as those described in Download Operate Get IP PORT Information To obtain the IP and port number information of the touch panel only CASTOR series supports this function click Get to display the IP address and port number of the target panel 428 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for KA Manager Communication Set Communication Type Serial pot IP HULL PORTINULL Eo WE PERONIE FORT namaia Uncompile Operate Refresh IF PORT Return Section Refresh Section Return User Application Status Write Kernel Return Set Application Status Write Fiootts lt BACK NEXT gt gt Update
312. s double word registers Alternatively you need not set the value of the first register instead move scroll bar directly with your hand the system will calculate the current browsing index value and write the first word or single word based on the ratio of the position on the whole scroll bar Address The initial address of the word registers corresponding to the scroll bar Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Not necessary for the user to change the setting disabled here Use Address Label Whether to use the address entered in the address label For details refer to Section 6 35 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the scroll bar 214 Chapter 6 Components 2 Goto the Scroll Bar tab Basic Attribute Scroll Bar Position Index Length Word _ Direction From Left To Right Bar Image Thumb Image Bar Picture Not Use Graphi Thumb Ficture Not Use Graphi Image Image StateNo StateNo Index Length Select word or double word Direction Moving direction of the scroll bar including from left to right from right to left from top to bottom from bottom to top Background Picture The background image to be used by the scroll bar including such options as Not Use Use Bitmap and Use Vector Graph If you select the Use Bitmap or Use Vector Graph option select a desirable bitmap or Vector Graph in the Image drop down list box At the same time you can select the corresponding State No fo
313. s 309 MOS R PORT OUT UT cog sscecate cee theecspeee S E E E oueaiee 309 10 4 EVENT PRINTOU Tricki n E 310 TS EPRINTING FAILURE serri E tess cesouerereoaeees 312 CHAPTER 11 RESERVED REGISTER ADDRESSES OF THE SYSTEM e sseesscesssessccsscessoes 314 EOC ET CB e ran E EAE E nile danndioaceeeeanet 314 MWe EOC AA ORD LIN J eE E E E TE 319 11 3 NONVOLATILE LOCAL WORD LW10000 10256 000 0 ccc cccccccccessseecceeesseeeceessseeecesssseeeeensaseees 321 CHAPTER 12 SECURITY LEVEL rere reer er err inoan arenai ee aaiae Tadarida seers 324 CHAPTER 13 SERIAL COMMUNICATION esscessccesscesseesccessocesccesocesccsssoeesccssocssocesscescccssoessesesoe 337 13 1 SERIAL COMMUNICATION ccccccccsssccssccssseecsseecesssecssaeceseeeesseescnsaeeesaeeesssecessascesaeecesaeeeseeeeseaeeees 337 KA Software for Gemini Galaxy and Castor Series Contents Me Fahad a E eat adc es ease ae ee hace Seda dae 338 eS ERG By cso 1727S Pe ee eee ee eS ee 340 ARo 0 Lo eae ee ee Reet ee OSS EE eRe oe eRe ae Ae eee eee eee 342 CHAPTER 14 CONNECTING THE GEMINI GALAXY AND CASTOR cc cssscceseeenees 345 TAO MIRON PEC oprce sce s ic ses ce snncr ct a Netelelsi Aus sen lsu heeahionacatenn Au letotensedeul lal aaceceduunats 345 14 Z NITSUBISHIPEC cae eee te ero ee ee eee a eee ee ee ee ee ree 355 Fs Bes Bf as Wh ga ee orc tm eC E E eo Pr Me 364 WAGE PICEA BRADLEY PEG aaah ae cde a Set ses a EEA 371 NS MODICON PLG issii NE tate eeealuentasdvaasteaedse alienate 376
314. s an indicator of a multi state component gt Procedure of creating a new vector graph 1 Select New Graphics in the Library Menu or click the I icon on the toolbar the following 103 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE dialog box appears Library Dy Window HelptHi Text Labrary T HT Address Tag B ER Alarm Information Logont a 4 Event Information LogOnfE E PLC ControlfP New Graphicsi ICi Import Graphics LabraryiI hi Macrocode NT State Bitmap Width f Vector Graphics Hei ght File Hame el textitext_Ol ive Deseription 2 Name the vector graph select Vector Graphics and enter the number of states that vector graphic has The size of the graphic and the filename can be designated here too For better understanding the user can add a description to the graphic as a note In this example it is named as Lamp with two states Click Create and the following editing window appears Graph element window Connector HMI PLC PLO Parts A A Bit Setting Indicator lamp Component lt aT 7 Switch Direct Window statel 41213 A The user can add more states to the vector graphics after creating them The procedure is described here Double click the vg you want to add states to enter the drawing window Click the icon to add a new state to the current vg A vg can have up to 32 different states 104 gt ere SZ
315. s shown below Select the Execute Macro Instruction option In this way a segment of macrocodes can be executed when a PLC register is set to 1 PLE Control PLE Control ral event Triggered HMI Hbl Hbl PLE Mo Addr Type LE Address Code Type Format OODDD WonrdLlen 1 _ Use Address Tag Control Type Execute Macro Program Macro ID Execute Method Sound Sound ame elect Play Sound Stop Play E Open Address Tag Library OF 5 Event Triggered macro Set the event triggered macro as shown below In this way a segment of macrocodes can be triggered when a condition is satisfied 299 Chapter 9 Macro Code Triggered HI Address HMI HPAI macroa_O c PLC No a Pop up Window O Framed Data Type Bit te c ddr Type LB Write Data m Address o HMI HIT PLC Ho oO Format DODDO CO Addr Type LE Address u Code Type BIN m Format DOODO CO E Text Attribute Event Trigging Cond ad Test Color Min Value a Max Value 0 Print D On Trigger Return to Normal Open Test Library Open Address Tag Library Ok Cancel 9 4 Examples The following sections will present a further explanation on macros with several examples Example 1 Touch Screen Bouncing Ball In this example we use macros to implement the moving of a ball in a display area The ball will be bounced back when it touches the border of the display area The moving speed of the ball can be adjusted Note
316. s the ae Data Bits 7ors port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 or 2 port settings of the PLC l 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Bits per Second 19200 l 57600 115200 port settings of the PLC l l Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity l l parity none port settings of the PLC l Must be the same as the COM PLC Station No 0 255 port settings of the PLC PLC software setting Please note that the setting of the PLC station No must be consistent with that of the touch screen software Operable address range 404 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 9000 9255 Detailed wiring diagram 1 PLC setting When the communication is conducted through the auxiliary interface of the programming device no special setting is required When the communication is conducted through the extended communication module VB 232 or VB 485 it is necessary to set the protocol of the extended communication port to Computer Link set the station No to 0 and set the Bits per second to 19200 2 Wiring diagram 2 1 Communication via auxiliary interface of VB programming device Kaspro VIGOR VB PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Auxiliary interface of touch screen programming device COM0 COM1 4 pin JST 2 0 socket 2 2 Communication via VB 232 extended port VIGOR VB PLC Auxiliary interface of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch
317. s type of 4x to the RW300 address of the recipe memory The implementation process is shown as follows Before upload After upload KAERA Create a new project and select MODBUS RTU for the PLC type Firstly create a component for uploading recipe data Set Address Type to 4x Address to 200 Function to Upload and Data Length to 5 Select the Use Address Tag check box The label content is Upload as shown in the figures below Recipe Compo rent Attribut Basic Attribute Recipe Data Tag Graphics Position Prionty E omal Read Address Write Address HMI HMO 0 HMI HMIO PLC 0 Addr Type LWW F 0 Addr Type 4x Addr 2 Code Tye BIN Code Type BIN Format DDDDD WordNo a WordNo 1 E Cance 277 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Recipe Component Attribute Basic Attribute Recipe Data Tag Graphics Fosition Function Upload from PLC to Recipe pa ing won Place it on the window ET The Recipe Data Transmission component is made but it only indicates that the five words with the starting address of 4x200 shall be transferred to the recipe memory and it does not suggest the specific position in the recipe memory This is where the reserved keyword LW9000 of the system works Set the value of LW9000 to 300 and press Transmission component key The five words with the starting address of 4x200 will be transferred to the position of five words with the starting address of RW300 in the recipe memor
318. s which exceed alarm limits background color and frame color Go to the Graphics tab Select Vector Graph or bitmap to enhance display effect 167 Chapter 6 Components The filled bar percentage is calculated as follows Percentage of filled bar Reading value Min value x 100 Foreground or Max value Min value alarm 4 Click OK and adjust the position and size of the bar graph component Stl Meter 6 15 Meter Component PLC Parts The Meter component displays PLC register data as an analog indicator in proportion to its value as defined by the maximum value and minimum value setting A traditional meter may be composed of three parts gt Procedure to add a Meter 1 Click the Meter component icon and drag it to the window the basic attribute tab of the component attribute dialog box appears Meter JO ent Attribute Basic Attribute Meter Component Fosition Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC G HMI HMIO Addr Type LW Add 0 Addr Type LWW Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 1 ini Priority Reserved function not used for the time being 168 Chapter 6 Components HMI If your project contains two or more HMls select which HMI it belongs to in this list In this way you can directly operate the local address or the address of the connected PLC of any HMI in the same project Input Address The PLC word register address of the value displayed by
319. screen programming device 405 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs COMO0 COM1 4 pin JST 2 0 socket 2 3 Communication via VB 485 extended port Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy VIGOR VB PLC touch screen VB 485 RS 485 PLC RS 485 interface interface 9 pin D SUB male 5 pin terminal block connector EM EMERSON Connection of EMERSON EC20 Series PLC and Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Series Human machine Interface KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting Emerson PLC Type Modbus RS232 RS232 RS485 l Must be the same as the COM Data Bits 7ors port settings of the controller 406 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs l Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 l port settings of the controller Bits per i00 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Second 57600 115200 port settings of the controller l l Even parity odd Must be the same as the COM Parity Even parity l l parity none port settings of the controller PLC Station i Must be the same as the COM No port settings of the controller Controller software setting 1 It is necessary to set the communication protocol of the communication port of the controller to Modbus Slave mode Please refer to user manuals provided by EMERSON Reference website http www emerson com sites Network Power en US Pages ChangeLocation aspx PaqeURL h
320. select various functional parts Project construct window The Project construct window shows the tree relationship between project windows and parts of the PLC and HMI in the entire project with a tree diagram For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 4 o Project files window The Project files window indicates the relationship between the touch panel and bitmap files of the project in tree structure For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 3 p Compile information window For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 5 q Component list window For details refer to the descriptions in Section 3 6 r Status bar The Status bar shows the current mouse position width height of the target object edit status and more s Configuration window The user can draw the configuration in this window A Note To change the color of the fonts and the fill color of the window and rectangles click the Q line color button 3 1 1 The File Menu New Project Select New Project in the File menu or click the icon to create a new project 26 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software HMIO whe File EqitfE View ToolsiT Library EF Open o Ctrl o al Savers Cbrl 5 Save 45 Ctrl alk 5 Ge Save alla Closefic 1 Filbesck_ Ol bext_O1 wpj 2 E aalaa wp 3 dd wpj Quita Enter a project name Press OK a new project will be created Open Project
321. ser to change the register data If the Trigger Address bit is ON once the number input component area is touched the Numeric Input component will be activated for data entry Use the keypad to enter data to be written to the PLC register designated by Input Address This is a very handy tool to use for monitoring and changing PLC register data gt Adding a Number Input Component 1 Click the Numeric Input component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the component attribute dialog box appears Basic Attribute Numeric Data Enable Address Font Graphics Position Priority Nomal Read Address ______ Write Address HMI HMO PLC G HMI HMIO Addr Type LW Add U Addr Type LW Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo Use Addr Tag WordNo ae Priority Reserved function not used for the time being Input Address The starting address of PLC word register to be displayed and modified by numeric input component Data in the register may be interpreted as BIN or BCD format refer 147 Chapter 6 Components to Multi State Display component The No of words is restricted to 1 16 bits or 2 32 bits Address Type The address type must be properly set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Address The PLC word register address corresponding to the numeric input component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 1 or 2 for input addres
322. splay Setting Screen Display Mode Horizontal 2 Set the IP Address and Port No Note that the IP addresses over the same network should not be the same as an example the 192 168 0 xxx IP address where xxx is a number between 0 and 255 Be certain that no two devices on the network share this number 3 After saving the compilation download the IP address of the HMI through the serial port or USB port After download the IP address on the screen will change to the IP address set in the above figure Chapter 1 Installation of KA SOFTWARE Compile amp Download Option xj HMI HMIO Compile I Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Byte Download Download Device LSB r Serial No COM i IP Address 4 If the Ethernet port is used to download the program the IP address should be set to be different from that of the PC To modify the IP address you may turn the two DIP switches in the rear of the touch screen to ON and then reset the HMI to enter the built in SETUP window 5 Click Setting Options in the Tools menu open the compilation download option select Ethernet for the Download Device and set the IP Address and Port No of the touch screen Compile amp Download Option X HMI Compile i HMIO I Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Byte Seral No COM b IP Address Screen Grid Space W 20 B Yo 270 B Note After project download the IP address of the screen wil
323. ssary Click OK key to complete the setting of the switch component 127 Chapter 6 Components ji Multiple State Setting 6 4 Multiple State Setting Component PLC Parts The Multiple State Setting component is also a touch D100 9999 H 1 Click the Multiple State Setting component icon in the PLC Parts window and drag it to the area that when activated writes a word to the designated PLC word register gt Adding a Multiple State Setting component Configuration Edit window the Basic Attribute tab of the Component Attribute dialog box appears Multi State Setting Component Attribute Basic Attribute Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Fosition Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC 0 HMI HMIO PLC Addr Type LWN Addr Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN Code Type BIN Format DODDO WordNo se Addr lac WordNo 1 gt Output Address Address of the PLC word register controlled by the word setting component Address Type The type of the word register the prefix for word address varies with PLC type Address The address of the PLC word register corresponding to the Multi State Setting component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 1 or 2 for word output address single word or double word Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed t
324. ssing modules download upload and system operate The structural diagram is shown as follows KA Manager ee E Select Start gt All Programs gt KASPRO gt KASPRO_ENU_V1 4 gt KA Manager the KA Manager dialog box appears as shown below ji System Operations ES KAManager r Communication Set Download Operate Communication Type Network Upload Operate E E en ce i IF 255 255 255 255 Pont 845 System Operate oa y p Seral NO NULL Get Version Download Section r LOGO Show Set Uncompile Operate Download User Data Shaw LOGO Download Recipe UnShow LOGO Download LOGO 420 Chapter 15 Operation Instructions for KA Manager The section below will give a detailed description of different modules of the KA Manager 15 2 Download Operate Download processing is mainly used for downloading files from a PC to the HMI panel Communication parameters must be properly set before downloading Communication parameter setting Select communication mode the same as the Tools Setting option in the configuration window Please refer to Chapter 3 of this manual for the download description Selecting the communication mode Click Set the Communication Set dialog box appears a Download via Ethernet Valid for CASTOR and GALAXY L only In the setting dialog box select the Ethernet option change the IP address to the IP address of the touch screen do not modify the port number and click
325. ster the system will immediately execute the related transmission After the transmission is completed the register will reset to 0 256 Chapter 6 Components Input Address 1 This indicates the size of the transmitted data block that is the number of words to be transmitted Input Address 2 This indicates the offset of the data register address of the PLC during transmission Please note that this offset is referred to the register located at Input Address 4 as the reference origin For example suppose that we use a MODBUS PLC and the Input Address set for the PLC General Control component is 4X100 and the data in the register 4X102 is 4 the start address of the data block in the PLC during the transmission is 4X108 100 4 4 Input Address 3 This indicates the address offset of the recipe register RW or the local data register LW of the touch screen during transmission The offset is referred to 0 For example in the above example if the data of the register 4X103 is 100 the start address of the data block in the touch screen during the transmission is RW LW 100 0 100 Application examples Suppose that we need a PLC to control the transmission of 30 words from registers starting with 4X10 in the MODBUS PLC to the data block of the same size starting from RW200 in the recipe memory of the touch screen The implementation is described as follows 1 Designate four data registe
326. stores the position When this option is selected the component will move along the X amp Y axis At this time the input maximum minimum X amp Y axis value will be invalid the first register stores the component state the second register stores the X position and the third register stores the Y position X Scaling When this option is selected the component will move 141 eee sss Chapter 6 Components horizontally along the X axis only but the user can set relative movement position by setting input register value limits and scaling value limits for example when the read PLC register value range is 0 1000 but the relative moving position range on the screen is 0 640 The lower and upper limits of the scaling value can be set to 0 and 640 respectively the lower and upper limits of the input value can be set to 0 and 1000 respectively The first register stores the component state and the second register stores the position When this option is selected the component will move horizontally along the Y axis only but the user can set the relative movement position by setting input register value limits and scaling value limits for example when the read PLC register value range is 0 1000 but the relative moving Y Scaling position range on the screen is 0 640 The lower and upper limits of the scaling value can be set to 0 and 640 respectively the lower and upper limits of the input value can be s
327. sts will be returned AS IS to the customer If noncompliance is verified and is not due to customer abuse or the other exceptions described with product warranty Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc will at its option repair or replace the Product returned to it freight prepaid which fail to comply with the foregoing warranty provided Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc is notified of such noncompliance within the two year warranty period Package the unit in its original packaging container or if unavailable any suitable rigid container If a substitute container is used surround the unit with shock absorbing material damage in shipment is not covered by the warranty Include a letter with the unit describing the difficulty and designating a contact person Send to the following address Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc 8345NW 66th Street SW Suite 8498 Miami FL 33166 2626 KA Software for Gemini Galaxy and Castor Series User Manual Introduction Introduction Congratulations on your choice select any of our industrial grade CASTOR GEMINI or GALAXY series Human Machine Interface hereinafter referred to as HMI products The three series of outstanding HMIs connect to a wide range of controllers PLCs drives and other industrial automation equipment Please contact us Support kaspro group com in the event that your product requires a driver currently not supported in our KA configuration software Although we stri
328. t tp www emerson com sites Network Power en US Pages Home aspx This page let s you ae ec System internal external 0 377 output node System internal external 0 377 input node Intermediate auxiliary 0 1999 DDDD a 0 255 DDDD 0 991 o a Se Serene status relay select which country you are from before continuing Operable address range PLC Operable Bit Word Address Range 0 255 DDD Counter TD 0 7999 DDDD Data register 0 255 0 15 407 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs D double 0 3999 DDDD Data register Note O indicates octal notation D indicates decimal notation The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen The actual address in the touch screen shall be 1 greater than the PLC address For example to read MO in the PLC write the address M1 in the touch screen configuration software Detailed wiring diagram 1 Emerson port RS 232 Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Emerson touch screen Controller PLC RS 232 interface RS232 COM port 9 pin D SUB female connector 2 Emerson port 485 Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Emerson touch screen Controller PLC RS 485 port 485 COM port 9 pin D SUB male connector 408 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 14 15 KEYENCE PLC KEYENCE xKevynece Connection of KEYENCE KV1000 Series PLC with CASTOR Gemi
329. t Basic window to a designated register In this way the PLC can know which window is currently displayed on the panel Note When the current Basic window is changed the touch screen will automatically send the number of the new Basic window to the designated word register General PLC Control The General PLC Control function is used to control the data transmission between the PLC and the touch panel using PLC data registers There are four transmission modes 10 PLC gt RW recipe data memory with the type code of 1 2 PLC gt LW local data register of the touch screen with the type code of 2 3 RW recipe data register gt PLC with the type code of 3 4 LW local data register of the touch screen gt PLC with the type code of 4 The detailed descriptions are as follows Select General PLC Control for the Control Type in the PLC Control component setting dialog box and select the type and address of the control data register in the Input Address column which should be in units of words The system will automatically set the four consecutive PLC data registers starting with the Input Address to be the Data Transmission Control Register for controlling the data transmission Their detailed meanings and usage are as follows 1 Input Address Indicates the transmission mode As mentioned above there are four modes This register is used to store the codes of the control type When new control codes are written into the regi
330. t Window limits the area of pop up window The area of pop up window out of the Indirect Window boundary will be truncated The Function Key can be assigned to the window to enable repositioning and minimizing features Refer to Window Bar and Minimize Window in the Function Key Component Section Pop up method for direct and indirect window The window is controlled by a PLC bit Direct Window or word Indirect Window address Once the bit or word address is activated the window pops up When the bit or word changes to 0 the window closes Taskbar If a pop up window has function keys such as Window Bar and Minimize Window 173 Chapter 6 Components whenever a window is popped up an icon will appear on taskbar to represent the window Clicking the window icon on the taskbar will put the corresponding window on the top layer of the screen Double clicking the window s icon will minimize the window and clicking again will restore the window a Direct 6 17 Direct Window Component PLC Parts The Direct Window component places a registered window over the current screen The pop up window is displayed in the area of Direct Window component outline Usually the size of a Direct Window is set the same as those of a pop up window There is no absolute limitation for the maximum number of Direct Windows However at run time up to 16 windows can be displayed simultaneously at a time A Direct Window can only be opened o
331. t assign a data transfer component to move data from the PLC to internal memory LW Click the OK key and the event message will be displayed in the Event List After entering 197 Chapter 6 Components event message you can edit the existing message through the Delete and Modify button Press Exit to exit Event Entry Address Info HMl PLC Condition Content HMIO FLCO 1 Line On Please HMIO PLCO 1 Temp TOO Hig Delete All Modify Import E pork Note In order to improve communication efficiency it is recommended that a block of continuous PLC bit devices be used for the Event Entry component For example Use Bits100 to 199 to control the display of all event messages In this case one read command reads Bits100 to 199 all at once instead of one bit at a time o Event Display 6 23 Event Display Component The Event Display component displays messages in prioritized order in designated windows Various formatting features allow the display of event trigger acknowledge and return to normal times The use of the Real Time Clock RTC or reading time from the PLC is required for proper display of the time This component is only used to display Event Messages To enter an Event Message the Event Entry component Event Information logon found on the Tool Bar is required gt Adding Event Display component 1 Click the Event Display component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the compone
332. t ee a an cr are Ae ta Raat a See ca ae a ce it Mee skeen A cpa 165 OTS MEIER e aana een Oe AOE Te CRANE Ie ENO eterno CeAE Mn POR eee EAS rene Tee aye One eee 168 KA Software for Gemini Galaxy and Castor Series Contents 6 FO INDIRECT WINDOW ote ce ec deen ec aang ace esas ect 170 CT REC VINO ccc terre cece tae E E ae casfocseaeactncee asczatasecnpanecesse cette eter 176 6 18 ALARM ENTRY areata ciresyotirsec eect anaE nE ENEE cena sa EAEAN AEE ecb neti EEEE EEEE eae aia ENERE 178 AARE PA e E E E eee ere 180 2T NEGRA P a E T E ess aascoeanestixo aioe ot seannoiearieencecen 182 o2 ERE OFE DA Tea E E E E eee 189 0 2 EVENT ENTR V ee E E E E E 189 O2 EVF NT OIC Pi e E A E 192 O 2AN ARN BAP a E E E E E E E 206 o2 O IEOS COPE a E nT ee ee ee a rere 208 ON E E A E E EE 212 CeT CROLL BAR rarr n E A E E E E E a S 213 6 28 MESSAGE BOARD ercis sainn e aE a Eaa aA AREA AE E E E EAEE 217 OL IFONC CTION KE Gan e E E 223 BT Igoe E E E E E E E 234 6 31 VIDEO COMPONENTS ONLY APPLICABLE TO CASTOR 121 CASTOR191 ccccccesseeeeseeeees 240 Cg BENAT rere se cee A E de ucccanceceaanecsssacenaas secesondeo cenaeoresenteaceasoaes 245 6 33 VECTOR GRAPH hee aeeee nee mee r ERE ne nee ere ne ne eee 246 O ATE KT IBA eer T E E 247 FO ADORE S SLAR E a E A E E tease taco 250 OPLO CONTROL crnan E E E E T E 253 6 37 ABOUT OVERLAPPING OF COMPONENTS cccccccsssceeesseeceeseceeesseccseeeceeeeeeeeeseeeessseeeeesseeeessaeeeens 259 CHAPIER 7 SYSTEM PARAMETERS ses
333. t error The method used to check errors occurred during transmission is error detection the method used to correct an error after detecting it is called error correction The simplest error detection method is parity check that is an additional odd even parity bit is transferred along with the bits of characters to be transferred Either Odd parity Even parity or No parity may apply 337 Chapter 13 Serial Communication Odd parity Among all bits to be transferred including bits of characters and the parity bit the number of all 1 is an odd number for example In the 8 bit data 01100101 the number of 1 is an even number we append a 1 to change it to an odd number so the parity bit is 1 In the 8 bit data 01100001 the number of 1 is an odd number we append a 0 and it remains to be an odd number so the parity bit is O Even parity Among all bits to be transferred including bits of characters and the parity bit the number of all 1 is an even number for example In the 8 bit data 01100101 the number of 1 is an even number we append a 0 and it remains to be an even number so the parity bit is O In the 8 bit data 01100001 the number of 1 is an odd number we append a 1 to change it to an even number so the parity bit is 1 When the parity check is adopted 1 bit error can be detected but 2 bit or high errors cannot be detected Furthermore detected errors
334. t to the DirectNET Slave mode In addition pay attention to the setting of the communication address For details refer to hardware manuals provided by Koyo Electronics 9 Data communication unit D2 DCM module of DL205 series D4 DCM module of DL405 series RS422 Kaspro KOYO PLC CASTOR Gemini Galaxy DL205 DL405 series DCM unit touch screen RS 422 interface COM0 COM1 25 pin D SUB female connector 370 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 15 23 TX 14 22 TX 9 11 RTS 13 CTS Note Among all PLCs in the DL205 series only DL240 DL250 CPU supports D2 DCM unit All PLCs of the DL405 series support D4 DCM unit Please pay attention to the settings of the DIP switch It must be set to the DirectNET Slave mode In addition pay attention to the setting of the communication address For details refer to hardware manuals provided by Koyo Electronics 14 4 Allen Bradley PLC AB Allen Bradley Rockwell Automation Connection of Allen Bradley Micrologix Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended i l Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC Type AB DF1 Pere Data bits for this protocol are set or to 8 in a fixed manner l Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 1 or 2 l port settings of the PLC l 9600 19200 38400 Must be the same as the COM Bits per Second 19200 l 57600 115200 port settings of the PLC Even
335. ta Set Address Type to RWI Address to 0 and Word No to 5 Set trigger address type to LB and address to 9000 It is shown in the following figure 279 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Basic Attribute Enable Address Fort Graphics Position Nomal Change byte order oo White Address PLC HMI HMIO Addr 0 Addr Type LWW Format DODODD Code Type BIN L Use Addr Tag Code Type BIN Place a keypad The completed project is shown in the figure below RHIO L90000 Save and compile the project run the project in the offline simulation mode Firstly change LW9000 to 300 Since LW9000 indicates the offset of the index address RWIO displays the data of RW300 address as shown below Henu Task Bar 280 Chapter 8 Recipe Data Then enter the text data QWERTYUIOP in the 4x100 text box and click the Upload key The RWIO displays the same data as the 4x100 text box It indicates uploading success as shown in the figure below Nenu Task Bar How to download the five words with the starting address of RW300 to the position with the starting address of 4x200 The following is an example showing the implementation process Add a Recipe Data Transmission component to the above project Set Address Type to 4x Address to 200 Function to Download Data Length to 5 and the label content is Download as shown in the figures below Basic Attribute Recipe Data Tag Graphics Position Priority Norma
336. tab of the Component Attribute dialog box appears hi imponent Attribute Basic Attribute Multi State Switch Tag Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMIQ PLC HMI HMO PLC 0 Addr Type LW Addr 0 Addr Type LW Addr 0 Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN Format DODDD WordNo 1 Use Addr Tag WordNo 1 133 Chapter 6 Components Priority Reserved function not used for the time being gt Input Address PLC register address that controls the state shape and label information of the Multi State switch gt Output Address Address of the PLC register controlled by the Multi State switch Address Type The address type must be properly set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Address The address of the word register corresponding to the Multi State switch The address type must be properly set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 1 or 2 for single word and double word respectively Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the Multi State switch 2 Go to the Multi State Switch tab and set the number of states and dada mapping list for the Multi State switch component The user can set a maximum of 32 states Multi State Switch Component Attribute Basic Attribute Multi State
337. tart addr Indicates the start address from which event log will be saved the event log is saved in the RW Recipe Word registers End addr A calculated value for the ending address About the storage of Event Library Start Addr The address of recipe memory where the storage space for event library begins If the HMI option is selected in the Historic Event tab the system will automatically save the triggered event information in the recipe card The user doesn t need to be concerned about the detail of saving event information The saving procedure is automatically done by the system The event library starts from the address specified in the Start Addr field The default value is O Data saved in the recipe memory includes Event Library Management Information and Event Entry information The Event Library Management information has 30 words and is saved from the Start Addr The event entries are saved after the management information The length of an event entry is 20 words The following example will show the arrangement of memory space for Event Entry Storage 268 Chapter 7 System Parameters Open the Historic Event tab and select HMI as the Save Method as the following figure shows Serial Port 0 Setting SerialPort 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Save Method HMI Save to recipe address Save to other device Outage keeping
338. tch component if necessary 6 Click OK to complete the setting of the multi state switch component 6 7 XY Plot Component PLC Parts The XY Plot component is a curve which shows the relationship between two variables in a vivid way Two neighboring word registers form a pair The lower register contains the value representing the X axis while the higher one corresponds to the Y axis Such a pair of registers represents a sampling point A curve consists of multiple sampling points and must use the same number of register pairs For example Suppose an XY Plot component containing M channels each channel contains N sampling points on each page For this XY Plot on one page the required registers in a PLC cover a continuous area of MxNx2 words as shown below X11 V11 X12 Y12 XIN YAN ees 2 3 XM1 YM15 XMN YMN Note For X and Yj the subscript i indicates channel number and j indicates sampling point Xj indicates the horizontal axis value of the sampling point j in the channel i gt Adding an XY Plot component 1 Click the XY Plot icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the Component Attribute dialog box appears 135 Chapter 6 Components XY Graph Component Attribute Basic Attribute XY Graphics Channel Save Historic Data Print Print Trig Line Position Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC HMI HMIO Addr Type LWW Add 0 Addr Type LW Code
339. tch to the Graphics tab and select the Use Vector Graphics check box Select a desired shape The switch shown in the following figure is selected For the making of the Vector Graph refer to Chapter 5 bit setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Bit State Setting Taz Graphics Position Use Vector Graphics Use Bitmap Import Graphics Graphics State 0 7 Switch to the Position tab There are four input boxes showing the position and size of the part The Left input box holds the horizontal position of the upper left corner of the part the Upper input box holds the vertical position of that corner and the resolution of these input boxes is in pixels The origin of the screen is the upper left corner So the Left value should not exceed the width of the screen and the Upper value should not exceed the length For a screen of the resolution of 320 240 the maxim of left is 319 and the maxim of upper is 239 Width is the width of the part shown in the screen and Length is the length of it 2l Chapter 2 Making a Simple Project Also the maximum of these two input boxes should not exceed the size of the screen 8 Click OK to close the dialog box The component in place is shown as follows 9 Select File gt Save on the menu bar then select the menu Tools gt Compile If no error occurs during the compilation the project is completed 10 Select To
340. the PLC Must be the same as Parity Odd parity Even parity odd parity none the COM port settings of the PLC Must be the same as PLC Station N 0 255 the COM port settings O of the PLC PLC software setting Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of MITSUBISHI Reference website HT TP www mitsubishi automation com Operable address range PLC Operable zoe Address Description Range Type 0 77F h External input node 0 7 7F h External output node Internal input auxiliary 0 8191 dddd node hh hh om pe e o om fe Reng nernode esti fe Ran ner cot CA C C om pa omera 362 eo oe h Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 0 2047 dddd Single step relay 0 7FF Direct access input 00 7FF Direct access output O 7FF hhh Link register 0 511 ddd Current value of timer Current value of holding SN 0 511 timer 0 51 511 ddd Current value of counter value of counter a 0 32767 aN Daseinin aion register 0 3FF hhhh File register a 0 3FF ddddd Data register Note D indicates decimal notation O indicates octal notation and the value range is 0 7 The operable range in the above table indicates the operable range of the CASTOR Geminii Galaxy touch screen The actual range of the PLC may be broader or narrower than this range Detailed wiring diagram 1 CPU Kaspro MITSUBISHI PLC Q series CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Q00 Q01 t
341. the component PLC Select a PLC If this HMI is connected with more than one PLC select the PLC corresponding to the input address Address Type Select the address type corresponding to the meter that is the monitored address type The address type varies with PLC type Alternatively you can also use the internal address type of the HMI panel For internal address types of HMI refer to Section 5 4 Please note that some internal addresses of the HMI are used by the system Do not use these addresses For details refer to Chapter 11 Address The initial address of the word registers corresponding to the meter Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 1 or 2 for input address Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the Meter component 2 Goto the Meter Component tab a Basic Attribute Meter Component Position Dial Style Pie Indicator Style Line Max 1 Min 0 Dial Style Round Pointer up pointer down sector Pie Max Value Min Value Set the maximum value and minimum value to be displayed by the meter component Pointer Line shape or diamond shape The following figure shows the effect of the meter with a line pointer and a diamond pointer 169 Chapter 6 Components working with dial component Pointer Color Select the color of the pointer Dial style
342. the component If there are multiple lines press the Enter key to start a new line Font Size The variable font size range is 8 16 24 32 48 64 72 and 96 pixels Alignment If the text input of a label exceeds two lines Left Right or Center can be selected for the alignment of the multiple lines Color The user can select from a palette of 40 frequently used colors among 65536 colors The Primary Color palette includes the most frequently used colors The Custom palette allows the user to customize a palette there are 65536 optional colors B Color Default Color EEREEEEEE EESE oe EO E SEE E f O0 EOS MM E m O EO mE COL Custom Color 5 8 Taskbar and Task Buttons The KA Sofware Interafce provides a simple method for window actions such as pop up or minimize change the display or quickly switchover between windows All these can be done within 113 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE a taskbar The taskbar provides two task buttons one is used to control the Fast Selection window and the other is used to control the taskbar itself In the HMI Attribute dialog box in the project window double click the HMI icon or right click and select Attribute to open it the user can set the taskbar including whether to use the Fast selection window color position and other related properties By default all the items in the taskbar are selected Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Se
343. the increase or decrease of the Input Address value The actual Alarm Display component AD_0 is placed on top of the Vector Graph The alarm messages appear in the Alarm Display when the system runs The effect diagram is shown as follows 179 Chapter 6 Components Menu Task Bar TOP P Trend Curve 6 20 Trend Curve Component PLC Parts The Trend Curve component periodically retrieves a block of PLC data and displays the trend data over time As each sampling period elapses the new data is read from the PLC and inserted towards the right side of the trend graph The trend graph is retrieved on a real time basis Yield Efficiency Vectogram background Scales Trend Graph The newest data is inserted into the left side and the track is shifted right Hinutes 180 Chapter 6 Components An example of a typical trend curve is shown as the above A Vector Graph is used for the background and scales are added to show relative information about the trend The trend graph is then placed on top of the Vector Graph gt Procedure to add Trend Curve 1 Click the Trend Curve component icon and drag it to the window the Basic Attribute tab of the component attribute dialog box appears Trend Graph Component Attribute Print Print Trig Line Position Basic Attribute Trend Graphics Channel Save Historic Data Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMO PLC HMI HMO PLC Addr Type L
344. three components 2 scale components and 1 trend graph must be the same and they must be overlapped with each other as shown in the figure below 184 Chapter 6 Components TEI Add four Number Display components to display the values of LWO LW1 LW2 and LW3 respectively Timer Add four Timer Components Function Parts to perform periodic circulation for the data of LWO LW1 LW2 and LW3 respectively The corresponding minimum value is O and corresponding maximum values are 500 1000 1500 and 2000 respectively The step length is 10 and cycle time is 0 5 second Take data control of LWO for example as shown in the figure below for details about Timer Component refer to 6 30 Timer Timer Function Position Basic Attribute Trigger Address Trigger Mode Mtm IN HMI Exe Cycde 100ms A100ms PLC No Response Mode hi Address Type Response State OF Address Repeat Times Zero means repeat all along 185 Chapter 6 Components Timer Component Attribute Timer Timer Function Position Execute Macro C Data Transfer pet Mode SGAE Source Destination Set Address HMI HMIO Data Type HMI HMO HMI HMIO FPLC No 0 PLC No PLC No 0 Word Len idr Type LE idr Type LE Addr Type Addr Type hee IW Step Address Akke ai CodeType BIN Lower Address 0 Upper R Data Type Bit Data Len The display effect of window 0 after completing editing is shown as follows
345. ties If Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc is unable to repair or replace a nonconforming Product it may offer a refund of the amount paid to Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc for such Product in full satisfaction of its warranty obligation Maximum liability of Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc is the cost of the Product Information furnished by Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc Inc is believed to be accurate and reliable However no responsibility is assumed by Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc for the use of this information or for any infringements of patents or other rights of third parties which may result from its use No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent or patent rights of Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc retains the right to revise or change its products and documentation at any time without notice Warranty Repair Service Only Products that have been issued a Return Material Authorization RMA number from Kaspro Group Inter Reps ACES Inc may be returned All RMAs must be accompanied with a written purchase order for tracking purposes or in the case of out of warranty repairs for repair charges on a time and material basis All returns will be tested to verify customer claims of noncompliance with the product warranty Improper return packaging which makes verification impossible will void the warranty Products passing the te
346. tion 6 1 Indicator Lamp Section 6 2 Bit Setting Component section 6 4 Multi State Setting and Section 6 11 Numeric Display in Chapter 6 Example 2 This is an example of pop up keypad window for number entry In many cases we need to conduct write operations for registers If the keypad is fixed on the current window it will occupy too much screen area greatly reducing the current window design space of the project In this example we use the direct pop up window method to solve this problem Assume that LWO is the register needing an input operation J N Note The KA SOFTWARE interface has a keypad in Window 3 which can be directly invoked so you do not have to create a keypad by yourself each time To create your own keypad please refer to chapter 6 91 Chapter 4 Windows Create a new project or open an existing one Enter the window editing mode Create a numeric input component with the Address Type set to LW Address to 0 Address Type in the Trigger Address tab set to LB and Address in the Trigger Address tab set to 9000 by default Data Input Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphics Position Priority v Input Address Output Address HMI HMIO PLC HMI HMIO PLC Addr Type Lw Add 0 ddr Type Addr Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN Fomat DDDDD WordNo 1 E Ad j WordNo Description NIO Data Inp
347. tion in the Components and Function keys part in Chapter 6 gt Procedure of setting task buttons In the project window double click HMI to show the HMI Attribute setting dialog box Open the Taskbar tab check the Display Taskbar option The user can set the position of the task buttons to the right or to the left The label content of the task buttons can be changed in the corresponding edit box Background color and alignment of the text can be set in the dialog box also If the labels of the two task buttons can not be fully displayed try to adjust the button area size and the font size of the text 115 Chapter5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE Seral Port 0 Setting Seral Port 1 Setting Seral Port 2 Setting HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Button Position Align left Align left Use Touch Contral Hide Task Bar Include CPU Lamp Task Bar Include Alan Lamp Include F S Vvin F EE coor Button Area Size Width A Note During operation the Fast Selection window is displayed in the left or right of the screen In the edit window state the Fast Selection window is an independent window Window 2 serves as the Fast Selection window by default For detailed descriptions about the Taskbar please refer to Section 7 2 116 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE 117 Chapter 6 Components Chapter6 Components Parts Components Parts are designed to meet specific req
348. tion key and the system changes to window 5 If the user enters the value 0 in the Change Level frame the current security level changes to 0 immediately and then the system cannot switch to window 5 as shown in the figure below 332 Chapter 12 Security Level Window 8 hange to Window 5 Menu Task Bar The design of different passwords for different security levels assigns different operation authorities to different operators which enhances the security of the application system Upload password To set the Upload password open the HMI attribute dialog box set the password for the Upload Key HMI Attribute Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Pub Win Attr Display below the basic wir Iw Use ong win if screen saver ends Pop Win Atr Display on the top layer ha W Back light energy save 10 Min Open backlight if alaming Init Window Frame Public Window 4 Ccommon VW Fast sel Win 2 Fast Seleci on ES as FileList Win 0 FrameO TextLiblang 4 Deflang 1 z Cursor Color r Open the KA Manager and set up the Upload for a USB transfer for this example 333 Chapter 12 Security Level r Communication Set ES Download Operate SS Communication Type USB port Upload Operate IP Au PORT NULL ES System Operate Upload Section Get Version gt gt U
349. tions Cut The selected text will be cut to the memory for future paste operations Paste If there is any text stored in the memory it will be pasted to the current cursor position If the text exceeds the limit of the textbook the exceeding part will be truncated The following figure shows a project screen using a Textbook component left Ze start Finish Line fLine aa Nenu Task Bar Tip 4 Attributes of the Note Book Component The Note Book Component has some special attributes as the following figure shows Attrib te Basic Attribute Notepad Font Enable Address Graphics Position Total Lines 4 Display Lines Words Line per word contains two ASCII characters Total Lines This value indicates the total of lines of the Notebook component Display Lines This value indicates the number of lines displayed on the screen the user can use LW9170 to scroll pages if the Display Lines value is less than the Total Lines value The value of the LW9170 register indicates which line is displayed as the first line in the Textbook input area By changing the value the user can scroll pages of the Textbook component Words Line Number of words per line must be an even number A word corresponds to two ASCII characters 262 Chapter 7 System Parameters Chapter 7 System Parameters The panel attributes must be properly set before it will function correctly if at all In this chapter we introduce th
350. to make any change to the screen the user can use the Undo Redo function As shown in the following figure add a switch component to the screen Press Undo The switch part disappears leaving a blank screen Then click Redo The switch re appears A Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software The software supports the Undo Redo operation of the latest ONE operation Cut copy paste and delete Select one or more components you can conduct such operations as Cut Copy and Paste Their corresponding icons are A ma ag Their demonstration is omitted here Nudge Select a part the position of the object can be adjusted by using the Nudge tools or you can use the Nudge icon to move the component Every time when you click Tune the component will move by the distance of one pixel Its corresponding icons are a respectively indicating Move Left by One Pixel Move Right by One Pixel Move Up by One Pixel and Move Down by One Pixel which correspond to the contents of the Nudge in the Edit menu one by one A simple method to use the Nudge function is to use the direction keys of the keypad to move the component conveniently Edit E Viewty Tools T Library D UndotlZ Ctrl 2 fo Curb Ctrl JA Copic Cbrl Align Make Same Size Laver Align Horizontal Centeria Ctrl I Align vertical Center T Ctrl
351. tor 151 PLC Parts Video components are used for real time monitoring They can be used for real time monitoring on industrial fields g Video 1 Click the icon drag it to the window and the Basic Attribute tab of the Video Component Properties dialog box appears Video Frequency Component Attribution Basic Attribution Position Priority Input Address Output Address HHI HMId PLC HMI FLE Addr Type Lw Addr 0 Addr Type Addr Code Type BIN Format DODDO Code Type Format DODO Word ie 3 WordNo ia Description OO Input Address Four consecutive word registers are used for save parameters of the Video component The Input Address indicates the starting address of those word registers The first word indicates channel switching the two channels are Channel 0 and Channel 1 the second word indicates brightness adjustment adjustable range 0 255 the third word indicates the contrast adjustment adjustable range 0 255 and the fourth word indicates chroma adjustment adjustable range 0 25 240 Chapter 6 Components Address The starting offset address of the word register corresponding to a Video component Address Type Select the address type of the register corresponding to the oscilloscope that is the monitored register s address type The address type varies with PLC type Alternatively you can also use the internal register of the HMI F
352. touch screen COMO0 COM1 FACON FB PLC FB DTBR DTBR E communication module RS 232 interface 15 pin D SUB female connector 3 Communication module FB DTBR DTBR E 4 Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 FACON FB PLC FB DTBR DTBR E communication module RS 232 interface 9 pin D SUB female connector Communication module FB DTBR DTBR E Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy touch screen COMO0 COM1 383 FACON FB PLC FB DTBR DTBR E communication module RS 485 port 3 pin terminal block Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 14 7 SIEMENS PLC SI EM ENS Siemens Automation Connection of SIEMENS 7200 Series PLC with Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC ar SIEMENS S7 200 enn COMO COM1 RS232 RS485 Data bits a this protocol Data Bits 7or8s are set to 8 in a fixed Must be the same as the Stop Bits 1 or2 COM port settings of the PLC 9600 19200 38400 Bits per Second COM port settings of the 57600 115200 Le l Must be the same as the Even parity odd l Parity Even parity l COM port settings of the parity none PLC Must adopt the PLC Station No 0 255 l recommended settings PLC software setting Set PLC address to 2 Please refer to related PLC programming software user manual of SIEMENS Must be the same as the 384 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CA
353. tting Seral Port 2 Setting Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Backround Color Button Postion Align left Ii Use Touwch Control E Undefined Area Color Text Align Align left 7 incide CPU Lamp E CPU Lamp Color Hide F S Window Hide Task Bar Iw Include Alarm Lamp EE Alam Lamp Coor Menu a Task Bar Ih Include F S Win EEC Lamp Frame Color A Hic un Workspace Color 4 i MTC Workspace Color BE Color E Color Button Area Size Width 125 Height 20 Font 16 Font 16 a If Include Fast Selection Window labeled as Include F S Window is selected click the Fast Selection window button in the left a Fast Selection window appears This window provides some function keys placed by the user for switching to different windows Since the Fast Selection window is always displayed in all screens it can be invoked anytime To switch to a specific window touch the function key pointing to the destination window in this way the process of monotonous window searching can be avoided 114 Chapter 5 Basic Design of KA SOFTWARE Nenu Task Bar The taskbar can include a maximum of 16 window icons at the same time Double click the Minimize icon and the related pop up window will be minimized clicking this icon again will retrieve the minimized window to original state Pop up window with the function keys Minimize Window and Window Bar can be minimized to the taskbar Refer to the descrip
354. tting Mode to Add Value the Inc Value to 8 the Upper Limit to 255 value range 0 255 and the Tag set to Contrast 9 Place a word setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 2 the Setting Mode to Sub Value the Dec value to 8 the Lower Limit to 0 and the Tag set to Contrast 10 Place a word setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 3 the Setting Mode to Add Value the Inc Value to 8 the Upper Limit to 255 value range 0 255 and the Tag set to Chroma 11 Place a word setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 3 the Setting Mode to Sub Value the Dec value to 8 the Lower Limit to 0 and the Tag set to Chroma 12 Place a Function key component and set it as a Pop Window Title Bar See 6 29 for details 13 Place a Function key component and set it as a Minimize window See 6 29 for details 14 Place a Function key component and set it as a Close window See 6 29 for details The completed window 4 is shown as follows 244 Chapter 6 Components Video Window Br ightnes m Contrast Menu Bar ideo Window Install a camera properly download the project to the HMI click Channel Channel to switch between channels 0 and 1 click Brightness Brightness to adjust the bright
355. tting of Port 1 Setting of Port 0 is the same Type Select the communication mode of the touch panel and the PLC including such options as RS232 RS485 2W and RS485 4W Baud Rate Word Length Parity and Stop Bits Set the basic communication parameters matching the same parameters in the PLC communications setup Slave No In most cases the touch panel is the master station and the PLC serves as the slave station and this parameter is invalid then When the touch panel serves as the slave station while the PLC serves as the master station for example selecting the MODBUS SLAVE protocol set the slave station number for the panel here PLC Communication Timeout This parameter determines the time used by the touch screen for waiting for the response of the PLC When the delay for the communication between the PLC and the touch panel is longer than the timeout time the touch panel will display the message PLC NO RESPONSE In general this parameter is set automatically when the user selects a PLC model so it is not necessary for the user to set it in most cases Protocol Timeout Time 1 and 2 Communication protocol timeout time in general this parameter is set automatically when the user selects a PLC so it is not necessary for the user to set it Max interval of block pack WORDS Max interval of block pack BITS Max block package size WORDS Max block package size BITS The touch panel HMI will
356. two packages thus communication time is saved 212 Chapter 7 System Parameters A Note Set the ports according to the actual connection For example if the PLC is going to be connected to COMO of the HMI set the parameters of COMO in the HMI Attribute dialog box HMI Attribute HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting PLC Communication Time Out Baud Rate Protocol Time Out 1 ms Data Protocol Time Out Ams Max interval of block pack WORDS Max interval of black pack BITS Max block package size WORDS Max block package size BITS Parity even Stop Bit 1 Slave No 0 kK takes effect when HMI as slave A Note In general do not modify the parameters in the right column as shown below unless you are an advanced user and it is necessary to adjust them Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting PLC Communication Time Out Protocol Time Out 1 ms Protocol Time Out Ams Max interval of block pack WORDS Max interval of block pack BITS Max block package size WORDS Max block package size BITS Slave No t takes effect when HMI as slave 213 Chapter 7 System Parameters 7 7 PLC Station No Double click the PLC icon in the project window the following window appears Where the user can set PLC station No The value here must be the
357. u can view the print window in the PLC Monitor of the online simulation offline simulation and indirect online simulation auxiliary functions as shown below Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Printer EPSON ESC P z Print attribute of the Event shows Printer port setting Print Number Print Date Port D _ Print Extend Print Time Date fawy mm dd Print Extend ane E Timegihm Check Window Errors Print Standard Time h m s CASTOR Gemini Galaxy models support the connection with ERSON ESC P2 printers or other compatible printers CAS TOR Gemini Galaxy models support the following print modes Print text Print pointer Print trend graph Print all bitmaps Print all Vector Graphs oF eS YS Print background color The print function may be used in the following circumstances Function key Screen Printout and Report Output controlled by PLC and Event Print as detailed below 307 Chapter 10 Print Function Key 10 1 Function Key Function Parts Click the Function Key and the following window appears In the window select the Print option _ Function Key Component Attribute Function Key Enable Addr Tag Graphics Pasition C Switch Window Change 0 FrameD O Keyboard Func Enter a 0 Map Keyboan Disable E TouchCalibrate E m Import Project To HMI C Message Board ae f Bla
358. u should check your manufacturer s website for updated driver software for your device Install this driver software anyway Only install driver software obtained from your manufacturer s website or disc Unsigned software from other sources may harm your computer or steal information v See details Select Install this driver anyway 3 Click Finish to complete the installation 4 Torun the program find the executable program under the directory of Start gt All Programs gt KASPRO gt KASPRO_ENU_ V1 4 gt KA Software Or simply select the icon added to your desktop rE kAManager Chapter 1 Installation of KA SOFTWARE 1 2 Interface Diagram The COMO COM 1 ports in CASTOR and GEMINI GALAXY can be connected to a PC or a PLC The CASTOR and GEMINI GALAXY have very powerful communication capability The CASTOR provides one Ethernet port the GEMINI and GALAXY basic models do not have an Ethernet port one USB port one printer port and two serial ports This enables the CASTOR GEMINI and GALAXY to communicate with most devices having communications capability giving the CASTOR GEMINI and GALAXY the ability to be deployed in a wide range of applications These interfaces will be described one by one in the following sections 1 2 1 Serial Ports Presently the CASTOR GALAXY has two serial ports marked COMO and COM1 The two ports are respectively male and female connectors for the convenience of differentiati
359. uB 44166 4164 LW9608 ADD 234 mra Overlay LHO ADD Nenu Task Bar We can see that the data of 4x100 changes to KKKKKKKkK 1234 The change in the memory is shown as follows Temp worm mwa 4x100 4x103 KKKKKKKK 4x104 1234 After learning the preparation process of this project we should learn the basic project design of recipe data The user can make full use of the diversified features of the KA SOFTWARE configuration interface to produce better projects 290 Chapter 9 Macro Code Chapter 9 Macro Code Macro instructions are a kind of advanced touch screen control method which strengthens the functions of the touch screen The touch screen will have the same logic and arithmetic operations as the PLC by the programming of macros Flexible use of macros will enable the touch screen to implement many powerful functions that cannot be supported by many regular components and to make your human machine interfaces more perfect The KA SOFTWARE provides totally new macros different from the macro script language modes of other human machine interfaces The macro is fully compatible with standard C language ANSI C89 Since abundant documents and data on the C language are easily available this chapter will not describe syntax and basic knowledge of the C language Instead it focuses on the creation and usage of macros through examples 9 1 Getting started A Simple Macro Template The following sectio
360. uch screen Anyway please make sure that your PC allows the use of this port The setting procedure for the PC port is as follows Network Connections right click gt Properties gt Local Area Connection right click gt Properties gt Internet Protocol TCP IP gt Properties gt Advanced gt Options gt Enable TCP IP Filtering gt Properties A Caution 1 Normally the port number does not need modification To change the port number the port number in the Download Way option in the Tools menu should not be the same as that in the Project Structure Window and HMI Properties as shown in the following figure 73 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software DAIA E Tools T Option o Window w Help H F Da cCompile c Ctrl F7 IP Addr Port Protocol _ Master Sla Virtual PLC EG Compile A R gt e Da Clear Build Result E Ctri 1 Download D Ctrl D Dene es omi Z PLC Communication Setting DownLoad Way A Alt F7 g PLC Communication Type fa Offline Simulation F Device NO PLC Communication Tine Ou E T iinan fi Indirect Online Simulation I Shift F5 IP Address 192 168 0 253 Protocol Time Out 1 ms Protocol Time Out 2 ms Port Num 2008 Max interval of word block pack Compil Max interval of bit block pack ee Comm Protocol KA Protocol z Max word block package size V Compress Bitmap Size gt 1024 Bytes Max bit block package size Station NO 1 Download O
361. uirements In general a component is designed to implement one function However some components have to be used with other components and objects or a PLC to implement specific functions as shown in the table below Related fee Component Description Component Object Numeric Input Function key Keypad created by Function key Text Input Function key Keypad created by Function key l l l Indirect window part must point to an existing Indirect window Window l window l l l Direct window part must point to an existing Direct window Window l window Alarm l Alarm information displayed on the screen or the l l Alarm display l l information banner must be entered in the system by using Alarm banner l l i logon the alarm information logon function Alarm information displayed on the screen or the Alarm display Alarm information logon banner must be entered in the system by using panasar the alarm information logon function Alarm information displayed on the screen or the Alarm banner Alarm information logon banner must be entered in the system by using poneane the alarm information logon function Event Event information must be entered by using the information Event display Event information logon tool before it can be logon displayed Event information must be entered by using the Event display Event information logon Event information logon tool before it can be displayed Fu
362. ulti State Setting Tag Graphics Position SettingMode Add value ti he vabe 5 Upper Ln 189 Chapter 6 Components 2oOnent Attribute Basic Attribute Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position SettingMode Sub value Basic Attribute Bit State Switch Tag Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMIO HMI HMIO Addr Type LB _ Addr Type LB Code Type BIN of Code Type BIN WordNo 1 Use Addr Tar 190 Chapter 6 Components Bit State Switch Component Attribute Basic Attribute Bit State Switch Tag Graphics Fosition Switch Type E The final display effect of window 4 is shown as follows Save and compile it and then perform the offline simulation The operation effect is shown in the figure below 191 Chapter 6 Components Menu Task Bar Tp Click Stop and the trend graph will hold still Observe the page turning action For each page turning operation the position of the reference coordinate in the leftmost of the trend graph will move the distance of 5 the inc value or dec value in the multi state setting component sampling points There are totally 21 sampling points on the screen and the 20 equal scales divide the screen into 20 blocks Each block covers the distance of 2 sampling points 6 20 3 Time Display Add six numeric display components with three placed in the l
363. unction Parts The Vector Graph Component is similar to the Bitmap Component You can directly place any Vector graphs already in the Vector Graph library in the window without the need to designate any components 1 Click the Vector Graph icon and drag it to the window Select the Vector Graph you want to use from the drop down list as shown in the following figure 246 Chapter 6 Components Vector Graph Component Attribute Graphics Position i Use Vector Graphics Arow 1 00 vg 7 Graphics State 0 2 Press OK and adjust the position and size of the Vector Graph in the window if necessary 3 For the creation of a Vector Graph please refer to Section 5 6 Era ay 6 34 t bay Text Library Component Project Database The Text Library is a database for storing text contents which can be used as tags of components Text stored in the Text Library can be used for multiple components Using this method development time can be lessened by allowing for repeated usage of text and phrases from one Library entry To use text in the library select the check box Use Text Library in the Tag tab of the Component Attribute dialog box and select the text content you want to use One of the greatest features of the Text Library component is the multi language column feature Each text entry in the library has four columns where users can input the same text content in four languages The user can change the
364. user can modify the Initial Window No whenever it is necessary open the project and change the initial window No here and re download the project to the panel Another method for changing the initial window number is introduced in chapter 16 Serial Port 0 Setting Serial Port 1 Setting Serial Port 2 Setting HMI Task Bar HMI Extend Attribute Historic Event Print Setting Screensaver Min Saver win 0 Frarr Pub Win Attr Display below the basic wir gt W Use org win if screen saver ends Pop Win Attr Display onthe top layer i Back light energy save 10 Min Open backlight if alarming Init Window E 0 Level Key Public Window 1 Common y 1Level Key 888888 Fastsel Win 3 Fact Seley 2Level Key 855888 Use Buzzer FileList Win 0 Frame0 TextLib lang 4 Cursor Color Public Window Common Window No The window number of the common window in the project window 1 by default Fast sel Win The window number of the fast selection window in the project window 2 by default Pub Win Attr Common Window Attribute Defines whether the common window of the project is displayed above or under the basic window Pop Win Attr Set whether the pop up window is displayed normally in this way the pop up window doesn t monopolize the topmost layer and other windows can be switched to the topmost layer or it is always displayed in the topmost layer Upload Key Upload Key Password for programs The password helps prohib
365. ut Component Attribution Basic Attribution Numeric Data Trigger Address Font Graphics Position HMI HMIO sg FLE Hs 0 7 Add Type LB z Address Format DDDDD 92 Chapter 4 Windows 2 Window 3 is built into the blank project wizard so after creating a new project the user can find window 3 in the Project construct window Double clicking the icon of Frame 3 will open it The Window Properties dialog box is shown in the following figure Fere you can adj ust the attributes for the wndowfor exanple Nne is Frane3 Width 145 Height 190 and nore Window Attribution Window Safe Level Lowe v Special Attribute E Position Use Background Color x D Y 0 Width 145 Height 1390 Transparence Bottom Window 1 None X 3 Frame Pop Window Type V Tracking Monopoly i F Color Width 0 di v Clipping Coherence PRES A RRR AAAAAAAA FKE he FR RE eh Elo refi AAE FKA3 IAE Fla ESt ENT 93 Window Attribution Window Safe Level Special Attribute Print page 7 Lowe Position 0 iao Height 190 Width 145 Disable Map Keyboard F Use Background Color Filled Color Y E Background Transparence nge 0 Bottom Window 1 None 7 a None Frame width O Frame Color a Pop Window Type V Tracking l Monopoly F Coherence Chapter 4 Windows I Clipping 3 Creat
366. ution Cycle When the value reaches the lower limit it stops at the lower limit 238 Chapter 6 Components The operation becomes active when the window is open The Incremental Value is added to the current value of the designated PLC word register at regular intervals as specified by the Execution Cycle until the Upper Limit is reached Then the Incremental Value is subtracted from the designated PLC word address until zero is reached This cycle is repeated unconditionally Upper time 2 The operation becomes active when the window is open At every break time interval the value in the designated PLC word register 1 is added until the upper limit is reached After then the value is reset to its lower limit and starts the cycle again f i T Pa Fa No Lower S Limit i E o el YES The operation becomes active when the window is open At every break time interval the value in the designated PLC word register is subtracted by Step down 1 until the lower limit is reached After then the value is reset to its upper limit and starts the cycle again 239 Chapter 6 Components When the component is pressed preset constant data is written to the Set Constant designated PLC word address Enter the constant in the Set Value box 3 Click OK to complete the setting and adjust the position and size of the timer component 6 31 Video Components Only Applicable to Castor 121 Cas
367. ve to keep this manual current with the latest developments and product enhancements we recommend verifying the usage of the most current product manual This manual aims to explain the operation and installation of the configuration software for the Castor Gemini and Galaxy Series of HMIs as well as the usage of the extensive features included The latest version of KA Software is for free downloading at www kaspro group com We always recommend using the most recent software version Kaspro Group provides free of charge monthly web based introduction training sessions allowing you to get the most out of your software Please contact us at training kaspro group com If you are interested in participating in a class Onsite and In house training sessions can also be accommodated upon request at a service charge Kaspro Group additionally offers application development services for your new project or application conversion services for those of you upgrading from another brand and seeking to convert the existing application in use Information regarding Application development and or Application conversion assistance can be requested via applications kaspro group com In the event that you should require any additional information not covered in this manual we kind ask you to contact our nearest office location or your local distributor Chapter 1 Installation of KA SOFTWARE Chapter 1 Installation of KA SOFTWARE 1 1 Installing KA SOFTWARE
368. vent information on the event display area Note that lower and upper limits should be set for LW10 to avoid unpredicted errors 202 Chapter 6 Components Graphics Position SettingMode irri Inc value 1 Basic Attribute Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position SettingMode HMAS ca Dec value 1 The completed window 0 is shown in the figure below Caurrerit Temprature 7 Edit window 4 as shown in the figure below resize the window to 320x85 place a bit toggle 203 Chapter 6 Components switch to change the state of LB10 The position of window 4 is 0 0 so it will appear on the top half of the window when LB10 event information is pressed 4 Safe Level Lowest Special Attribute Pintpage Disable Map Keyboard Use Background Color Filled Color Transparence Create window 5 as shown in the figure below resize the window to 320x85 and place a numeric input component for setting the LW30 register The window will appear on the top half of the window when LW30 event information is pressed 8 Save and compile the project then perform online offline simulation or downloading The operation effect is shown in the figure below een m Current aids Q Temprature 8 Nenu Task Bar Ti E Figure 1 LB10 event is triggered and displayed on the event display area 204 Chapter 6 Components Current az Temprature enu Task Bar Ti p
369. w will display the loaded information for the project When a project is being compiled the Compile Information Window will display the compilation progress and error messages if there are any 3 6 Component List Window Select Component List Window under the View menu to open the Component List Window 62 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software e view Tools T Library D Window W Help H Basic Toolbar S Ctrl Alt S Component Labrary Window Ctrl Alt Graphics Toolbar D Ctrl Alt G Turn To Page Toolbar P Ctrl Alt P Position Adjust Toolbar A Ctrl Alt 4 Line Width Toolbar W Ctrl Alt L Line Style Toolbar Ctrl Alt System Toolbar T Ctrl Alt T State Toolbar G Ctrl Alt I Database Toolbar L Ctrl Alt B Code Edit Toolbar B Ctrl Alt D Filled Effect Toolbar E Ctrl Alt H Project Structure Window C Ctrl Alt C Project File List Window F Ctrl Alt F Compile Information Window M Ctrl A4lt Component List Windowx Ctrl Alt E All Graph element list winodow x HMI Frame id Graph element Read PLC Read Address Write PLC Write Address HMIO Frame DWI PLCO 100 LB 9060 HMIO Frame DWO PLCO 100 LB 9064 HMIO Frame3 TDO PLC0 100 LW 9072 HMIO Frames ND1 PLCO 100 LW 9004 HMIO Frame3 NDO PLCO 100 LW 9002 The window shows the information of all components used in the project including HMI panel number configuration frame number component number input PLC number type of input address input a
370. window as shown in the following figure HMD PLCO O a LE I l h COMO B Siemens S7 200 PLOT ne OMRON PLC A OMBON PLC OMRON PLC HMI One HMI icon represents one actual HMI panel the number after HMI helps the user distinguish those panels Right clicking on the HMI icon will popup its own shortcut menu This menu is used to change configuration settings for the selected panel PLC One PLC icon represents one actual PLC The number after the PLC helps the user distinguish those PLCs Right click on the PLC icon will popup its own shortcut menu and this menu is used to change the configuration settings for the selected PLC Wire The wires shown in the Project Window represent the physical connection between the HMI s and PLC s See page 59 for details on connecting the HMI s and PLC s The structural diagram is as follows 60 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software gt Parto Project Name _ Framed p Part1 HMI HMIO me Frame1 yp Part2 ag Frame2 l HMin PLCO PLC gt PLC1 l PLCn The detailed structure is shown in the Project construct window as follows Project construct window Ee aa 2 HMI 0 HMI T3 O Framed F 1 Framet Cwi DW TF 2 Framez 3 Frames I 4 Frame4 Hm
371. window will be truncated If a window has the property of Track the window will track the movement of its father window MN Note If Truncate is selected Track must be selected also Window A and Window B in the following are attached to the base window Normally if you touch Window A it will be displayed in the topmost layer However if the property of Coherence is selected for Window A even if you touch Window A it will not appear in the topmost layer Instead it clings to its father window all the time MN Note After a window is created its number cannot be changed but the name frame and background color can be changed whenever it is necessary Security Level Used to set the security level for a window For details refer to Chapter 12 Security Level Bottom layer Window Used to set the bottom window for the current window A window to be assigned as a bottom window must be an existing one In general components shared by multiple windows can be placed here Frame The frame is recommended to use for a pop up window For the frame width select Chapter 4 Windows any number among 0 through 16 If the frame width is not 0 select other color for the frame There are two ways for changing the window properties 1 Double click the blank area in the window 2 Do not select any component in the window Click the 4 icon on the toolbar Menu Task 4 3 Creating a Window
372. with only one receiver that is the single station capability However the bus of the RS 485 can be connected with a maximum of 128 receivers that is the multi station capability Therefore the user can set up an equipment network with a single RS 485 interface Since the RS 485 interface has excellent noise suppression and anti interference performance long transmission distance and multi station capability it is widely applied Because the half duplex network established through the RS 485 interface needs two connection cables the RS 485 interface adopt shielded twisted pairs for transmission cables Pinout of the Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy RS 485 2 wire is shown as follows 343 Chapter 13 Serial Communication Pino Piname Besson Data receiving transmission signal cable A Pp Bf RE Data receiving transmission signal cable B 344 Chapter14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs Chapter 14 Connection of Kaspro CASTOR Gemini Galaxy with Common PLCs 14 1 OMRON PLC OMRON Sensing tomorrow Connection of OMRON C Series PLC with CASTOR Gemini Galaxy Touch Screen KA SOFTWARE software setting Recommended Optional Setting Precaution Setting PLC Type OMRON CPM2AH OMRON COM COMO COM1 RS232 RS485 Must be the same as the E Data Bits 7ors port settings of the PLC Must be the same as the COM Stop Bits 1 or 2 port settings of the PLC Bits per aco 9600 19200 38400 Must be th
373. y 3 1 Read signed short speed 0 Livy 4 1 Read Compile the following codes define MAX_X 260 Maximum displacement along X axis define MAX Y 180 Maximum displacement along Y axis define MIN_X 0 Minimum displacement along X axis define MIN _Y 0 Minimum displacement along Y axis int MacroEntry direction O increase 1 decrease if direction_x_r decrease lwi_w Iw1_r speed_x if Iw1_r lt MIN_X Iw1_w MIN_X Prevent out of bounds direction x w 0 Change direction else increase Iw1_w Iw1_r speed x if lw1_r gt MAX_X Iw1_w MAX x direction x w 1 301 Chapter 9 Macro Code if direction_y_r decrease lw2_w lw2_r speed _y if Iw2_r lt MIN_Y lw2_ w MIN_Y direction_y_ w 0 else lw2_w Ilw2_r speed y if lw2_r gt MAX_Y lw2_w MAX Y direction_y_w 1 return O Finally add a Timer component as set below Timer Timer Function Fosition Basic Atribute Trigger Address Trigger Mode All time HMI Exe Cycle 1 ms X100ms PLC No Response Mode Immediate Address Type Response State OF Address Repeat Times 0 Format DDDDD Zero means repeat all along Select Execute Macrocode in the Timer Function tab and then select the compiled macrocode Upon completion the configuration interface is shown as follows 302 Chapter 9 Macro Code SWD2 SWD3 x Accelerate decelerate SWD4 SWD5 YAccelerate Y de
374. y To transfer the five words with the starting address of 4x200 to the position RWIOO in the recipe memory set the value of LW9000 to 100 and press the Transmission component key To complete the transmission we have to make a Text Input component to modify the upload data Set Address Type to 4x Address to 200 and Word No to 5 Set Trigger address type to LB and Address to 9000 It is shown in the following figure 278 Chapter 8 Recipe Data nent Attribute Basic Attribute Enable Address Font Graphics Position Priority Normal Change byte order Read Address e Write Address HMI HMIO PLC 0 HMI HMIO0 PLC Addr Type 4X Addr 200 Addr Type LW gt Addr Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo 7 Use Addr Tag WordNo Descinion Make a Number Input component to modify the LW9000 data Set Address Type to LW and Address to 9000 Set trigger address type to LB and address to 9000 It is shown in the following figure mponent Attribute Basic Attribute Numeric Data Enable Address Font Graphics Position Priority Normal Read Address Write Address HMI HMIO PLC HMI HMO PLC Addr Type LW Addr 3000 Addr Type LW Addr Code Type BIN Format DDDDD Code Type BIN WordNo Use Addr Tag WordNo 7 To verify whether the data is transferred place a Text Input component to display the RW300 da
375. y or in the future Microsoft strongly recommends that you stop this installation now and contact the hardware vendor for software that has passed Windows Logo testing Continue Anpan STOP Installation 70 Chapter 3 Description of the KA Software Software Found New Hardware Wizard Completing the Found New Hardware Wizard The wizard has finished installing the software for kA SOFT USB aS Click Finish to close the wizard Device Manager Fie Action View Help gt g p i Legacy Audio Drivers i Legacy video Capture Devices el A Media Control Devices i Video Codecs YAMAHA Legacy D51 WOM Driver AD YAMAHA Native 051 WOM Driver Hss Storage volumes H System devices ee Universal Serial Bus controllers InteR 62801F6 FBM USB Universal Host Controller 2658 Intel R 62601F6 FEM USB Universal Host Controller 2659 Intel R 62601FB FEM USB Universal Host Controller 265 4 Intel R 62601FB FEM USB Universal Host Controller 2656 gt Intel A280 FRIFRM USB2 Enhanced Host Controller 265C Biase LSB Mass Storage USB Root Hub USB Root Hub USB Root Hub USB Root Hub USB Root Hub Once the driver is installed successfully the user can select My Computer gt Properties gt Hardware gt Device Manager gt Universal Serial Bus Controller to check whether the USB device is connected to and identified by the PC as shown in the following figure The KASPRO USB appears only when the DI
376. y set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Address The lower word register address corresponding to the Animation component Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words It is restricted to 2 for input address Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the Animation component 4 Go to the Animation tab Basic Attribute Animation Tag Graphics Moving Node List Add Node Inset Mode Delete Mode Shit Up Shit Down 144 Chapter 6 Components No of States Select the total number of states for the animation component This determines the number of states of Vector Graphs or bitmaps that will be displayed along the predetermined path Add Node Add a new moving node to the end of the current predetermined path Insert Node Insert a new moving node after the moving node being selected Delete Node Delete the selected moving node Shift Up move the selected node to the position before the previous one Shift Down move the selected node to the position after the next one Size of Graphics the size of the graphic representing the moving object Node 0 1 2 3 Select a designated track node Point O is the start node point 1 is the second node and so on The total number of moving nodes depends on the number of moving nodes placed on the screen when X Y corresponds to the coordi
377. y two video channels for switching and the Tag set to Channel Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position Priority Input Address e Output Address Hbl PLC HMI HMO PLE Addr Type Addr Addr Type E Addr 0 Code Type Format DDDOD Code Type BIN Format DOODO Word Use Addr Tag WordWo 1 Use Addr Tag Description SwEO r Word Setting Component Attribution Basic Attribution Multi State Setting Tag Graphics Position Settinghode Add value H Inc value Upper Limit e Place a word setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 0 243 Chapter 6 Components the Setting Mode to Sub Value the eDec value to 1 the Lower Limit to 0 and the Tag set to Channel 6 Place a word setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 1 the Setting Mode to Add Value the Inc Value to 8 the Upper Limit to 255 value range 0 255 and the Tag set to Brightness 7 Place a word setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 1 the Setting Mode to Sub Value the Dec value to 8 the Lower Limit to 0 and the Tag set to Brightness 8 Place a word setting component with the output address type set to LW the address to 2 the Se
378. ype The address type must be properly set refer to PLC manual for detailed information Address The address of the word registers corresponding to the Multi State Display component The usage of register address varies with different PLCs refer to PLC manual for detailed information Code Type BIN or BCD No of Words Select 1 or 2 for input address single word or double word Use Address Tag Whether to use the address entered in the address tag library For details refer to Section 6 34 Description A reference name not displayed that you assign to the Multi State Display component 131 Chapter 6 Components 2 Go to the Multi State Display tab and set the number of states for Multi State Display component The user can set a maximum of 32 states Multi State Display Component Attribute Basic Attribute Multi State Display Tag Graphics Position State Num 0 0 Data mapping Every state of the Multi State Display component is linked to a unique value of the designated PLC word register When the register value equals to one of the Map Values in the mapping list the multi state display component will display the corresponding state The mapping detail is listed in the Data Mapping list the user can view and edit the mapping relationship between state number and register value Go to the Tag tab Fill in text to denote different states or leave it empty Go to the Graphics tab select a Vector Graph or
379. ype Address CodeTypeWordNo Type Single page or multiple pages If the user selects the single page mode it will only display the data change of the sampling points in the current page Points outside of that page will not be saved or displayed If the user selects multiple page display mode each channel of the XY Graph can save number of pages x number of sampling points In this way when the XY Graph rolls forward the previous sampling data will not be lost Historical data will be saved to the memory for future reference Please note that a maximum of 31 pages of historical data are available which is determined by the No of pages parameter Attribute Start from left or Start from right In other words it determines whether the graph is displayed from the left to right or from the right to left when displaying sampling data Sampling Time Time interval between two pages of sampling points in seconds No of Sampling Points Number of sampling points displayed on the graph No of Pages When the Type is set to Multiple Pages this box is available Channel Number of tracks to be displayed corresponding to the number of word registers Two word registers correspond to one track Pause The bit address that controls the start or stop of the XY graph in other words the sampling data stops when the Hold bit is turned ON and the sampling continues and XY graph will be dynamically displayed when the Hold bit is turned OFF
380. ze Move Left by One Pixel Moves a component left by one pixel Move Right by One Pixel Moves a component t right by one pixel Move Up by One Pixel Moves a component upward by one pixel Move Down by One Pixel Moves a component downward by one pixel Left If the text content exceeds two lines the text lines will align to the left also applicable to components Align Right If the text content exceeds two lines the text lines will align to the right also applicable to components Align Top Sets multiple components in top alignment mode Align Bottom Sets multiple components in bottom alignment mode Vertical Center If the text content exceeds two lines the text will be arranged in the vertical center alignment mode also applicable to components Horizontal Center If the text content exceeds two lines the text will be arranged in the horizontal center alignment mode also applicable to components Equal Width Sets equal width for multiple components Equal Height Sets equal height for multiple components Equal Size Sets equal size for multiple components Top Moves a component to the topmost layer Bottom Moves a component to the bottommost layer Group Makes multiple marked components into a group Ungroup Removes the Group attribute each parts is now seperate Equal Horizontal Space Sets equal horizontal space for multiple components Equal Vertical S
381. ze of the trend graph component Examples of a single page trend graph and a multi page trend graph 6 20 1 Single page Trend Graph Firstly create a project and save it Add a single page trend graph component In the Basic Attribute tab set Input Address to LWO In the Trend Graph tab set Sampling Time to 1 second No of Sampling Points to 21 and 183 Chapter 6 Components Channel to 4 as shown in the figure below Trend Graph Component Attribute Print Print Trig Line Position Basic Attribute Trend Graphics Channel Save Historic Data Type Single page Atr Startfrom Left Sam Type Time 1 X 1s Sam Type Save Time 2 Fage um 1 Channel 4 HMI PLC Addr Type Address CodeTypeWordNo HMIC 0 LB 0 BIN W Pause HME O LB 100 BIN HME O 0 BIN HMI 0 0 BIN In the Channel tab set the color of four track lines respectively to blue red green and purple Set the minimum value to 0 and the maximum values respectively to 500 1000 1500 and 2000 Trend Graph Component Attribute Posi Save Historic Data No Line Width Datatype Y Zero Y Span Color __ J 500 16 bit signed Adjust the size of the trend graph component Add two scale components one is horizontal and the other is vertical and each is divided into 20 equal scales Place them together to form a group and place the trend graph component on the top Please note that the size of these

Kaspro KA-Software Manual Rev_001

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents